Drills 1

SECTION I

GENERAL DRILLS INFORMATION

1.1. PURPOSE AND SCOPE

This portion of the manual provides guidance for PNP-wide uniformity in the conduct
of drill. It includes methods of instructing drill, teaching techniques, individual and unit drill,
manual of arms for police weapons and various other aspects of basic drill instruction.

This is design for used by policeman of all PNP occupational skills, including cadets
and recruit in the initial training environment. So as to maintain consistency throughout the
PNP, the procedures prescribed herein should be adhered to as closely as possible

1.2. GENERAL

a. The PNP has prescribed its own drill regulations with the end goal of
cultivating to the full, alertness in the presence of mind of each and every police personnel,
not only during drill but at all times. These attributes of character are essential to the
members of the PNP.

b. All movements in this manual are precision movements designed further to foster
proper coordination, among police personnel. Team work is the final result.

c. In the police service we help attain this teamwork through drill and
ceremonies.

d. Drill consists of certain movements by which the police-type squad, platoon,

company or battalion is moved in an orderly manner from one formation to another or from
one place to another or both. These movements are executed with smartness, order and
precision. Each individual in the squad, platoon or company does his part exactly as what he
is supposed to do.

e. The primary purpose of drill is to teach a precise and orderly way of doing
things. As drill increases skill and coordination, it accustoms a police to group response, to
commands and it promotes teamwork. It is important for him to know and understand drill;
otherwise its value is lost. Remember drill is conducted with precision, hence perfection is
the only accepted standard. Drill periods are frequent and of short duration.

f. Ceremonies consist of formations and movements in which large number of

police troops takes part. The troops execute movements together at a simple command. This
therefore requires unified action – teamwork. The colors, the standards and the martial music
of the ceremonies - all – inspire the men to take part in the ceremony with pride in
themselves and their organization. This pride finds expression in perfect responses to
commands.
 Drills 2
g. Finally, all get a certain amount of pleasure from doing anything well in a joint
effort with others. A police ceremony provides the same reaction. After every successful
ceremony, every police-participant can proudly claim” I was there” – actively as an officer or
just a plain policeman in the ranks.

1.3. DRILL TERMS – To help understand the meaning of drill terms, the following
definitions are included:

Alignment: A straight line upon which several elements or teams are formed or the
dressing of several elements upon a straight line. A unit is aligned when it is dressed.

Base: The element on which a movement is regulated. For instance, in executing

right front into the leading squad is the base.

Cadence: The uniform rhythm by which a movement is executed or the number

of steps or counts per minute of which a movement is executed. Drill movements are
normally executed at the cadence of quick time or double time.

Center: The middle point or element of a command. In a platoon of three

squads in the line, the second squad from the right is the center. With four squads in the
platoon the second squad from the right is the center squad (platoon).]

Column: A formation in which the elements are placed one behind another.
Example: a column of files (single men [elements are placed] places one behind another);
column of squads (squads one behind another); and column of platoon (one behind another).

Depth: The space from front to rear of any formation or a position including
the front and rear elements. The depth of a man is assumed to be 12 inches.

Distance: The space between elements when the elements are on behind the
other. Between units, it varies with the size of the formation; between individuals, it is an
arm’s length to the front plus six (6) inches or about forty (40) inches, measured to be twelve
{12} inches.

Double Time: Cadence at a rate of 18 - steps per minute.

Echelon: One of a series of elements formed one behind another. Also a

modification of line formation in which adjacent elements are disposed one in rear of the
other.

Element: An individual, squad, platoon, company or larger body, forming part

of a larger body.

File: Two men, the front-rank man and the corresponding man of the rear
rank. The front-rank man is the file leader. A file which has no rear –rank man is “blank
file”. The term file applies to a single man in a single rank formation. It is also a single
column of men one behind the other.
 Drills 3
Flank: The right or left extremity of a unit, either in line or column. The
element on the extreme right or left of the line. A direction at a right angle to the direction,
on an element or a formation is facing.

Formation: Arrangement of the elements of a unit in line, in column or any other

prescribed manner.

Front: The direction in which a command faces.

Frontage: The space occupied by an element measured from one flank to the
opposite flank. The frontage of a man is assumed to be twenty-two (22) inches, measured
from the right to the left elbow and therefore does not include twelve (12) inches between all
men in line. The frontage of a squad however includes the intervals between men.

Guide: The man whom the command or element thereof regulates its march.
This is often the case in battle or on practice marches. In a squad drill, a policeman (number
one (1) front rank) is often the guide.

Head: The leading element of a column. To understand this definition one

must remember that an element is a file, squad, platoon, company or larger body forming part
of a still another larger body.

Interval: The lateral space between elements on the same line. An interval is
measured between individuals from shoulder to shoulder; and between formations, this is
done from flank to flank. Unit commanders and those with them are not considered in
measuring interval between elements of the unit with which it is posted. Considered interval
between individuals is one (1) arm’s length. Close interval is the horizontal distance between
shoulder and elbow when the left hand is placed on the left hip.

Left: The left extremity or element of a body.

Line: A formation in which the different elements are “abreast of each

other” means on the same line. The other vital part of this definition centers on the word
“element”. A section may be an element, therefore if the leading elements of several sections
are on the same line, it becomes a line formation.

Loose Pieces: Rifles and automatic rifles not used in making stacks.

Oblique: An angle between zero (0) degree and forty-five (45) degrees. Right
/Left Oblique, March is forty-five (45) degrees.

Order, close: The formation in which the units, in double rank, are separated
by intervals greater than that in close order.

Pace: Thirty (30) inches, the length of the full step in quick time. The pace
at double time is thirty-six (36) inches.

Piece: The term “piece” as used in this text means the rifle or automatic rifle.
 Drills 4
Point of the Rest: The point at which a formation begins; specifically, the points
toward which units are aligned in successive movements. For example, in executing “On
right into line,” the point of rest is the place where the leading squad halts.

Quick Time: Cadence at a rate of one hundred twenty (120) steps per minute.

Rank: A line of men placed side by side. There are two ranks: the front and
rear rank.

Right: The right extremity or element of a body of troops.

Slow Time: Cadence at sixty (60) steps per minute.

Step: The distance measured from heel to heel between the feet of a man
walking. A step may be any prescribed number of inches. The half step and back step are
fifteen (15) inches. The right step and the left step are twelve (12) inches. The steps in quick
and double time are thirty (30) and thirty-six (36) inches, respectively.

Successive Movements: A maneuver in which the various elements of a

command execute a certain movement one after another as distinguished from a simultaneous
movement.

To revoke a command: To cancel a command that has not been carried out, or
to start a movement improperly begun from a halt the command, MANUMBALIK, is given.
On this command, the movement stops and the men resume their former position.

Partial changes of direction: To change the direction of a column by forty—

five (45) degrees to the left or right, the command is LIKO HATING-KANAN
(KALIWA), KAD. To execute a slight change of direction, the command PAGAWING
KANAN (KALIWA), is given. The guide or guiding elements move in the indicated
direction, and the rest of the unit follows.

Numbering units: For drill purposes, platoons within each company are
numbered from right to left when the company is in line and from front to rear when the
company is in column. Squads within each platoon are numbered from right to left when the
platoon is in line and from front to rear when the platoon is in column.

Post: Post means the correct place for an officer or police non-
commissioned officer to stand. This can be in front, behind or by the side of a unit. When
changes of formation involve changes of posts, the new post is taken by the most direct route
and as soon practicable after the command of execution. Officers and non-commissioned
officers who have prescribed duties in connection with the movement take their posts when
the duties are completed. In executing a movement or facing and when moving from one
post to another, officers and police non-commissioned officers maintain a police bearing and
move with smartness and precision.

a. In movements after the first formation, guidon bearers and special units maintain
their positions with respect to the flank or the end of the unit to which they were originally
posted.
 Drills 5
b. In formation and movements, a Police Non-Commissioned Officer (PNCO)
commanding an element takes the same post as that prescribed for an officer. When giving
commands, making or receiving reports (except squad leaders in ranks), or drilling a unit, a
Police non-commissioned officer armed with a rifle carries it at the right shoulder.

c. When acting as an instructor, the Police Officer goes wherever his presence is
needed to correct mistakes and supervise the performance of the men in ranks.

Counting Cadence

a. Except at the beginning of basic training, the commander or instructor does not
count cadence to acquaint the men with cadence rhythm. When a man gets out of step, he is
corrected by the commander who halts the unit and then moves everybody off in the step.
Counting cadence by the group helps to teach group coordination, cadence and rhythm. To
help a man keep in step, the commander encourages him to keep his head up and watch the
head and shoulders of the man in front of him. The command is; BILANG HAKBANG,
NA. The command of execution is given as the left foot strikes the ground. The next time
the left foot strikes the ground, the group calls the cadence for eight steps in a firm and
vigorous manner as follows: ISA, DALAWA, TATLO, APAT…However, do not execute
this command in a boisterous manner: the good instructor holds his counting to a minimum.

b. As policemen begin to master the art of drill, instructors try to create a spirit of
competition among individual and between units. Although repetition is necessary when
teaching drill, instructors should use competitive drill exercises to ensure that drill does not
become boring or monotonous.

c. Mass commands are used to develop confidence and promote enthusiasm. They
are effective in developing a command voice when instructing a leadership course.
Procedures for using mass commands are discussed in Section 2.
 Drills 6

SECTION II

COMMANDS AND THE COMMAND VOICE

COMMANDS

2.1. GENERAL

a. A drill command is an oral of a commander or leader. The precision with which a

movement is affected by the manner in which the command is given.

b. The following rules for giving commands apply to the commander when the unit
as a separate unit and not as part of a larger formation.

1) When at halt, the commander faces the troops when giving commands. On
commands that set the unit in motion (marching from one point to another), the commander
moves simultaneously with the unit to maintain correct position within the formation.

2) When marching, the commander turns his head in the direction of the troops
to give commands.

3) Exceptions to these rules occur during ceremonies.

c. When elements drill as a part of a larger unit, the rules for supplementary
commands apply. (See supplementary commands, 2.5).

d. The commander gives command MANUMBALIK (AS YOU WERE) to revoke

a preparatory command that he has given. The command MANUMBALIK must be given
prior to the command of execution. The commander cannot cancel the command of
execution with MANUMBALIK. If an improper command is not revoked, the personnel
execute the movement in the best manner possible.

2.2. TWO-PART COMMANDS

a. Most drill commands have two parts; the preparatory command and the command
of execution. Neither is a command itself, but the parts are termed command to simplify
instruction. The command HANDA (READY), SIPAT (AIM), PUTOK (FIRE) are
considered to be two-part commands even though they contain two pre-commands.
 Drills 7
1) The preparatory command states the movement to be carried out and mentally
prepares the policeman for its execution. In the command PASULONG, KAD, the
preparatory command is PASULONG.

2) The command of execution tells when the movement is to be carried out. In

PASULONG, KAD, the command of execution is KAD.

b. To change direction of a unit when marching, the preparatory command and

command of execution for each movement are given so they begin and end on the foot in the
direction of the turn: KANANG PANIG, NA (RIGHT FLANK) is given as the right foot
strikes the marching surface and KALIWANG PANIG, (LEFT FLANK) as the left foot
strikes the marching surface. The interval between the preparatory command and the
command of execution is normally one step or count.

2.3. ENGLISH VERSION TO FILIPINO VERSION

a. The PNP commands were derived from the AFP English version and
subsequently translated to Filipino version. This attempt to localize the English version has
brought about varied interpretations as to the preciseness of the “term” being used. In the
command of execution for example, the words RAP, NA, KAD, TA and others are
sometimes misused/interchanged as the commander may opt to what he thinks is appropriate.

b. To provide for uniformity, simplicity and preciseness and to suit the Filipino
commands in terms of voice control, distinctiveness, inflections and cadence the following
guidelines are set forth as a rule:

1) In general, the word NA is used to signal the command of

execution except the following:

a) TA – (Abbreviated SANDATA) manual of arms for rifles and pistol,

except for KALIS and TALIBONG, which fall under the general rule.

b) KAD – (Abbreviated LAKAD) from at rest to motion. Example:

PASULONG, KAD. For other commands given while in motion , the general rule will
apply. Example: LIKO SA KANAN, NA.

c) TO – (Abbreviated HINTO) from motion to rest.

d) RAP – (Abbreviated HARAP) in HANDA HARAP as literal translation

of READY FRONT.

e) DA – (Abbreviated HUMANDA) for attention.

f) NGA – ( Abbreviated PAHINGA) in “TIKAS PAHINGA” or PARADE

REST.

g) Combined Commands

h) Supplementary Commands

i) Mass Commands
 Drills 8

j) Directives

2.4. COMBINED COMMANDS

In some commands, the preparatory command and the command of

execution are combined; for example, HUMANAY (FALL IN), PALUWAG (AT EASE),
LUMANSAG (DISMISS). These commands are given without inflection and at a
uniformly high pitch and loudness comparable to that for a normal command of execution.

2.5. SUPPLEMENTARY COMMANDS

a. Supplementary commands are oral orders given by a subordinate

leader to reinforce and complement a commander’s order. They ensure proper understanding
and execution of a movement. They extend to the lowest subordinate exercising control over
an element by the command as a separate element within the same formation.

a. A supplementary command may be a preparatory command, a portion of a pre-

command or a two-part command. It is normally given between the pre-command and the
command of execution. However, when a command requires element of a unit to execute a
movement different from other elements within the same formation, or the same movement
at a different time, subordinate leaders give their supplementary commands at the time
prescribed by the procedure covering that particular movement. Example: the platoon is in
column formation, and the platoon leader commands DALAWANG TUDLING
SUNUDSUNURAN MULA SA KALIWA (pause) KAD, the first and second TUDLING
leaders command PASULONG; the third and fourth TUDLING leaders command
MANATILI (Stand fast). On the command of the execution KAD, the first and second
squad march forward. At the appropriate time, the squad leader (third squad) nearest the
moving element commands LIKO HATING KALIWA, KAD (for both remaining squads).
As the third and fourth squad leaders reach the line of march, they automatically execute a
LIKO HATING KANAN and obtain normal distance behind the first and second squads.

c. A subordinate leader gives all supplementary commands over his right shoulder
except when his command is based on the actions of an element on his left or when the sub-
element is to execute a LIKO SA KALIWA, LIKO HATING KALIWA and
KALIWANG PANIG. Giving commands over the left shoulder occurs when changing
configuration or a formation, such as forming a file or a column of fours and reforming.

NOTE: When in formation at present arms and the preparatory command of order
of arms is given, the subordinate leaders terminate their salute before giving
supplementary commands.

d. Supplementary commands are not given by a sub-leader for the combined

commands HUMANAY, PALUWAG, TIWALAG, or for a mass drill when his element
forms part of a massed formation. However, supplementary commands are given when
forming a mass or when forming a column from a mass.

e. Except for commands while in mass formation, platoon leaders give

supplementary commands following all preparatory commands of the commander. When the
 Drills 9
preparatory command is BALANGAY, the platoon leaders immediately come to attention
and command PULUTONG. The company commander allows for all supplementary
commands before giving the command of execution.

f. When no direction is given, the response is understood to be forward, when no

rate of march is given, the response is SIGLANG HAKBANG (QUICK TIME). Normally
when a direction or rate of march is included in the pre-command, only the direction or rate
of march is given as a supplementary command.

2.6. MASS COMMANDS

a. Mass commands may be used to develop confidence and promote

enthusiasm. (They are definitely effective in developing a command voice when instructing
a leadership course).

b. When the instructor wants the unit to use mass commands, he commands SA
IYONG PAG-UTOS (AT YOUR COMMAND). The instructor gives a preparatory
command describing the movement to be performed; for example, face the platoon to the
right. The command of execution is NA (COMMAND). When the instructor says NA
(COMMAND), all personnel in the unit give the command HARAP SA KANAN (RIGHT
FACE), in unison and simultaneously executes the movement.

c. To give mass commands while marching, the instructor gives the preparatory
command for the movement and substitutes NA (COMMAND) for the command of
execution NA (MARCH); for example, LIKO SA KANAN, NA (COLUMN RIGHT,
COMMAND); PABALIK, NA (REAR, COMMAND).
d. Mass commands for the execution of the manual of arms are given in the same
manner as described in subparagraph a-c.

e. When the instructor wants to stop mass commands, he commands SA AKING

PAG-UTOS (AT MY COMMAND), the normal method of drilling is then resumed.

2.7. DIRECTIVES

a. Directives are oral orders given by the commander that direct or cause a
subordinate leader to take action.

b. The commander gives directives rather than commands when it is more

appropriate for subordinate elements to execute a movement or perform a task as
independent elements of the same formation.

c. Directives are given in sentence form and are normally prefixed by the
terms”IBUKA ANG TALUDTOD AT ITUNGKO ANG SANDATA”. Example:
“ITANGHAL ANG SANDATA”.

d. “PAMUNUAN ANG INYONG PANGKAT O TILAP, PULUTONG,

BALANGAY” are the only directive on which commander relinquishes his command and on
which salutes are exchanged.
 Drills 10
e. A subordinate Commander upon receiving a directive will resort to the normal
two-part command.

THE COMMAND VOICE

2.8. GENERAL

A correctly delivered command will be understood by everyone in the unit. Correct

commands have a tone, cadence and a snap that demand willing, correct and immediate
response.

2.9. VOICE CONTROL

a. The loudness of a command is adjusted to the number of policemen in the unit.

Normally, the commander is to the front and center of the unit and speaks facing the unit so
that his voice reaches everyone.

b. It is necessary for the voice to have carrying power, but excessive exertion is
unnecessary and harmful. A typical result of trying too hard is the almost unconscious
tightening of the neck muscle to force sound out. This produces strain, hoarseness, sore
throat and worst of all instinct and jumbled sounds instead of clear commands. Ease is
achieved through good posture, proper breathing and correct adjustment of throat and mouth
muscles and confidence.

c. The best posture for giving commands is the position of attention. Policemen in
formation notice the posture of their leader. If his posture is improper (relaxed, slouched,
stiff or uneasy) the subordinates will imitate it.

d. The most important muscle used in breathing is the diaphragm – the large
muscle that separates the chest cavity from the abdominal cavity. The diaphragm
automatically controls normal breathing and used to control the breath in giving commands.

e. The throat, mouth and nose act as amplifiers and help to give fullness
(resonance) and projection to the voice.

2.10. DISTINCTIVENESS

a. Distinctiveness depends on the correct use of the tongue, lips and teeth which
form the separate sounds of a word and group the sounds into syllables. Distinct commands
are effective; indistinct commands cause confusion. All commands can be pronounced
correctly without loss of effect. Emphasize correct enunciation (distinctiveness). To
enunciate clearly, make full use of the lips, tongue and lower jaw.

b. To develop the ability to give clear, distinct commands, practice giving

commands slowly and carefully, prolonging the syllables. Then, gradually increase the rate
of delivery to develop proper cadence, still enunciating each syllable distinctly.

2.11. INFLECTION
 Drills 11

Inflection is the rise and fall in pitch and the tone changes of voice.

a. The preparatory command is the command that indicates movement.

Pronounce each preparatory command with a rising inflection. The most desirable pitch,
when beginning a preparatory command, is near the level of the natural speaking voice. A
common fault with beginners is to start the preparatory command in a pitch so high that, after
employing a rising inflection for the preparatory command it is impossible to give the
command execution with clarity or without strain. A good rule to remember is to begin a
command near the natural pitch of the voice.

b. The command of execution is the command that indicates when a movement is

to be executed. Give it in a sharper tone and in a slightly higher pitch than the last syllable of
the preparatory command. It must be given with plenty of snap. The best way to develop a
command voice is to practice.

c. In combined commands, such as HUMANAY (FALL IN) and TIWALAG

(FALL OUT), the preparatory command and command of execution are combined. Give
these commands without inflection and with the uniform high pitch and loudness of a normal
command of execution.

2.12. CADENCE

a. Cadence, in commands, means a uniform and rhythmic flow of words. The

interval between commands is uniform in length for any given troop unit. This is necessary
so that everyone in the unit will be able to understand the preparatory command and will
know when to expect the command of execution. For the squad or platoon in march, except
when the supplementary commands need to be given, the interval of time is that which
allows one step (or count) between the preparatory command and the command of execution.
The same interval is used for commands given at the halt. Longer commands, such as
KANANG PANIG NA (RIGHT FLANK MARCH) must be started so that the preparatory
command will end on the proper foot and leave a full count between the preparatory
command and command of execution.

b. When the supplementary commands are necessary, the commander should

allow for one count between the preparatory command and the subordinate leader’s
supplementary command and an additional count after the subordinate command but before
the command of execution.
 Drills 12

SECTION III

INDIVIDUAL MOVEMENTS WITHOUT ARMS

MOVEMENTS WHILE AT HALT

3.1. GENERAL

a. This chapter contains most of the individual positions and stationary

movements required in drill. This position and the correct execution of the movement, in
every detail, should be learned before proceeding to other drill movements.

b. Movements are initiated from the position of attention. However, some rest
movements may be executed from other rest positions.

3.2. POSITION OF ATTENTION

a. In coming to attention, bring your heels together smartly on the same line. Hold
them as near each other as the conformation of your body permits.

b. Turn you feet out equally, forming an angle of 45 degrees.

c. Keep your knees straight without stiffness.

d. Hold your hips level, your body erect, your chest lifted and arched, your
shoulders square and even.

e. Let your arms hang straight down without stiffness, thumbs along the seams of
your trousers. Hold the back of your hands out, with the fingers held naturally so that the
thumbs rest along the tip of the forefingers.

f. Keep your head erect and squarely to the front, your chin drawn in so that the
axis of your head and neck is vertical. Look straight to the front (about 30 yards ahead.

g. Rest the weight of your body equally on the heels and the balls of your feet.

h. Remain silent and do not move unless otherwise directed.

3.3. REST POSITION AT THE HALT

a. Parade Rest – at the command PAHINGA, or TIKAS, PAHINGA, move your

left foot smartly 12 inches to the left of the right foot. Keep your legs straight so that the
weight of your body rests on both feet. At the same time, your arms hanging naturally clasp
 Drills 13
your hands behind your back, just below the belt line, palms flattened to the rear, thumb and
fingers of your left hands clasping the right hand without stiffness. Remain silent and do not
move. This command is executed from the position of attention only. Tindig Paluwag,
Paluwag and Pahinga may be executed from this position.

b. Stand At Ease – the command for this movement is TINDIG PALUWAG. On

the command of execution PALUWAG, execute parade rest, but turn the head and eyes
directly toward the person in charge of the formation. At ease or rest may be executed from
this position.

c. At Ease – The command for this movement is PALUWAG. On the command

PALUWAG, the policeman must remain standing and silent with his right foot in place; he
can turn his head left or right and bring his hand forward. PAHINGA may be executed from
this position.

d. Rest – The command for this movement is PAHINGA. On the command

PAHINGA, the policeman may move or talk, unless otherwise directed, with his right foot in
place. At Ease may be executed from this position.

e. Fall Out

1) At the command TIWALAG, you can leave the ranks but you are required to
remain in the immediate area. You resume your former place at attention in ranks at the
command HUMANAY.

2) Being at any of the rests except TIWALAG, to resume the position of

attention, the commands are TILAP, HUMANDA. At the command TILAP, take the
position of parade rest; at the command HUMANDA, take the position of attention.

3.4. EYES RIGHT

a. Used as a courtesy to reviewing officers and dignitaries during parades and

ceremonies. It is a one-count movement and the command is given while halted at attention
or marching at quick time. The command is HANDA KANAN TINGIN (KALIWA), NA;
HANDA, HARAP.

b. Assume you are halted at attention. Upon the approach of the reviewing officer,
the unit leader will command, TINGIN SA KANAN. On the command of execution, NA,
and for the account of one, all members of the formation will smartly turn their heads 45
degrees to the right. The shoulders remain square to the front. There is no command to
terminate this movement. When the reviewing officer comes into your line of vision, you
will follow his movements with your head and eyes until they are straight to the front. At
this time the movement is terminated, and you will remain at the position of attention until
given another command.

3.5. FACING AT THE HALT

a. Facing to the flank is a two-count movement. The command is HARAP SA

KANAN, NA. On the command of execution NA, slightly raise the left heel and right toe,
and turn 90 degrees to the right heel, assisted by a slight pressure on the ball of the right foot.
Keep the right leg straight without stiffness and allow the left leg to bend naturally. On the
 Drills 14
second count, place the left foot beside the right foot, resuming the position of attention.
Arms remain at the sides, as in the position of attention, throughout this movement. When
the command is HARAP SA KALIWA, NA, the reverse movement shall apply.

b. Facing to the rear is a two-count movement. The command is TUMALIKOD,

NA. On the command of execution NA, move the toe of the right foot to a point touching the
marching surface about half the length of the foot to the rear and slightly to the left of the left
heel. Rest most of the weight of the heel of the left foot and allow the right knee to bend
naturally. On the second count, turn to the right 180 degrees on the left heel and ball of the
right foot, resuming the position the position of attention. Arms remain at the sides, as in the
position of attention, throughout this movement.

3.6. HAND SALUTE

a. The hand salute is a one-count movement. The command is PUGAY KAMAY,

NA. When wearing headgear with visor (with or without glasses), on the command of
execution NA, raise the right hand sharply, fingers and thumb extended and joined, palm
facing down, and place the tip of the right forefinger on the rim of the visor slightly to the
right of the right eye. The outer edge of the hand is barely canted downward so that neither
the back of the hand nor the palm is clearly visible from the front. The hand and wrist are
straight, the elbow inclined slightly forward, and the upper arm is horizontal to the ground
with your forearm inclined at 45 degrees.

This position and stationary movement required in drills should be executed

properly and should be learned before proceeding to other drill movements.

SALUTING (Unarmed)

MIDDLE FINGER
BARELY
TOUCHING THE TIP
OF THE EYEBROW

CLIP FINGERS

45 DEGREE ANGLE

ARM PARALLEL TO
THE GROUND

b. When hearing headgear without visor (or uncovered) and not wearing glasses,
execute the hand salute in the same manner as previously described in sub-paragraph a,
 Drills 15
except touch the tip of the right forefinger to the forehead near and slightly t the right of the
right eyebrow.

c. When wearing headgear without visor (or uncovered) and wearing glasses,
execute the hand salute in the same manner as described in sub paragraph a, except touch
the tip of the right forefinger to that point on the glasses where the temple piece of the frame
meets the right edge of the right brow.

d. Order arms from the hand salute is a one-count movement. The command is
BABA, NA. On the command of execution NA, return the hand sharply to the side,
resuming the position of attention.

3.7. REMOVE/RETURN HEADGEAR

a. The remove headgear is a two-count movement. The command is ALIS

KUPYA, NA. On the last note of the preparatory command ALIS KUPYA, hold your visor
with your right hand (with your left hand if under arms), include the chin strap if making use
of it. And at the command of execution NA remove the headgear from your head and bring
the cap to your side as illustrated in page 8.

b. In returning the headgear, the command is BALIK KUPYA, NA. On the last
note of the preparatory command BALIK KUPYA, replace the headgear (if making use of a
chin strap, fix the strap in your chin and hold your visor again) holding your visor; at the
command of execution NA bring down your hand smartly to the position of order
arms/attention.

STEPS AND MARCHING

3.8. GENERAL

a. This section contains all the steps in marching of the individual police. These
steps should be learned thoroughly before proceeding to unit drill.

b. All marching movements executed from the halt are initiated from the position
of attention.

c. Except for route step march and ease march, all marching movements are
executed while marching at attention. Marching at attention is the combination of the
position of attention and the procedures of attention and the procedures for the prescribed
step executed simultaneously.

d. When executed from the halt, all steps right step begin with the left foot.

e. For short-distance marching movements, the commander may designate the

number of steps forward, backward, or sideward by giving the appropriate command:
ISANG HAKBANG PAKANAN, KAD or, DALAWANG HAKBANG PASULONG
(PAURONG), KAD. On the command of execution KAD, step off with the appropriate
foot, and halt automatically after completing the number of steps designated. Unless
otherwise specified, when directed to execute steps forward, the steps will be 30-inch steps.
 Drills 16
f. All marching movements are executed in the cadence of quick time (120 steps
per minute), except the 30-inch step, which may be executed in the cadence of 180 steps per
minute on the command SIGLANG HAKBANG, NA.

g. A step is the prescribed distance from one heel to the other heel of a marching
police.

h. All 15-inch steps are executed for a short distance only.

i. Both the preparatory command and the command of execution are given as the
foot in the direction of the turn strikes the ground. Normally, for units no larger than a squad
or platoon the preparatory command is given as your left (or right) foot strikes the ground.
For units larger than a platoon, time is allowed for the unit leaders to repeat the preparatory
command.

3.9. THE 30-INCH STEP (QUICK TIME)

a. To march with a 30-inch step from the halt, the command is PASULONG,
KAD. On the preparatory command PASULONG, shift weight of the body to the right foot
without noticeable movement. On the command of execution KAD, step forward 30 inches
with the left foot and continue marching with 30-inch steps, keeping the head and eyes fixed
to the front. The arms swing in a natural motion, without exaggeration and without bending
at the elbows, approximately nine (9) inches straight to the front as in the position of
attention so that the fingers just clear the trousers.

b. To halt while marching, the command TILAP (PULUTONG), HINTO is

given. The preparatory command TILAP (PULUTONG) is given as either foot strikes the
marching surface as long as the command of execution TO is given the next time that foot
strikes the marching surface. The halt is executed in two counts. After HINTO is
commanded, execute the additional step required after the command of execution and then
bring the trail foot alongside the lead foot, assuming the position of attention and terminating
the movement.

c. Quick time from Double Time. Assume you are marching forward at double
time and you receive the command, SIGLANG HAKBANG, NA. The command of
execution may be given as either foot strikes the deck. The command will be given as the
left foot strikes the deck. On the command of execution, NA, your next step will be a 30-
inch step to the front with your right foot (Step). Thirty inches are measured from the rear of
your left heel to the rear of your right heel. At the same time you will decrease the cadence
to 120 steps per minute, and lower your arms to the quick to the quick time position. You
will continue to march, taking 120, 30-inch steps per minute, swinging your arms six inches
to the front and three inches to the rear of your legs, until given another command.

3.11 TO MARCH AT REST

a. AT EASE MARCH. The command PALUWAG, KAD is given as either foot

stikes the marching surface. On the command of execution KAD, the police is no longer
required to retain cadence; however, silence and approximate interval and distance are
maintained. SIGLANG HAKBANG, KAD and LAYANG HAKBANG, KAD are the only
commands that can be given while marching at ease.
 Drills 17
b. ROUTE STEP MARCH. Assume you are marching forward at quick time
and you receive the command LAYANG HAKBANG, NA, the command of execution may
be given as either foot strikes the deck. On the command of execution, NA, you are no
longer required to march at the position of attention in cadence, but you must keep your
alignment, cover, interval and distance. You may talk in a low conversational tone. You will
continue to march until given another command. The only command you may receive while
marching at route step is TILAP (PULUTONG) or (BALANGAY), HUMANDA. On the
command of execution, HUMANDA, you will pick up the step as soon as possible. The
Drill Instructor will count cadence until troops are in step.

3.12. HALF STEP MARCH (15-inch Step)

a. To march with a 15-inch step from the halt, the command is HATING
HAKBANG, NA. On the preparatory command HATING HAKBANG; shift the weight of
the body to the right foot without noticeable movement. On the command of execution NA,
step forward 15 inches with the left foot and continue marching within 15-inch steps. The
arms swing as in marching with a 30-inch step.

b. To alter the march to a 15-inch step while marching with a 30-inch step, the
command is HATING HAKBANG, NA. This command may be given as either foot strikes
the marching surface. On the command may be given as either foot strikes the marching
surface. On the command of execution NA, take one more 30-inch step and then begin
marching with a 15-inch step. The arms swing as in marching with a 30-inch step.

c. To resume marching with a 30-inch step, the command PASULONG, NA is

given as either foot strikes the marching surface. On the command of execution NA, take
one more 15-inch step and then begin marching with a 30-inch step.

d. The halt while marching at the half step is executed in two counts, the same as
the halt from the 30-inch step.

e. While marching at the half step, the only commands that may be given are:
PATAKDA, NA; PASULONG, NA; and HINTO.

3.13. MARCHING IN PLACE

a. To march in place, the command PATAKDA, NA, is given as either foot

strikes the marching surface and only while marching with a 30-inch or 15-inch step forward.
On the command of execution NA, take one more step, bring the trailing foot alongside the
leading foot, and begin to march in place. Raise each foot (alternately) 10 inches off the
marching surface; keep the arms at the sides as in the position of attention.

b. To resume marching with a 30-inch step the command PASULONG, NA is

given as either foot strikes the marching surface. On the command of execution NA, take
one more step in place and then step off with a 30-inch step.

c. Mark Time from double Time in Place. Assume you are double timing in place
and you receive the command, PATAKDA, NA. The command of execution maybe given
as either foot strikes the deck. The command will be as the left foot strikes the deck. On the
command of execution NA, your next step will be one more six-inch vertical step in place
 Drills 18
with your right foot (step). Your next step will be a two-inch vertical step in place with your
left foot to the deck. The heel is four inches from the deck. At the same time, reduce to 120
steps per minute and lower the arms to the quick time position. You will continue marching
in place, taking 120, two-inch vertical alternation steps per time.

d. The halt from mark time is executed in two counts, basically the same as the
halt from the 30-inch step.

3.14 SIDE STEP (RIGHT/LEFT)

a. To march with a 15-inch step right (left), the command is HAKBANG

PAKANAN (PAKALIWA), NA. The command is given only while at the halt. On the
preparatory command of HAKBANG PAKANAN (PAKALIWA), shift the weight of the
body without noticeable movement onto the left (right) foot. On the command of execution
NA, bend the right knee slightly and raise the right foot only high enough to allow freedom
of movement. Place the right foot 15 inches to the right of the left foot, and then move the
left foot (keeping the left leg straight) alongside the right foot as in the position of attention.
Continue this movement, keeping the arms at the sides as in the position of attention.

b. To halt when executing right or left step, the command is TILAP

(PULUTONG), TO. This movement is executed in two counts. The preparatory command
is given when the heels are together; the command of execution TO is given the next time
the heels are together. On the command of execution TO, take one more step with the lead
foot and then place the trailing foot alongside the lead foot, resuming the position of
attention.

3.15. BACK STEP

a. To march with a 15-inch step backward, the command is PAURONG, NA.

The command is given only while at the halt. On the preparatory command PAURONG,
shift the weight of the body without a noticeable movement onto the right foot. On the
command of execution NA, take a 15 inch step backward with the left foot and continue
marching backward with 15-inch steps. The arms should be clipped on the sides.

b. The halt from backward march is executed in two counts, basically the same as
the halt from the 30-inch step.

3.16. DOUBLE TIME MARCH

a. To march in the cadence of 180 steps per minute with a 30-inch step, the
command is TAKBONG HAKBANG, NA. It maybe commanded while at the halt or while
marching at quick time with a 30-inch step.

b. When at the halt and the preparatory command TAKBONG HAKBANG is

given, shift the weight of the body to the right foot without noticeable movement. On the
command of execution NA, raise the forearms to a horizontal position, with the fingers and
thumb closed, knuckles out and simultaneously step off with the left foot. Continue to march
with 30-inch steps at the cadence of double time. The arms swing naturally to the front and
rear with the forearms kept horizontal. (When armed, policemen will come to port arms on
 Drills 19
receiving the preparatory command of TAKBONG HAKBANG). Guides, when at sling
arms, will double time with their weapons at sling arms upon receiving the directive Guide
On Line.

c. When marching with a 30-inch step in the cadence of quick time, the command
TAKBONG HAKBANG, NA is given as either foot strikes the marching surface. On the
command of execution NA, take one more 30-inch step at quick time and step off with the
trailing foot, double timing as previously described.

d. To resume marching with a 30-inch step at quick time, the command SIGLANG
HAKBANG, NA is given as either foot strikes the marching surface. On the command sides
and resume marching with a 30-inch step at quick time.

e. When you are marking time and you receive the command, TAKBONG
HAKBANG, NA. The command of execution maybe given as either foot strikes the deck.
To demonstrate, the command is given as the left foot strikes the deck. On the command of
execution, NA, your next step will be one more two-inch vertical step in place with your
right foot (Step). Your next step will be a 36-inch step to the front with your left foot (Step).
Thirty-six inches are measured from the rear of your left heel to the rear of your right heel.
At the same time, increase the cadence to 180 steps per minute and raise the forearms
to a horizontal position along the waistline, fingers closed, knuckles out. You will continue
to march, taking 180, 36-inch steps per minute, swinging your arms in their natural arc across
the front of your body, until given another command.

f. When you are double timing in place and you receive the command,
TAKBONG HAKBANG, NA. The command of execution maybe given as either foot
strikes the deck. For the purpose of demonstration, the command will be given as the left
foot strikes the deck. On the command of execution, NA, your next step will be one more
six-inch vertical step in place with your right foot (Step). Your next step will be a 36 inch
step to the place with your left foot (Step). Thirty-six inches are measured from the rear of
your left heel to the rear of your left heel to the rear of your right heel. You will continue to
march, taking 180, 36-inch steps per minute, swinging your arms in their natural arc across
the front of your body, until given another command.

3.17. TO FACE IN MARCHING

a. Face to the Right as in Marching - Assume you are halted at attention and you
receive the command, LIKO SA KANAN, NA. On the preparatory command, LIKO SA
KANAN, shift the weight of your body to the left leg without noticeable movement. On the
command of execution, NA, face 90 degrees to the right by pivoting on the ball of the left
foot, at the same time taking a 30-inch step in the new direction with the right foot, swinging
your arms in their natural arc, six inches to the front and three inches to the rear of your legs,
but do not allow them to swing away from the body (Step). You will continue to march,
taking 120, 30-inch steps per minute, swinging your arms six inches to the front and three
inches to the rear of your legs, until given another command.

b. Face to the Left as in Marching – Assume you are halted at attention and you
receive the command, LIKO SA KALIWA, NA. On the preparatory command, shift the
weight of your body to the right leg without noticeable movement. On the command of
execution, NA, face 90 degrees to the left by pivoting on the ball of the right foot, at the same
time taking a 30-inch step in the new direction with the left foot, swinging your arms in their
 Drills 20
natural arc, six inches to the front and three inches to the rear of your legs, but do not allow
them to swing away from the body (Step). You will continue to march, taking 120, 30-inch
steps per minute, swinging your arms six inches to the front and three inches to the rear of
your legs, until given another command.

3.18. TO MARCH BY THE FLANK

Being in march, the commands are KANANG (KALIWANG) PANIG, NA. At

the command NA, given as the right (or left) foot strikes the ground, advance and plant your
left (or right foot; then face to the right (or left) in marching and step off in the new direction
on your right (or left) foot.

3.19. TO MARCH TO THE REAR

a. While marching Forward at Quick Time – Assume you are marching

forward at quick time and you receive the command, PABALIK, NA. The command of
execution will be given as the right foot strikes the deck, as this involves a movement to the
right. On the command of execution, NA, your next step will be to place your left foot
approximately 30 inches and directly in front of your right foot (Step). Your next step will
be to face 180 degrees to the right about by pivoting on the balls of both feet (Step). The
legs remain straight without stiffness and the arms should be clipped to the sides until the 1st
step is made. After which the arm continue to naturally swing, but not allowed to swing
wide from the body. Your next step, without loss of cadence will be a 30-inch step in the
new direction (Step). You will continue to march at quick time, until given another
command.

b. While marching Forward at Double Time – Assume you are marching

forward at double time and you receive the command, PABALIK, NA. The command of
execution will be given as the right foot strikes the deck, as this involves a movement to the
right. On the command of execution, NA, your next step will be two more 36-inch steps to
the front (Step, Step). Your next step will be four six-inches vertical alternating steps in
place, at the same time turning 180 degrees to the right about (Step, Step, Step, Step). The
arms will continue their natural swing, but will not be allowed to swing away from the body.
Your next step, without loss of cadence will be a 36-inch step in the new direction with your
left foot (Step). You will continue to march at double time cadence until given another
command.

3.20. EYES RIGHT/LEFT WHILE MARCHING

a. While marching at quick time, the unit leader will command HANDA
TINGIN SA KANAN, NA, when he is twelve (12) paces from the reviewing officer. The
command of execution will be given as the right foot strikes the deck, as this is a movement
to the right. On the command of execution NA, and for the count of one, your next step will
be a 30-inch step to the front with your left foot. At the same time, all files, except the right
file, will smartly turn their head and eyes 45 degrees to the right (Step). The shoulders
remain square to the front. The members of the right file will keep their head and eyes to the
front. You will continue to march until given the next command. The command to terminate
this movement is HANDA, HARAP. The command of execution is given when the last rank
is six paces beyond the reviewing officer and it is given as the left foot strikes the deck, as
this involves a movement to the left. On the command of execution HARAP, your next step
 Drills 21
is a 30-inch to the front with your right foot. At the same time, all men who have executed
eyes right will turn their head and eyes to the front (Step). You will continue to march until
given another command.

Eyes Left: The movement of eyes left may only be executed while marching and
is normally done during street parades, when the reviewing stand is on the left. While
marching at quick time, the unit leader will give the command when he is twelve (12) paces
from the reviewing officer. The command of execution is given as the left foot strikes the
deck, as this involves a movement to the left. On the command of execution, NA and for the
count of one, your next step will be a 30-inch step to the front with your right foot. At the
same time, all files, except the left file, will smartly turn their head and eyes 45 degrees to the
left (step). The shoulders remain square to the front. The members of the left file will keep
their head and eyes to the front. You will continue to march until given the next command.
The command to terminate this movement is: HANDA, HARAP. The command of
execution is given when the last rank is six paces beyond the reviewing officer, and is given
as the right foot strikes the deck, as this involves a movement to the right. On the command
of execution, HARAP, your next step is a 30-inch step to the front with your left foot. At the
same time, all files who have executed eyes left will smartly turn their head and eyes to the
front (Step). You will continue to march until given another command.

3.21. STAFF BEHIND ME

To make a staff move to the rear of a commander, the command is KALUPUNAN

SUMALIKOD KO, NA. The movement is executed in 9 counts for 2 or 3 men staff, 11 for
a 4 men staff, 13 for a 5 men staff and 15 for a six men. At the command NA, all members
of the staff execute right face, and then the first man faces to the left and marches 4 steps,
column left and halts on the prescribed last count. All other members march forward and
follow the first man turning at the same pivot made by the first man.

All members halt in the designated count and faces left altogether automatically now
facing the new direction.
 Drills 22

SECTION IV

INDIVIDUAL MOVEMENT WITH ARMS

Manual of Arms

4.1. GENERAL

a. This section contains procedures for executing the manual of arms with
police shoulder rifle in conjunction with individual and unit drill movements.

b. At the halt, all movements are initiated from order arms or sling arms, which
are the positions of attention with the rifle.

c. All precision movements are executed in quick-line cadence.

d. For drill purposes, the modified magazine is carried in the rifle. When
performing duty requiring the use of magazine, the rifle is carried at sling arms

e. The command AGAP, TA or ISAKBAT, TA must be given prior to the

command for double time.

f. Execute HUMANAY with your rifle at Port Arms.

g. Movements for short distances are executed at the trail by introducing the
preparatory command with the command BITBIT SANDATA, or BITBIT SANDATA,
PASULONG KAD. Take the trail position at the command KAD and resume the order
on halting.

h. With your rifle at order arms, bring it to the trail while in motion when
executing the facing, alignments, opening and closing of ranks, side step, back step or
extending and closing. In each case take the position of trail arms at the command of
execution. Push and pull your rifle smartly and resume order arms position and adjust
hands slowly.

i. Facing movements are executed from order arms or sling arms. When a
facing is necessary to establish the direction of march, the facing movement is executed
before the command for the manual of arms. After a marching movement has been
completed, BABA, TA or ISAKBAT, TA is commanded prior to the command for the
facing movement.

j. To salute when you are not in ranks and at sling arm, give the hand salute.
 Drills 23
k. In all movements except those mentioned above, the rifle is carried Right
Shoulder Arms in cadence. Execute right shoulder arms, simultaneously with the
stepping off for any movement in cadence.

l. In halting, the rifle will be brought to order arms in cadence after halt has
been completed as in policeman without arms. Unless the command is preceded in place
in which case, the rifle remains at right shoulder arms.

m. Port Arms is the key position assumed in most manual of arms movement
from one position to another except right shoulder arms from order arms and order arms
from right shoulder arms.

n. Manual of arms movements are a combination of the position of attention

and the procedures for the prescribed movement. Most manual of arms movements are
executed with the head, eyes and body as in the position of attention.

POSTURE (armed)

• stand-up straight

•chin in
•pull shoulder back and down
•clip arms
•stomach in (SUCK GUTS)
•left hand hold banana, wrist
facing inward

•hand behind the sim

•knees together (CLOSE
BOOK)

•rifle is resting in front of right hand

(open palm)

•rifle butt aligned with the tip of the

right
shoe (BUTT TOE)

•45 degree angle foot stand

4.2. RULES GOVERNING EXECUTION OF MANUAL OF ARMS

a. Unless indicated in this manual, these rules apply:

b. The term ”at the balance “ refers to a point on the rifle just forward of the
trigger housing.

c. Whenever a position is described as “diagonally across the body”, the rifle

barrel is up, the butt is in front of your right hip and the rifle barrel bisects the junction of
your neck and left shoulder. The rifle and sling are grasped at the balance with your left
hand. Hold the palm of your hand toward your body with the wrist straight. The space
between the barrel and the gas cylinder is approximately aligned with your left ear. Small
finger of the left hand is tangent to the operating rod handle. Maintain the rifle one fist away
from your body.
 Drills 24

d. The cadence for the rifle movement is quick time. In the early stages of
your training give your whole attention to the details of the motions. You acquire the
cadence gradually as you become accustomed to handling your rifle. Sometimes the
instructor may require you to count aloud in cadence with motions.

e. The manual of arms is taught at a halt. However, to add interest to the drill
or to prevent fatigue in long marches right shoulder to left shoulder (or left shoulder to right
shoulder) or port arms maybe given when marching.

f. Any position of manual of arms can be ordered from a previous position by

giving the suitable commands. However, when at the inspection arms, the command AGAP,
TA is given and executed before moving to any other position of the manual of arms.

g. When executing movements with the rifle, the movements are executed
SMARTLY and with SNAP. Movements with the rifle will be executed in the most direct
manner and exaggeration of movements will not be taught. With the exception of the head
and limbs, when required to perform a function while executing the manual, the body will
remain at the position of attention.

4.3. ORDER ARMS

a. Assume order arms on the command HUMANAY or from parade rest on

the command of execution HUMANDA .

b. At order arms, maintain the position of attention with the rifle. Place the
butt of the rifle on the marching surface, with sights to the rear. The toe of the butt touches
the foot and on line. Secure the rifle with the right hand in a “U”formed by the fingers
(extended and joined) and thumb. Hold the rifle on the upper hand guard with the right
thumb and forefinger pointed downward and online with the flat surface of the hand guard.
Keep the right hand and arm behind the rifle so that the thumb is straight along the seam of
the trouser leg.

4.4. REST POSITION

The rifle rest positions are commanded and executed the same as individual drill
without arms with the following additions:

a. Parade Rest – on the command of execution PAHINGA or TIKAS,

PAHINGA, thrust the muzzle forward simultaneously changing the grip of the right hand to
grasp the stock just below the gas cylinder lock screw keeping the toe of the butt of the rifle
on line with your toe and on the marching surface and the right arms straightened directly to
the front. Silence and immobility are required – if at sling arms, the rifles will remain slung.

b. Stand at Ease - Execute stand at ease in the same manner as parade rest
with the rifle except turn the head and eyes toward the commander.

c. Rest – On the command PALUWAG or PAHINGA keep the butt of the

rifle in place as in parade rest and bring the rifle diagonally in front of you with your right
hand and simultaneously grasp with your left hand clasping your right hand. At this position
 Drills 25
the policeman may move, however, he must remain standing and silent with the rifle and
right foot in place.

d. Rifle Position at Route Steps – at the command of LAYANG

HAKBANG, KAD, rest the flat side of the stock on your shoulder, with your right arm
clipped to your sides, and your forearm forming a 45 degree angle to the sides.

4.5. PORT ARMS

a. Port arms from order arms is a two-count movement. The command is AGAP,
TA. On the command of execution TA, grasp the rifle with the right hand and raise the rifle
diagonally across the body, keeping the right elbow down (without strain). With the left
hand, simultaneously grasp the balance of the rifle so that the rifle is about 4 inches from the
waist. On the second count, re grasp the rifle at the small of the stock with the right hand.
Hold the rifle diagonally across the body about 4 inches from the waist and parallel to the
body, the right forearm horizontal and the elbows close to the sides.

b. Order arms from port arms is executed in three counts. The command is
BABA, TA. On the command of execution TA, move the right hand up and across the body
to the upper hand guard without strain. On the second count, remove the left hand from the
balance and lower the rifle to the right side until it is about three inches from the marching
surface. Guide the rifle to the side simultaneously by placing the forefinger of the left hand
at the flash suppressor, fingers and thumb extended and joined, palm to the rear. On the third
count, move the left hand sharply to the left side, lower the rifle gently to the marching
surface and resume position of order arms.

PORTARMS TO ORDER ARMS (BABATA)

1
1. CLIP FINGERS
1. PORT ARMS 2. LEFT HAND HOLDING
THE ABOVE THE
CHARGING HANDLE
3. LEFT ARM CLIPPED
ON THE FLOATING
RIBS
4. RIGHT HAND ON THE
UPPER HAND GUARD
5. LEFT EYE COVERED
BY UPPER HAND
GUARD
6. RIFLE BUTT MUST
NOT PROTRUDE
 Drills 26

2 3
1. CLIP FINGERS
1. STANDING POSITION
2. LEFT HAND CLIP
FINGERS
RESTING ABOVE
THE BAYONET
STUD READY
FOR CUTTINGS
3. RIGHT HAND
RESTING AT THE
BACK OF THE
RIFLE
SUPPORTING IT
4. RIFLE BUTT
ALIGNED WITH
THE RIGHT SHOE

4.6. PRESENT ARMS

a. At order arms, the command is TANGHAL, TA. At the command TA,
which is the count of one in this movement, raise the rifle in front of the center of your body
with your right hand. The barrel is to rear and vertical. Then grasp the rifle with your left
hand at the balance, the forearm horizontal resting against your body and fingers joined. At
the count of two, place your right hand to the small of the stock. Holding the small of the
stock in a “U” formed by the fingers (extended and joined) and thumb.

b. The distance of the rifle from the body is about a fist away and the front
sight at the level of the eyes.

c. Order arms from the present arms is executed in three counts with the
command BABA, TA. On the command, TA, which is the count of one in this movement,
move your right hand from its grasp of the stock and re grasp the piece on the hand guard.
On the second count, release the grasp of your left hand, lower the rifle to the right so that the
butt is three inches from the ground, barrel to the rear. Steady and guide to the side by
placing the forefinger of the left hand at the flash suppressor, fingers and thumb extended and
joined palm to the rear. On the third count, move the left hand sharply to the left side, lower
the rifle gently to the marching surface and resume the position of order arms.
 Drills 27

RIFLE SALUTE (TANGHAL SANDATA)

1 1. CLIP FINGERS
2. LEFT HAND RESTING
ABOVE THE
CHAMBER
3. CLIP RIGHT ARM AT
THE SMALL STOCK
4. RIFLE MUST
DISSECT THE BODY
5. LEFT HAND IN
FRONT OF THE
STOMACH
6. RIFLE SHOULD BE
ONE KNUCKLE
AWAY FROM THE
BODY
7. CLIP LEFT ARM
PARALLEL TO THE
GROUND

2
\ 1. CLIP FINGERS
2. LEFT HAND
2 RESTING ABOVE
THE CHAMBER
3. BAYONET STUD
ALIGNED WITH
THE EYES
4. RIFLE MUST
DISSECT THE
BODY
5. LEFT HAND IN
FRONT OF THE
STOMACH
6. RIFLE SHOULD
BE ONE
KNUCKLE AWAY
FROM THE BODY
7. CLIP LEFT ARM
PARALLEL TO
THE GROUND
8. RIGHT ARM
STRETCHED TO
THE RIFLE BUTT.

4.7. RIGHT SHOULDER ARMS

a. When executed from order arms, right shoulder arms is a five count
movement. The command is KANANG BALIKAT. On the command TA, (One) raise and
carry the rifle diagonally across the body with the right hand, at the same time grasping it at
the balance with your left hand. (Two) re grasp the butt with your right hand, the heel of the
butt between the first two fingers, thumb and fingers closed the stock. (Three) Twist. (Four)
Without changing the grasp of your right hand, place the rifle on your right shoulder, barrel
up and inclined at an angle of about 90 degrees from the horizontal. Hold your right elbow
against your side with the forearm horizontal. The trigger guard should be in the hollow of
your right shoulder. At the same time with your left hand at the small of stock, thumb and
fingers extended and joined, guide the rifle to your right shoulder. The first joint of the
forefinger touches the rear end of the receiver. Hold your wrist straight and your elbow
down. (Five) Cut away your left hand smartly to the side.
 Drills 28

RIGHT SHOULDER ARMS (KANANG BALIKAT)

1

1 .CLIP FINGERS
2RIFLE BUTT SHOULD NOT
PROTRUDE
1. STANDING POSITION 3. CLIP ARMS
4. LEFT EYE IS COVERED
BY THE UPPER HAND
GUARD
5. LEFT HAND CLIP
FINGERS RESTING ON
6. CHARGING HANDLE
ONE KNUCKLE AWAY
7. LEFT ARM PARALLEL TO
THE GROUND

2 3
1.CLIP FINGERS
2. RIFLE TWELVE
1. CLIP FINGERS O’CLOCK
2. RIGHT HAND POSITION.
HOLDING THE 3. RIGHT HAND
RIFLE BUTT HOLDING THE
READY TO TWIST RIFLE BUTT
THE RIFFLE. READY TO LIFT
3. LEFT HAND IS 4. CLIPPED ARMS
PARALLEL TO THE 5. RIGHT ARMS
GROUND. STRETCHED AND
4. LEFT WHILE LOCKED ELBOW..
CLIPPED IS REST
ON THE CHARGING
HANDLE
5. LEFT EYE IS
COVERED BY THE
HAND GUARD..
 Drills 29

4 5
1 .CLIP FINGERS 1 .CLIP FINGERS
2. RIGHT HAND HOLDING 2. RIGHT HAND
THE RIFLE BUTT HOLDING THE RIFLE
3. RIGHT ARM CLIPPED BUTT
ON THE FLOATING 3. RIGHT ARM CLIPPED
RIBS ON THE FLOATING
4. RIGHT HAND HOLDS RIBS
THE BUTT WITH THREE 4. RIGHT HAND HOLDS
FINGERS ALIGNED THE BUTT WITH
WITH THE FLOATING THREE FINGERS
RIBS ALIGNED WITH THE
5. LEFT HAND CLIP FLOATING RIBS
FINGERS SUPPORTING 5. LEFT HAND AFTER
THE RIFLE READY FOR SWIFT CUTTINGS
CUTTINGS SLOWLY CLOSED.

Note: The rifle should be angled at 30 degrees by 60 degrees.

b. The return to order arms is a four-count movement. On the command

BABA, TA, press the rifle butt down quickly and move the rifle diagonally across your body,
turning the butt so as to keep the barrel up. Grasp the rifle at the balance with your left hand,
retaining the grasp of your right hand on the butt (count one). On the second count, move
your right hand up and across your body and grasp the front hand guard. The third and
fourth counts are executed in the same manner as the second and third counts in executing
order arms from port arms.

c. Right shoulder arms from port arms is a four-count movement. On the first
count, re grasp the rifle at the butt with right hand as you would in coming to right shoulder
from order arms. The last three counts are the same as the last two counts in moving from
order to right shoulder arms.

d. Port arms from right shoulder arms is a two-count movement. The first
count is the same as the first count from right shoulder to order arms. On the second count,
re grasp the rifle with your right hand at the small of the stock in the position of port arms.

4.8. STACK AND TAKE ARMS

a. Stack arms is executed from order arms only. It may be executed while at
normal interval in a line (squad) or a column formation. Stack arms is not a precise
movement, however, it is executed in appropriate manner.

b. The leader designates the stack men by numbers (3-6-9-12) when in a line
formation, or by a squad (second or third) when in a column formation. After the stack men
have been designated, he then commands AYUSIN ANG SAKBAT.
 Drills 30
c. On the command SAKBAT, each stack man places the butt of his rifle on
his right hip and cradles it in the crook of his right arm. He then adjusts the sling keeper to
form a 2 inch loop next to the upper sling swivel. As soon as he has prepared the loop, he
returns to order arms.

d. When all stack men have returned to order arms, the leader commands
ITUNGKOD, TA. On the command TA, each stack man places his rifle directly in front and
centered on his body with the sling facing to the front. The heel of the rifle butt is on the
marching surface on line with the toes of his shoes. He grasps the rifle by the hand guard
with the left hand. The first two finger of the left hand hold the inner part of the loop against
the rifle. He reaches across the front of the rifle with the right hand, grasps the outer part of
the loop, and holds it open for the insertion of the other rifles. He holds the rifle vertical at
all times.

e. On the command TA, the men to the left and right of the stack man perform
the following movements simultaneously:

1) The man on the stack man’s left raises and centers his rifle in front of his
body so that his right is shoulder high and the rifle is about four inches from his chest, with
the sling to the front. He then grasps the rifle with his left hand at the small of the stock and
lowers both arms, holding the weapon in a horizontal position.

b. The man on the stack man’s right raises and centers his rifle, wrist
shoulder high, with the sling facing the front. He then grasps the rifle with the left hand
directly below his right hand, and in the most convenient manner, grasps the rifle with the
right hand at the small of stock. He then lowers both arms, holding the rifle in a horizontal
position.

c. As soon as both men have completed these movements, each moves the
foot nearest the stack man 18 inches half left or right) toward the stack man. In a continuing
motion, the man on the stack man’s left inserts the muzzle of his rifle into the loop held by
the stack man until the bayonet stud pro tudes past the far end of the loop. He holds his rifle
in that position until the man on the stack man’s right inserts the muzzle of his rifle through
the loop in the same manner and above the muzzle of the rifle of the left man.

f. When both rifles have been inserted into the loop, the men on each side of the
stack man swing the butts of their rifles out and down to the marching surface until the stack
is tight with the (two) rifle butts on line and about two feet from the baseline.

g. After necessary adjustments have been made, the three men come to attention.

h. Extra rifles are passed to the nearest tack on the right. As each rifle passed, it is
grasp at the upper part of the hand guard with the right hand. Then, with the rifle held
vertical, it is passed with fully extended arm to the right front. The man on the right grasps
the rifle at the balance with his left hand, brings the rifle to the center of his body, and re
grasps it at the upper part of the hand guard with his right hand. This action continues until
the stack man receives the rifle and places it on the stack with his right hand nearly vertical
as possible. He places the rifles on the stack with the slings away from the stack (if the
second squads is the stack squads, extra rifles are passed to the left).
 Drills 31
i. To take arms, the leader commands DAMPOT, TA.

1. On the command TA, the stack man passes each extra rifle toward its
bearer. The rifles are handled in the manner described for passing them to
the stack (left hand at the balance, right hand at the upper part of the hand
guard). As the men receive their rifles, they come to order arms.

2. After all extra rifles have been returned, the stack man grasps the base
rifles, holding the loop open as in stack arms.

The men to the right and left of the stack man take one step to their left and
right fronts, respectively. They reach down, grasp their rifles, and bring the rifles to a
horizontal position. The man to the right of the stack man frees his rifle from the stack first.
Each man returns to order arms after un sling arms and retrieves his rifle. He does this by
guiding and steadying the rifle with his left hand (as in the next to the last count of order
arms).

4.9. REST WITH THE LEFT SHOULDER ARMS

a. From port arms, the command is: KALIWANG BALIKAT, TA.

b. At the command TA, release the grip of your left hand on the rifle and with
your right hand still grasping the small of the stock, place the rifle on your left shoulder,
barrel up. At the same time grasp the butt with your left hand, heel of the butt between the
first and second fingers, thumb and fingers closed on the stock, left forearm horizontal, left
elbow against your side. (Two) Drop your right hand quickly to the side.

c. Left shoulder arms also maybe ordered when rifles are at the order, right
shoulder or present. On the command TA, execute port arms and continue in cadence to the
left shoulder.

LEFT SHOULDER ARMS TO PORT ARMS (AGAPTA)

1
1 .LEFT SHOULDER ARMS 1. CLIP FINGERS
2. LEFT HAND
HOLDING THE
RIFLE BUTT
3. LEFT ARM
CLIPPED ON THE
FLOATING RIBS
4. LEFT HAND
HOLDS THE BUTT
WITH THREE
FINGERS
ALIGNED WITH
THE FLOATING
RIBS
5. RIGHT HAND
HOLDING THE
STOCKWELD
READY TO FLIP
THE RIFLE
 Drills 32

2
1 .CLIP FINGERS
2. LEFT HAND HOLDING THE
RIFLE BUTT
3. LEFT ARM CLIPPED ON
THE FLOATING RIBS
4. LEFT HAND HOLDS THE
BUTT WITH THREE
FINGERS ALIGNED WITH
THE FLOATING RIBS
5. RIGHT HAND HOLDING THE
STOCK WELD READY TO
FLIP THE RIFLE

d. Left shoulder arms from right shoulder arms is a four-count movement. The command is
SA KALIWANG BALIKAT, TA. On the command of execution TA, execute the first count the
same thing as executing order arms. On count two, remove the right hand from the butt of the rifle
and re grasp the small of the stock (port arms). Counts three and four are the same movements from
port arms. When marching, the command is given as the left foot strikes the marching surface.

RIGHT TO LEFT SHOULDER ARMS (KALIWANG BALIKAT)

1
1. CLIP FINGERS
2. RIGHT HAND
HOLDING THE RIFLE
1. RIGHT SHOULDER ARMS.
BUTT READY TO
TWIST THE RIFFLE.
3. LEFT HAND IS
PARALLEL TO THE
GROUND.
4. LEFT WHILE
CLIPPED IS REST ON
THE CHARGING
HANDLE
5. LEFT EYE IS
COVERED BY THE
HAND GUARD.
 Drills 33

2 3
1. CLIPPED
1. CLIP FINGERS FINGERS
2. RIFLE ONE FIST 2. FINGERS REST
AWAY THE BODY. AT THE REAR
3. LEFT HAND IS SIGHT READY
PARALLEL TO THE FOR CUTTINGS
GROUND. 3. CLIPPED ARMS
4. LEFT WHILE
CLIPPED IS REST ON
THE CHARGING
HANDLE
5. LEFT EYE IS
COVERED BY THE
HAND GUARD.
6. RIGHT THUMB ON
THE WINDAGE KNOB
READY FOR
TWISTING THE RIFLE.

4
1. CLIP FINGERS
2. LEFT HAND HOLDING
THE RIFLE BUTT
3. LEFT ARM CLIPPED ON
THE FLOATING RIBS
4. LEFT HAND HOLDS
THE BUTT WITH THREE
FINGERS ALIGNED
WITH THE FLOATING
RIBS
5. RIGHT HAND AFTER
SWIFT CUTTINGS
SLOWLY CLOSED.

4.10. TRAIL ARMS

a. From other arms, the command is - BITBIT, SANDATA. On the command

TA, raise your rifle approximately 2 inches of the ground and incline the muzzle forward so
that the barrel makes an angle of about 15 degrees with the vertical. Hold your right arm
slightly bent. Hold your rifle in the upper hand guard. Assume you are at trail arms and you
 Drills 34
receive the command BABA, TA. On the command of execution, TA, gently and quietly
lower the butt of the rifle to the deck and assume the position of order arms.

b. To March with the Rifle at Trail Arms-Facing movements, alignments and short
distance marching movements are executed from order arms. Side steps, back step, open and
close ranks, and close and extend are short distance movements. Forward march may be
given from order arms to march units forward for a short distance. When these movements
are commanded while at order arms, it is necessary to come automatically to trail arms on the
command of execution for the movement and the position of order arms is automatically
assumed, without command after halting.

4.11. SLING ARMS

a. From order arms with sling(s) loose, the command for sling arms is ISAKBAT,
TA. On the command of execution TA, grasp the barrel with the right hand and raised it
vertically. Grasp the sling near the upper sling swivel with the left, and release right hand.
Place the right hand and arm between the sling and rifle and place the sling over the right
shoulder. Re grasp the sling with the right hand so that the wrist is straight, the right forearm
is horizontal, the elbow is tight against the side, and the rifle is vertical. Release the grasp of
the left hand and move it sharply to the left side as in the position of attention.

b. From order arms with sling(s) tight, the command is ISAKBAT, TA. On the
command of execution TA, grasp the rifle barrel with the right hand and raise the rifle
vertically. With the left hand, place the rifle butt on the right hip, cradle the rifle in the crook
of the right arm and use both hands to adjust the sling. Grasp the sling with the left hand
near the upper sling swivel and execute sling arms.

c. To return the rifle to order arms with the sling tight, the command is AYUSIN
ANG SAKBAT. On the command AYUSIN ANG SAKBAT, to remove the rifle barrel
with the right hand and raised it vertically. With the left hand, place the butt of the rifle on
the right hip and cradle it in the crook of the right arm. Use both hands to tighten the sling on
the ejection port side. Grasp the rifle barrel with the right hand and guide the rifle to the
order arms position.

d. To return the rifle to order arms with the sling loose, the command is LIHIS,
SANDATA. On the command of execution TA, reach across the body with the left hand and
grasp the sling at the right shoulder. Release the right hand grasp of the sling and remove the
rifle from the shoulder. Grasp the rifle barrel with the right hand, release the left hand grasp
of the sling, and guide the rifle to the order arms position.

e. Port Arms from Sling Arms. The command for this movement is AGAP, TA.
On the command of execution TA, reach across the body with the left hand and grasp the
sling at the shoulder. Lift the weapon (by the sling) swings it to the front of the body and
grasps the small of the stock with the right hand. Release the sling (left hand) and re grasp
the weapon at the balance. Ensure that the rifle is four inches from the belt and held
diagonally across the body. Keep the elbows in at the sides and the right forearm horizontal.
To resume sling arms, the command is ISAKBAT, TA. On the command of execution TA,
grasp the sling near the upper sling swivel with the left hand. Release the right hand and
swing the rifle back onto the shoulder by placing the right arm between the sling and rifle,
immediately resume the position of sling arms.
 Drills 35

f. Inspection Arms from Sling Arms. The command for this movement is
SIYASAT, TA. On the command of execution arms execute port arms and then execute
counts of three through seven in the same manner as for inspection arms from order arms.
AGAP, TA is executed in the same manner as explained in the manual of arms. To resume
sling arms, the procedures are the same as from port arms.

g. Salute at Sling Arms. To salute while at sling arms, the command is

ITANGHAL, TA. On the command of execution TA, reach across the body with the left
hand and grasp the sling just above the right hand. Release the right hand and execute the
hand salute.

To terminate the hand salute, the command is IBABA, TA. On the

command of execution TA, lower the right hand sharply to the side as in the position of
attention and then re grasp the sling at the original position. After grasping the sling with the
right hand, release the left hand and return it sharply to the left side as in the position of
attention.

Manual of Arms – SIDE ARMS

4.12. GENERAL

a. This section contains the procedures for executing the manual of arms with side
arms.

b. All individual drill movements are executed as prescribed with the weapon
secure in the holster.

c. The only manual of arms movements that maybe executed are present arms
(hand salute) and inspection arms. As a general rule, the command is Present Arm. During
other manual of arms movements, remain at attention.

d. The position of raised side arm represents the position of port arms when
challenging as a sentinel on guard duty.

4.13. PRESENT ARMS

The hand salute is executed in the same manner as prescribed in individual drill.

4.14. RAISED SIDEARMS

a. For instructional purposes, the command ITAAS, TA is used to teach

individuals the procedures for challenging.

b. On the command of execution TA, unbutton the flap of the holster with the right
hand and grasp the sidearm. Withdraw the sidearm from the holster, raising the right forearm
to the front until the hand is about six inches in front of the right shoulder, and the right
elbow is against the right side. Hold the pistol grip, grip in a “U” formed by the thumb and
 Drills 36
last three fingers. Extend the forefinger outside and along side the trigger guard. Point the
muzzle outward and up at about 30-degree angle.

c. On the command, IBALIK, TA, return the weapon in the most convenient
manner to the holster, fasten the flap, and come to attention.

4.15. INSPECTION ARMS

a. The command for this movement is SIYASAT, TA. On the command of

execution TA, execute raised sidearm and then, without lowering the right hand reach across
the body and grasp the slide with the left thumb and first two fingers so that the thumb is on
the left side of the slide. Shift the grip of the right hand so that the right thumb engages the
slide stop. Push the slide fully to the rear and engage the stop in its notch with the right
thumb. Return the left hand to the left side and remain at raised sidearm. In the case of a
revolver, just open the cylinder drum with the left hand, following the same procedure.

b. AGAP, TA is the only command that maybe given from inspection arms. On
the command AGAP, place the right thumb on the slide stop. On the command AGAP,
press down the slide stop, allowing the slide to go forward and then place the forefinger on
the trigger. On the command TA, pull the trigger and return the weapon to the holster, fasten
the flap and come to attention.

c. To execute inspection arms with the magazine in the weapon execute raised
sidearm and then remove the magazine and place it between the belt and clothing before
locking the slide to the rear. After pulling the trigger and before returning the sidearm to the
holster, return the magazine to the weapon.

d. If the sidearm is inspected in ranks and the inspecting officer takes the weapon,
lower the right hand smartly to the right side. When the inspecting officer is ready to return
the sidearm, raised the right hand back to the raised position and accept the weapon. After
the weapon is returned, allow the slide to go forward, pull the trigger, return the sidearm to
the holster, and come to attention.

Manual of Arms – Sword

4.16. GENERAL

The sword can be worn by Officers when prescribed while participating in

ceremonies with troops under arms, or as directed. It is carried on the left side of the body
attached to a sword strap. The sword strap is secured by a Sam Browne belt.

4.17. GENERAL RULES:

a. The sword will be drawn wherever with armed troops or in command of unit.

b. Carry sword is assumed when;

 Drills 37
1) Giving commands
2) Changing Position in formation at quick time
3) Addressing or being addressed by a senior
4) The preparatory command for, and when marching at quick
time
5) Any manual of arms movement has been ordered, except
parade rest, at ease, rest, present arms, or eyes right (left)

c. Present sword is assumed when;

1) Saluting with the sword

2) The unit is presented to the colors or to any person, or when
the National Anthem, To the color or retreat is played
3) Executing eyes right (left) when marching past a reviewing
officer or stand. In the interior of a formation, remain at carry.

d. While marching with the sword at the carry, the arms should swing naturally.
Do not hold the scabbard or sling.

e. While marching at double time, hold the sword diagonally across with your first
two inches away from the chest.

f. The sword will always be worn correctly attached to a Sam Browne belt.

4.18. DRAW SWORD

a. On the preparatory command, ANTABAY BUNOT, grasp the scabbard

and rotate clockwise 180 degrees with the scabbard still parallel with your foot. At the same
time, grasp the grip of the sword with right hand and pull sword about 10 inches from the
scabbard. The right forearm should now be roughly parallel to the ground with the left hand
still holding the \scabbard against the side.

b. On the command of execution KALIS, draw the sword smartly out of the
scabbard and raise the right arm to its full extent, directly to the front, blade at an angle of 45
degrees, sword in a straight line with arm, verify the tip of the sword, pause for two counts
then bring the blade of the sword against the shoulder seam, blade vertical and at last count
release the left hand from the scabbard.

4.19. CARRY SWORD

At the position of carry sword, the sword is held in the right hand, the blade vertical,
the right arm nearly extended, the thumb and forefinger embracing the lower part of the grip,
thumb along the trouser the fingers are joined holding the grip. The front of the blade rests
inside the point of the shoulder and not along the arm.

4.20. PRESENT SWORD FROM ORDER SWORD/CARRY SWORD

a. Executed only when halted at order or carry sword.

 Drills 38
b. On the preparatory command, TANGHAL, raise the right hand smartly to the
level of your neck about a fist away from your chin, keep the thumb on the left side of the
grip, wrist straight, elbow against the body and the blade of the sword inclined at 30 angle.

c. On the command of execution, TA, vertically lower the sword seeing to it that
the blade is parallel to your body until your waist then lower the point down smartly to a
position about three inches above the ground. Straighten the right arm the thumb remaining
on the left side of the grip. The tip of the sword should be held directly forward.

4.21. ORDER SWORD FROM PRESENT SWORD

a. The command is BABA, TA. This is one count movement.

b. On the command of execution, TA, turn the true edge down. In this position,
the right arm hangs naturally, thumb along the trouser seam. The blade is inclined down and
forward, with the tip three inches above the ground.

4.22. CARRY SWORD FROM ORDER SWORD

a. The command is HANDA DALA, KALIS.

b. On the preparatory command HANDA, DALA, twist the sword counter

clockwise letting the flat side of the sword face front.

c. At the command of execution KALIS, bring up the sword to the

position of carry sword using the action of your fingers only.
 Drills 39
SECTION V

SQUAD DRILLS

FORMATIONS AND MOVEMENTS

5.1. GENERAL

a. Individual drill movements and the manual of arms are executed (as previously
prescribed) while performing as a squad member.

b. The squad has two prescribed formations line and column. However, the squad
may be formed into a column of twos from a column formation.

c. When the squad is in line, squad members are numbered from right to left when
in column, from front to rear.

d. The squad normally marches in column, but for short distances it may march in
line.

e. When the squad drills as a separate unit, the squad leader carries his weapon at
sling arms. When the squad is in a line formation, the squad leader assumes a post three
steps in front and centered on the squad.

f. When the squad drills as part of a larger unit, the squad leader occupies the
number one (base) position of the squad. He carries his weapon in the same manner as
prescribed for other riflemen in the squad.

5.2. FORMING THE SQUAD

a. The squad normally forms in a line formation: however, it may re-form in

column when each member can identify his exact position (equipment grounded) in the
formation.

1) To form at normal interval, the squad leader comes to the position of

attention and command TILAP HUMANAY. On the command HUMANAY, the following
actions occur simultaneously:

a) Each member double times to his position in the formation.

b) The right flank man positions himself so that when the squad is
formed it is three steps in front and centered on the squad leader

c) The right flank man comes to the position of attention and raises
his left arm laterally at shoulder level, elbow locked, fingers and thumb extended and joined
and palm facing down. He ensures that the left arm is in line with the body.
 Drills 40
d) The man to the immediate left of the right flank man comes to
the position of attention, turns his head and eyes to the right and raises his left arm in the
same manner as the right flank man. He obtains proper alignment by taking short steps
forward or backward until he is on line with the right flank. He then obtain exact interval by
taking short steps left or right until his shoulder touches the extended fingertips of the right
flank. As soon as the man to the left has obtained normal interval, each man individually
lowers his arm to his side, sharply turns his head and eyes to the front and assumes the
position of attention.

e) The right flank man then sharply returns to the position of

attention.

f) All other members of the squad form in the same manner except
that the left flank man does not raise his left arm.

NOTE: The right flank man raises his arm and looks straight to the front
unless the squad is to align on an element to its right.

2) To form at close interval, the formation is completed in the manner

prescribed for normal interval, except that the command is PASINSING PAGITAN,
HUMANAY. Squad members obtain close interval by placing the heel of the left hands on
the left hip even with the waist, fingers and thumb joined and extended downward, with the
elbow in line with the body and touching the arm of the man to the left.

3) To form in column, the squad leader faces the proposed flank of the
column and command SUNURAN, HUMANAY. On the command of execution
HUMANAY, squad members double time to their original position (grounded equipment) in
formation and cover on the man to their front.

b. When armed, members fall in at order arms or sling arms. For safety, the
command SIYASAT, TA; AGAP, TA; and IBABA (ISAKBAT), TA are commanded at the
initial formation of the day or when the last command is LUMANSAG.

5.3. COUNTING OFF

a. The squad may count off in line or column formation. The command is
ISAHANG BILANG, NA.

b. When the squad is in a line formation, the counting is executed from right to
left. On the command of execution NA, each member, except the right flank man turns his
head and eyes to the right and the right flank man count off “ISA”. After the man on the
right counts off his number and simultaneously turns his head and eyes to the front. All the
other members execute count off in the same manner until the entire squad has counted off.

c. When the squad is in column formation, the counting is executed from front to
rear. On the command of execution NA, the policeman at the head of the column turns his
head and eyes to the right and counts over his shoulder, “ISA”. After counting off his
number, he immediately comes to the position of attention. All other members count their
numbers in sequence in the same manner as the number one man; the last man in the file does
not turn his head and eyes to the right.
 Drills 41
5.4. CHANGING INTERVAL WHILE IN LINE

NOTE: To ensure that each member understands the number of steps to take, the
squad leader should command that may cause the squad to change interval. Members
do not raise their arms when changing interval.

a. To obtain close interval from normal interval, the command is MASINSIN

PAGITAN, KAD. On the command of execution KAD, the right flank man (number one
man) stand fast. All men to the left of the number one man execute right step march, take
one step less than their number one man execute right step march, take one step less than
their number (for example, number five man takes four steps).

NOTE: The squad leader takes the correct number of steps to maintain his position
of three steps in front of and centered on the squad.

b. To obtain normal interval from close interval, the command is TUNTON

KANAN, KAD. On the command of execution KAD, the right flank man stands fast. All
men to the left of number one man execute left step march, take one step less than their
number (for example, number nine man takes eight steps), and halt.

c. To obtain double interval from normal interval, the command is IBAYONG

DALANG, KAD. On the command of execution KAD, the right flank man stand fast. All
men to the left of number one man face to the left as in marching, take one 30-inch step less
than their number (for example, number seven man takes six steps), halt and execute right
face.

d. To obtain normal interval from double interval, the command is TUNTON

KANAN, KAD. On the command of execution KAD, the right flank man stand fast. All
men to the left of the number one man face to the right as in marching, take one 30-inch step
less than their number (for example, number three man takes two steps), halt and execute left
face.

5.5. ALIGNING THE SQUAD

NOTE: The squad leader commands the squad to the appropriate interval prior to
giving the command for alignment.

a. To align the squad at normal interval, the command are TUNTON SA

KANAN, NA and HANDA RAP. These commands are given only when armed policemen
are at order arms or sling arms. On the command of execution NA, the right flank man, turns
his head and eyes to the right and aligns himself with the man on his right. Each member,
except the left flank man, extends his left hand laterally at shoulder level, elbow locked,
fingers and thumb extended and joined, palm facing down. He ensures his left arm is in line
with his body and positions himself by short steps right or left until his right shoulder touches
the finger tips of the man on his right. On the command of execution RAP, each member
turns sharply to the position of attention.

NOTE: If the squad leader wants exact alignment, on the command of execution
NA, he faces to the half left in marching and marches by the most direct route to a
position on line with the squad, halts one step from the right flank man and faces down
the line. From his position, he verifies the alignment of the squad directing the men to
 Drills 42
move forward or backward, as necessary, calling them by name or number: “PO1
Cruz, Forward two inches; Number Eight, Backward four inches” The squad leader
remains at attention, taking short steps to the right or left as necessary to see down the
squad. Having aligned the squad, he centers himself on the right flank man by taking
short steps left or right. He then faces to the half right in marching, returns to his
position (center of the squad), halts perpendicular to the formation, faces to the left and
commands Handa, RAP. These procedures also apply when aligning the squad at close
or double interval.

b. To align the squad at close interval, the commands are MASINSIN PAGITAN,
TUNTON SA KANAN, HANDA, RAP. The movement is executed in the same manner
prescribed for alignment at normal interval except that the squad members obtain close
interval.

c. To align the squad at double interval, the commands are IBAYONG

DALANG, TUNTON SA KANAN, NA and HANDA, RAP. These commands are given
only when the troops are unarmed or at sling arms. On the command of execution NA, each
member (except the right flank man) turns his head and eyes to the right and aligns himself
on his right. At the same time, each member (except the right and left flank men) extends
both arms and position himself by short steps right or left until his fingertips are touching the
fingertips of the members on his right and left. (The right flank man raises his left arm; the
left flank man raises his right arm.)

d. To align the squad in column, the commands are TUNTON-HARAP. On the

command TUNTON-HARAP, each member (except the number one man) raises his left
arm to a horizontal position, elbow locked, fingers and thumb extended and joined, palm is
facing down and obtains an arm’s length plus about six inches (from the finger tips) to the
back of the man to his front. At the same time, each man aligns himself directly behind the
man to his front. To resume the position of attention, the command RECOVER is given.
On this command, each member sharply returns to the position of attention.

5.6. MARCHING THE SQUAD

a. For short distances only, the squad may be marched forward while in a line
formation.

b. When marching long distances, the squad is marched in column.

c. To form a column formation from a line formation, the command is HARAP

SA KANAN, NA.

d. When a column formation is originated from a line formation at close interval,

the squad may be march for short distances at the half step with less than correct distance.
To obtain correct distance while marching with less than correct, the command is
PADALANG, KAD. On the command of execution KAD, the number one man takes one
more 15-inch step and then steps off with a 30-inch step. Each squad member begins
marching with a 30-inch step at the approximate point where the number one man stepped
off, or as soon as correct distance has been obtained.
 Drills 43
5.7. CHANGING THE DIRECTION OF A COLUMN

a. From the halt, the command to start the squad in motion and simultaneously
change the direction of march 90 or 45 degrees is LIKO SA KANAN (KALIWA), KAD or
LIKO HATING KANAN (KALIWA), KAD. On the command of execution KAD, the
lead man faces in the commanded direction and steps off, as in marching. All other members
march forward and pivot on the ball of the lead foot in the commanded direction and step off
with the trailing foot. As the members approach the pivot point, they shorten or lengthen
their steps as necessary to pivot at the approximate point that the lead man pivoted.

b. To change the direction of march 90 or 45 degrees when marching, the

preparatory command LIKO SA KANAN (KALIWA) or LIKO HATING KANAN
(HATING KALIWA) is given as the foot in the desired direction strikes the marching
surface. The command of execution KAD is given the next time the foot in the desired
direction strikes the marching surface. On the command of execution KAD, the lead man
takes one additional step, pivots in the commanded direction as the pivot foot strikes the
marching surface and continues to march in the new direction. Other members continue to
march forward and execute the pivot as prescribed from the halt.

c. To march in the opposite direction, the command is PABALIK, KAD. The

preparatory command PABALIK is given as the right foot strikes the marching surface. The
command of execution KAD is given the next time the right foot strikes the marching
surface. On the command of execution, all members take one more step with their left foot,
pivot on the balls of both feet, turn 180 degrees to the right, and step off in the new direction.
The arms are not allowed to swing outward while turning.

d. To avoid an obstacle in the line of march, the squad leader directs,

PAGAWING KALIWA (KANAN)”. The lead man inclines around the obstacle and
resumes the original direction. All other members follow the lead man.

5.8. MARCHING TO THE FLANK

a. The squad may be marched to the flank (for short distances only) when
marching in column.

b. The command for this movement is KANANG (KALIWANG) PANIG,

KAD. The preparatory command is given as the foot in the desired direction strikes the
marching surface, the command of execution is given the next time the foot in the desired
direction strikes the marching surface. On the command of execution KAD, all members
take one more step, pivot 90 degrees in the commanded direction on the ball of the lead foot
and step off in the new direction with the trailing foot. As the members begin to march in the
new direction, they glance out of the right eye and dress to the right.

5.9. FORMING A COLUMN OF TWOS AND RE-FORMING

a. Forming a column of twos from a file is executed only from the halt. The
command is DALAWANG TUDLING PAKANAN (PAKALIWA), KAD. On the
preparatory command, the lead team leader commands MANATILI/WALANG KILOS.
The trailing team leader commands LIKO HATING KANAN (KALIWA). On the
command of execution KAD, the trailing team leader executes a LIKO HATING KANAN
 Drills 44
(KALIWA), inclines to the left or right when the correct interval is obtained and commands
PATAKDA, KAD and PANGKAT, “TO” so as to halt abreast of the lead team leader.

b. Forming a file from a column of twos is executed only from the halt. The
command is SUNURAN MULA SA KALIWA (KANAN), KAD. On the preparatory
command, the lead team leader commands PASULONG. The trailing team leader
commands Stand fast. On the command of execution KAD, the lead team marches forward.
The trailing team leader command LIKO HATING PAKALIWA (PAKANAN) when the
second man from the rear of the lead team is abreast. He gives the command KAD when the
last man of the lead team is abreast of him and his right foot strikes the marching surface. He
then inclines right or left to follow the lead team at the correct distance.

5.10. RESTING THE SQUAD

a. The squad members in formation execute the rest position.

b. When the situation warrants a greater degree of relaxation than the rest
position, the squad leader may command TIWALAG. Squad members may leave their
position in formation, but they remain in the immediate area. The command TIWALAG
will not be used to terminate the formation.

5.11. DISMISSING THE SQUAD

a. The squad is dismissed with the members at attention.

b. With armed troops, the commands are SIYASAT ‘TA, AGAP “TA; IBABA
(ISAKBAT) TA and LUMANSAG.

c. With unarmed troops, the command is LUMANSAG.

d. Unless otherwise stated (by the person in charge in his instructions prior to the
command LUMANSAG), the command LUMANSAG terminates only the formation, not
the duty day.

STACK AND TAKE ARMS

5.12. GENERAL

a. The squad members execute ITUNGKOD SANDATA from their positions in

line formation (at normal interval) from order arms.

NOTE: When the squad is part of a larger unit, stack arms may be executed in a
column formation (when the formation consists of three or more files and the squads
are not normal interval). Second or third squad is designated as the stack squad.

b. When in line formation, the squad leader commands ISAHANG BILANG, NA

and then designates the stack men by numbers.
 Drills 45

5.13. PREPARE SLINGS

After the stack men are designated, the squad leader then commands HANDA and
SAKBAT. On the command of execution SAKBAT, each stack man (or stack squad) grasps
the barrel of his rifle with the right hand and raises the rifle vertically. With his left hand,
places the rifle butt on his right hip and cradles the rifles in the crook of his right arm. Using
both hands, he adjusts the sling keeper so that there is a 2-inch loop formed from the sling
keeper to the upper sing swivel. As soon as the loop is prepared, he returns to order arms.

5.14. STACK ARMS

a. When all stack men have returned to order arms, the squad leader commands
ITUNGKOD, TA. On the command of execution TA, each stack man grasps the barrel of
his rifle with his right hand and places his rifle directly in front and centered on his body with
the sights to rear. The rifle butt is placed on the marching surface so that the heel of the rifle
butt is on line with the toes of his foot gear. The stack man bends slightly forward at the
waist and grasps his rifle with his left hand at the upper portion of the hand guard (keeping
the rifle vertical at all times). The first two fingers of the left hand hold the inner part of the
loop against the rifle. The stack man reaches across the front of the rifle with the right hand,
grasps the outer part of the loop, and holds it open for the insertion of the other rifles.

b. On the command of execution TA, the men to the right and left of the stack man
perform the following movements simultaneously:

1) The man on the stack man’s right grasps the barrel of his rifle with his
right hand and raises and centers his rifle with the magazine well facing to the front, wrist
held shoulder high, elbow locked. With his left hand, he then grasps the hand guard
(midway), releases his right hand, and re grasps the rifle at the small of the stock. He lowers
both arms, with elbow locked (holding the rifle in a horizontal position with the muzzle to
the left and the magazine well to the front)

2) The man on the stack man’s left grasps the barrel of his rifle with his right
hand and raises and centers his rifle with the magazine well facing to the front, wrist held
shoulder high, elbow locked. Using his left hand, he then grasps the rifle at the small of the
stock releases his right hand, and re grasps the hand guard (midway). He then lowers both
arms, with elbow locked (holding the rifle in a horizontal position with the muzzle to the
right t and the magazine well to the front)

c. As soon as stack man has placed his rifle in position both men move to the foot
nearest the inches (half right or half left) toward the stack man. The man on the stack man’s
left insert the muzzle of his rifle in a similar manner and above the other rifle muzzle.

d. Without moving the feet, both rifle men swing the butt of their rifles out and
then down to the marching surface, making the stack tight with the rifle butts on line and
about two feet from the base line. When the stack has been completed, all three men resume
the position of attention.

e. Additional rifles are passed to the nearest stack on the right (right or left if
stacked in column). The men with additional rifle grasp the rifle barrel with the right hand
and raise the rifle vertically with the magazine well to the front, wrist held shoulder high,
 Drills 46
elbow locked and right arm extended to the right front. Throughout the pass, the rifle is held
vertical with magazine well to the front. The man to the left of the stack man then grasps the
rifle midway at the hand guard with his left hand. The man passing the additional rifle then
releases the rifle sharply returns to the right until it is centered on his body, and he grasps the
rifle barrel with his right hand wrist held shoulder high and elbow locked. He then releases
the left hand and sharply returns his left hand to the left side as in position of attention. He
then moves the rifle to his right front. The stack man receives the rifle and center it in the
same manner as previously described. The man to the left of the stack man sharply returns to
the position of attention after he releases the rifle. Once the stack man has centered the rifle
and grasped the barrel with the right, he bends forward at the waist and places the rifle in the
stack so that it is secure (without damaging the front sight assembly). If there are two
additional rifles, the second rifle is passed in the same manner as the first.

5.15. TAKE ARMS

a. To take arms, the command is DAMPOT, TA. On the command of execution

TA, the men return the additional rifle in the same manner as the rifles were received. The
stack man secures the stack and holds the loop in the same manner as for stacking rifles.

b. The men on the left and right step toward the stack man in the same manner as
when stacking arms. Each man reaches down and re grasps his rifle (one hand at the small of
the stock and one hand midway of the hand guard) and brings it to the horizontal position.
The man on the right faces his rifle first and resumes order arms. The man on the left frees
his rifle and resumes order arms.

c. The stack man cradles his rifle and adjusts the sling and sling keeper to its
original position and then resumes order arms.
 Drills 47
SECTION VI

PLATOON DRILL

Formations

6.1. GENERAL

a. Individual drill movements and the manual of arms are executed while
performing as a squad member during the conduct of platoon drill.

b. Platoon drill, for the most part, merely provides the procedures for executing
drill movements in conjunction with other squads formed in the same formation.

c. The platoon has two prescribed formations – line and column. However, the
platoon may be formed into a file or a column of twos from a column formation.

d. When in a line formation, the elements (squads) of a platoon are numbered from
front to rear, in a column formation, from left to right.

e. During all drill and ceremonies, the platoon leader And platoon sergeant carry
their rifle at sling arms. When the platoon drills as part of a large unit, the platoon leader and
the platoon sergeant remain at sling arms during all manual of arms movements except when
executing the hand salute while at sling arms.

f. When the platoon drills as a separate unit, in line formation, the post for the
platoon leader is six steps in front of and centered on the platoon; when in a column
formation, the platoon leader is six steps on the left flank and centered on the platoon.

g. When the platoon leader commands PABUKANG

TALUDTOD;PAURONG;HAKBANG PAKALIWA (PAKANAN), KAD; PASULONG,
KAD or causes the platoon to change interval, he moves at the same time (with the
appropriate step) so as to maintain proper position.

h. When the platoon drills as part of a large unit, in a line formation, the post for
the platoon leader is six steps in front of and centered on the platoon; in a column formation,
the platoon leader is at correct distance (one arm’s length plus 6 inches) in front of the squad
leader of the 1st squad while the platoon sergeant (guide) will move in front of the squad
leader of the last squad. When assuming his post in column from a line formation, the
platoon leader faces to the right in marching (on the command of execution RAP) and
marches in the most direct route to his post, halts and faces left. When assuming his post in
line from a column formation, the platoon leader faces to the left in marching (on the
command of execution RAP) and marches in the most direct route to his post, halts
perpendicular to the formation, and faces to the right, when column formation (company) and
the command DALAWANG TUDLING PAKANAN is given , the platoon leader faces to
the right in marching, repositions himself in front of and centered between the squad leaders
of the third and fourth squads, halts and faces to the left. When the unit re-forms into a
 Drills 48
column of fours, he faces to the left marching and resumes his original position in the
column.

i. When the platoon drills as a separate unit, in a line formation, the post for the
platoon sergeant is to the right of the 1st squad leader in normal distance. On the command
PABUKANG TALUDTOD, KAD;PAURONG;KAD; HAKBANG PAKANAN,
(PAKALIWA) KAD; PASULONG KAD and on commands that cause the platoon to
change interval in line, he moves at the same time (with the appropriate step) so as to
maintain proper position. If a file or column of two is formed, he moves to the leading squad
in front of the leading leader at a normal distance. When reforming into a column of fours,
the platoon sergeant resumes his post in the column when the element has halted.

j. When the platoon drills as part of a larger formation, in a line formation, the
platoon sergeant’s post is one step to the right of the first squad leader in a column formation,
the platoon sergeant is one step in front of the last squad leader. When assuming his post in
column from a line formation, the platoon sergeant faces to the right (on the command of
execution RAP) and moves in front of the last squad leader, and faces left. When the platoon
is in the column formation (company) and the command of column of twos from the left is
given, the platoon sergeant faces to the left in m arching, prepositions himself in front of the
leading squad leader, halts and faces to the right.

k. The leader of the first squad serves as the base when the platoon is in line
formation. The leader of the fourth squad serves as the base when the platoon is in a column
formation.

6.2. FORMING THE PLATOON

a. The platoon normally forms in a line formation, however, it may reform in a

column when each man can identify his exact position (equipment grounded) in the
formation.

b. The platoon forms basically the same as a squad. The platoon sergeant
assumes the position of attention and commands HUMANAY (At PASINSING PAGITAN,
HUMANAY or in SUNURAN, HUMANAY). On the command HUMANAY (At
MASINSIN, HUMANAY), the squad leader and the first squad (when formed) is three steps
in front of and centered on the platoon sergeant. Other squad leaders cover on the first squad
leader at the correct distance, which is obtained by estimation. The members of the first
squad fall in on their squad leader as prescribed for squad drill. Members of the other squads
fall in on their squad leader assume the position of attention and turn their heads and eyes to
the right, they obtain correct distance by taking short steps forward or backward and align
themselves on the man to their right. They then sharply turn their heads and eyes to the front
as in the position of attention and obtain proper interval by taking short steps left and right to
cover on the man to the front. Members of all squads, other than the first squad, will not
raise their left arms unless the man to their immediate left has no one to his front in formation
on which to cover.

c. When armed, members fall in at order arms or sling arms for safety, the
commands SIYASAT TA; AGAP TA; IBABA (ISAKBAT) TA are given at the initial
formation of the day and just before the last command, LUMANSAG.
 Drills 49
d. When a report is appropriate, the platoon sergeant commands MAG ULAT.
The squad leaders, in succession from front to rear, turn their heads and eyes toward the
platoon sergeant and salute (holding the salute until returned) and report for example:

1) Situation 1. When all squad members are in formation, the

report is “NARITO PO LAHAT”.

2) Situation 2. When squad members are absent, the policemen

and reasons for absence are reported:

Policeman Depacaquibo – CQ runner

Policeman Orivillo - Sick call
Policeman Osorio - AWOL

e. After receiving the reports from the squad leaders, the platoon sergeant
faces about and awaits the arrival of the platoon leader. When the platoon leader has halted
at his post, the platoon sergeant salutes and reports, “Ginoo, narito pong lahat”, or Ginoo,
napag alaman pong lahat”, or “Ginoo, ______ang wala”. The platoon leader returns the
salute, after which the platoon sergeant faces about and march directly his post, and faces
about.

f. If the platoon leader is not present for the formation, the platoon sergeant
steps forward three steps (after receiving the squad leader’s report) and assumes the duties of
the platoon leader.

g. When appropriate, the platoon may be formed by the platoon leader rather
than by the platoon sergeant. The procedures are the same as previously described except
that the first squad forms six steps in front of and centered on the platoon leader, and the
platoon sergeant forms at his post.

6.3. BREAKING RANKS

a. When the situation requires one or more individuals to leave the formation
or to receive specific instructions from the platoon leader, the platoon leader directs:”
Policeman Bautista (pause), Policeman Santos.”

b. When the individual’s name is called, he assumes the position of attention

and replies “NARITO PO”. He then takes one (15-inch) step backward, halts, faces to the
right (left) in marching, and exits the formation by marching to the nearest flank. Once the
individual has cleared the formation, he begins to double time and halts two steps from and
centered on the platoon leader.

6.4. COUNTING OFF

a. The platoon counts off in the same manner as the squad.

b. When in a line formation, the squads count in unison from right to left, each
squad leader sounds off, “ISA”.

c. When in a column formation, the men abreast of each other count in unison
from front to rear, each squad leader sounds off, “ISA”.
 Drills 50

6.5. CHANGING INTERVAL

a. The platoon changes interval in a line formation in the same manner as the
squad.

b. To change interval when the platoon in a column at the halt, the right file
stands fast and serves at the base. All other members (abreast of each other) execute the
movement as previously prescribed. To obtain close interval from normal interval, the third
squad takes one right step, the second squad takes two right steps, and the first squad takes
three right steps. To obtain normal interval, the procedures are the same except that the
squads execute the same number of left steps.

c. To change the interval when the platoon is marching in a column, the

preparatory command MASINSIN PAGITAN is given as the right foot strikes the marching
surface, and the command of execution KAD is given the next time the right foot strikes the
marching surface. On the command of execution KAD, the base squad (right file) takes one
13-inch step and then executes the half step. All other men take one more step,
simultaneously execute a column half right, and march until close interval is obtained. They
execute a column half left and assume the half step when abreast of the corresponding man of
the base squad. On the command PASULONG, KAD, all men resume marching with 30-
inch step. The commands PATAKDA, KAD and PULUTONG, TO may also be given.

d. To resume marching to normal interval, the preparatory command

NORMAL INTERVAL (TAMANG PAGITAN) left foot strikes the marching surface and
the command of execution KAD, is given the next time the left foot strikes the marching
surface. On the command of execution KAD, the platoon members obtain normal interval in
the same manner prescribed for close interval except that they each execute column half left
and then column half right.

e. To obtain double interval from normal interval, the procedures are the same
as form close interval to normal interval.

f. To obtain normal interval from double interval (closing the formation in

column from open ranks), the procedures are the same as obtaining close interval from
normal interval.

6.6. ALIGNING THE PLATOON

a. The platoon is aligned similar to the squad.

b. On the command of execution NA, the first squad leader stands fast and
serves as the base. Other squad leaders obtain correct distance by estimation. The members
of the first squad execute in the same manner as in squad drill to obtain exact interval. All
other squads execute as the first squad, except that each squad members raise the left arm
only for unity, actually covering (glancing out the corner of the left eye) on the man to the
front.

c. If the platoon leader wants exact alignment, he faces to the half left (half
right) in marching and marches (on the command of execution NA) by the most direct route
to a position on line with the first squad, halts one step from the squad leader or left flank
 Drills 51
man, and faces down the line. From this position he verifies the alignment of the first squad,
directing the men to move forward or backward as necessary calling them by name or
number “ Estoesta, Forward two inches; Number eight, Backward four inches”. The platoon
leader remains at attention, taking short steps to the right or left’s necessary, to see down the
squad. Having aligned the first squad, the platoon leader after centering himself on the first
squad, faces to the left (right) in marching taking 2 (3 if at open ranks) short steps to the next
squad, halts faces down the line and aligns the squad in the same manner. After the last
squad is aligned the platoon leader centers himself on the squad leader by taking short steps
left or right, faces to the right (left) in marching, returns to his position (centered on the
platoon), halts perpendicular to the formation, faces to the left(right) and commands
HANDA, RAP.

d. To align the platoon in column, the commands are COVER and

RECOVER. On the command COVER, the fourth squad leader stands fast and serves as
base. The squad leaders with the exception of the left flank squad leader, raise their arms
laterally and turn their heads and eyes to the right, the members of the fourth squad raise their
left arms horizontally (as in squad drill) to the front and cover the man to their front and at
the same time, glance out of the corner of their right eyes aligning on the man to their right.
To resume the position of attention, the command is RECOVER, on this command, each
sharply returns to the position of attention.

6.7. OPENING AND CLOSING RANK

a. PABUKANG TALUDTUD, KAD is executed from a line formation while

at the halt. It maybe executed while at any of the prescribed intervals. The commands for
these movements are PABUKANG TALUDTOD, KAD and PASINSING TALUDTOD,
KAD.

b. On the command of execution KAD, the front rank takes two steps
forward, the second rank takes one step forward, the third rank stands fast, and the fourth
rank takes two steps backward. If additional ranks are present, the fifth rank takes four steps
backward and the sixth rank takes six steps backward.

c. To close ranks, the command is PASINSIN TALUDTUD, KAD. On

the command of execution KAD, the first rank takes four steps backward, the second rank
takes two steps backward, the third rank stands fast, and the fourth rank takes one step
forward.

d. On the command of execution KAD, the platoon leader and the

platoon sergeant take the appropriate number of steps to maintain their posts.

6.8. RESTING THE PLATOON

The platoon rests in the same manner prescribed for the squad.

6.9. DISMISSING THE PLATOON

a. The procedures for dismissing the platoon are basically as prescribed for the
squad.
 Drills 52
b. The platoon leader commands TANDIS NG PULUTONG. The platoon
sergeant moves, using the shortest route in front of the platoon leader, halts three steps away
and center on the platoon and salutes, the platoon leader then commands TAKE CHARGE
OF THE PLATOON, and salutes are exchanged. The platoon leader exits. Then the
platoon sergeant takes three steps forward halts, faces about and carries out the platoon
leader’s instructions.

c. If the platoon sergeant so desires, the squads maybe released to the control
of the squad leaders. The platoon sergeant commands PAMUNUAN ANG INYONG MGA
TILAP and salutes are exchanged. The platoon sergeant is no longer part of the formation.

NOTE: Without leaving their position, the squad leaders then command TIWALAG,
move to a position in the immediate area, and command HUMANAY. Then, they carry
out the previous instructions and/or give any instructions for actions before the next
duty formation.

MOVEMENTS

6.10. GENERAL

a. The platoon marches in the same manner prescribed for the squad.

b. When the platoon is marching in a line, the first squad serves as the guide
and when the platoon is marching in column, the fourth squad leader serves as the guide.

c. When marching in line, each member of each squad (glancing out of the
corner of his right eye) maintains alignment on the man to his right. When marching in
column, each member of the first, second, and third squads maintains alignment on the man
to his right.

6.11. EYES RIGHT

a. The platoon renders courtesy during ceremonies or when marching past

Colors by executing eyes right. The command for this is movement are KANAN TINGIN
and HANDA, RAP.

b. At the halt, all men (on the command of execution, KANAN), while
keeping their shoulders parallel to the front, turn their heads and eyes to the right at a 45-
degree angle. They focus on and follow the person passing to the front until they are again
looking forward, at which time their heads and eyes remain fixed to the front. Only the
platoon leader renders the hand salute.

c. When marching, the preparatory command HANDA KANAN is given as

the right foot strikes the marching surface and the command of execution TINGIN all men
except the right file, turn their heads and eyes to the right and align themselves on the right
file while continuing to march. Men in the right file do not turn their heads and eyes but
continue looking straight to the front and maintain correct distance. Only the platoon leader
salutes. To terminate the courtesy, the preparatory command HANDA is given in the next
 Drills 53
time the left foot strikes the marching surface. On the command of execution RAP, the men
turn their heads and eyes sharply to the front and the platoon leader terminates the hand
salute.

6.12. CHANGING THE DIRECTION OF A COLUMN

a. The platoon changes the direction of the marching basically the same as the
squad.

b. During a column a movement, the base element is the squad on the flank in
the direction of the turn.

c. To change the direction 90 degrees, the command is LIKO SA KANAN

(KALIWA), KAD. On the command of execution KAD, the base squad executes the
movement as in squad drill except that the squad leader takes one 30_inch step and then takes
up half step. The squad leader continues marching with the half step until the other squad
leaders come abreast. The other squad leaders, while maintaining a correct (offset) interval,
execute a 45- degree pivot and continue marching in an arc. As they come on line (abreast)
with the base squad leader, they take up the air step, when all the squad leaders are abreast,
they step off with a 30-inch step without command. All other platoon members march
forward on the command of execution and execute the column movement at approximately
the same location as their squad leaders and in the same manner.

NOTE: When the platoon leader and platoon sergeant are marching at their post in
column as part of a larger formation, they execute a column half right (left) rather than
a 90-degree column movement. After executing the LIKO HATING KANAN
(HATING KALIWA), they continue marching in an arc, incline as necessary and
resume their correct positions. After sensing that the squad leaders are abreast of each
other, the platoon leader resumes the 30-inch step. At times, the platoon leader may
find it necessary to shorten or lengthen his step in order to maintain correct distance
from the unit to his front.

d. To change the direction 45 degrees, the command is LIKO HATING

KANAN (HATING KALIWA), KAD. On the command of execution KAD, the platoon
executes the movement in the same manner as a 90-degreeturn except that the base squad
leader as well as the other squad leaders execute a column half right (left).

NOTE: When executing a column movement at double time, elements adjust the
length of their steps so that interval and distance are maintained through and beyond
the pivot point.

e. The platoon marches in the opposite direction (PABALIK, KAD) in the

same manner of the squad.

f. The platoon inclines in the same manner as the squad. The squad nearest
the direction of the turn serves as the base. To avoid obstacle in the path of the march, the
platoon leader directs PAGAWING KALIWA (KANAN).

g. When space is limited and the platoon leader wants to march his unit in the
opposite direction (reverse), with the squad leaders at the head of their squads, he commands
 Drills 54
PABALIK SUNUDSUNURAN, KAD. On the command of execution KAD (at the halt),
the first squad marches forward three steps, execute a column beyond the fourth squad. The
second squad steps forward one step, executes column right, marches forward, and executes
another column right between the third and fourth squad. The thirds squad executes two
short column lefts from the halt and marches between the remainder of the third squad and
second squad. The fourth squad marches forward two steps, executes a column left between
the first and the second squads.

NOTE: When there are only three squads, the first squad takes two steps before
executing column right.

h. As the third squad leader marches past the last man in the third squad, he
and his squad begin to march at the half step. After marching past the last man in each file,
all other squads incline to the right and left as necessary, obtain normal interval on the third
squad, and begin to march with the half step. When all squads are abreast of each other, they
begin marching with a 30-inch step without command.

i. During the m movement, the platoon leader marches along side the first
squad and the platoon sergeant marches one step to the rear and centered between the second
and the third squads.

j. When marching, the preparatory command COUNTER COLUMN is given

as the left foot strikes the marching surface and the command of execution KAD is given the
next time the left foot strikes the marching surface. On the command of execution KAD, the
platoon executes the movement basically the same as from the halt, .except that the squad
takes one additional step to ensure that the pivot foot is in the correct position to execute the
movement.
NOTE: When the platoon leader and platoon sergeant are marching at heir post as
part of a larger formation, the platoon leader takes three steps forward and executes a
column right, marches across the front of the platoon, executes another column right
(just beyond fourth squad), marches to his post in the most direct manner, takes up the
halt step, and then steps off with a 30-inch step when the squad leaders come on line.
The platoon sergeant inclines to the right, follows the third squad until the movement
its completed and then resumes his post.

6.13. MARCHING TO THE FLANKS

The platoon marches to the flank in the same manner as the squad.

6.14. FORMING FILE AND REFORMING

a. The platoon forms a single file, from the right, left or as designated only
when in column at the halt. The commands are SUNUDSUNURAN MULA SA KALIWA
(KANAN), KAD or File in sequence three-two-four-one, MARCH.

b. On the preparatory command, the squad leader of the designated squad gives
the supplementary command PASULONG the other squad leaders command MANATILI.
On the command of execution KAD, the lead squad marches forward. The squad leader next
to the lead element ( or as designated) looks over the shoulder nearest the moving element
and commands column half left (right) when the second from the last man is on line with
 Drills 55
him. The squad leader gives the command of execution KAD as the right foot of the last
man strikes the marching surface when abreast of him. On the command of execution, the
squad leader executes the column half left (right), then marches without command to the
right (left), and follows the last man of the preceding squad at correct distance. Other
members of the squad march forward and execute the same movements as the squad leader.
The remaining squads form the file in the same manner as the squad immediately behind the
lead element.

c. The platoon may form a file and execute a column movement

simultaneously from a column formation. The command for this movement is
SUNUDSUNURAN MULA SA KALIWA (KANAN), LIKO SA KALIWA (KANAN),
KAD. Following the platoon leader’s preparatory command, the squad leader of the lead
element commands LIKO SA KALIWA (KANAN) instead of the leader of the lead element
commands LIKO SA KALIWA (KANAN) instead of leader. The other squad leaders
command MANATILI. On the platoon leader’s command of execution KAD, the lead
squad executes the column left (right). The other squad leaders command LIKO SA
KALIWA (KANAN) at the appropriate time as stated in subparagraph b. They give the
command of execution KAD as the right foot of the last man strikes the marching surface at
the pivot (column left), or the first time the last man’s right foot strikes the marching surface
after the pivot (column right).

d. The platoon re-forms to the original column formation only from the halt. The
command is APATANG TUDLING PAKANAN (KALIWA), KAD.

On the preparatory command, the squad leader of the base squad command
MANATILI. All other squad leaders command LIKO HATING KANAN (KALIWA). On
the platoon leader’s command of execution KAD, the base squad stands fast; all other squads
execute the column half right (left) simultaneously. As each of the moving squad leaders
reach a point (l;ine) that ensures correct interval on the element to their left (right), they
automatically incline to the left (right) and command PATAKDA, KAD and TILAP,
HINTO so that their squad is abreast of the base (other) squad where halted.

6.15 FORMING A COLUMN OF TWOS AND RE-FORMING

a. The platoon forms a column of twos from the right or left when a column of
fours at the halt. The command is DALAWANG TUDLING MULA SA KALIWA
(KANAN).

b. On the preparatory command, the squad leaders of the two lead squads
command PASULONG. The other two squad leaders command MANATILI. On the
platoon leader’s command of execution KAD, the two lead squads march forward. The
squad leader (second or third) next to the lead elements gives command to start both of the
remaining squads in motion. Looking over the shoulder nearest the moving elements, the
squad leader gives the preparatory command liko hating kaliwa (kanan) (when the second
from the last man is abreast of him) and then gives the command of execution KAD as the
right foot of the last man strikes the marching surface abreast of him. On the platoon leader’s
command of execution, both squad leaders execute the column half left (right), incline to the
right (left) without command, and follow the last men of the preceding squads at correct
distance (do not close the space if the files of the two leading squads are not even). Other
members of the remaining squads march forward and execute the same movements as their
squad leaders.
 Drills 56

c. The platoon may form a column of twos and execute a column movement
simultaneously from a column formation. The command for this movement is
DALAWANG TUDLING MULA SA KALIWA (KANAN), LIKO SA KALIWA
(KANAN), KAD. The squad leaders of the lead squads command LIKO SA KALIWA
(KANAN) instead of forward. The squad leader of the second (third) squad gives the
command LIKO SA KALIWA (KANAN); however, he executes the column half left
(right). The remaining two squad leaders command MANATILI. On the Platoon leader’s
command of execution KAD, the lead squads execute the column left (right). The squad
leader (second or third) next to the lead elements gives the command to start both squads in
motion. Looking over the shoulder nearest the moving elements, the squad leader gives the
preparatory command LIKO SA KALIWA (KANAN) when the second from the last man is
abreast of him; he gives the command of execution KAD as the right foot of the last man
strikes the marching surface at the pivot (left) or the first time the last man’s right foot strikes
the marching surface after the pivot (column right). Although the command is LIKO SA
KALIWA (KANAN), the outside squads (fourth or first) execute column half right (left).

d. The platoon re-forms to the original column formation only from the halt. The
command is APATANG TUDLING SA KANAN (KALIWA), KAD. On the preparatory
command, the squad leaders of the base squads commands TULUYANG LAKAD. The
trailing squad leaders command LIKO HATING KANAN (KALIWA). On the platoon
leader’s command of execution KAD, the base squads strands fast. The trailing squad
leaders execute slightly more than the column half right (left) simultaneously. As the trailing
squad leaders reach a point (line) that will ensure correct interval on the element to their left
(right), they automatically incline to the left (right). The squad leader nearest the stationary
squads (second and third) commands PATAKDA, KAD and TILAP, TO.
 Drills 57
SECTION VII

COMPANY DRILLS

Procedures and Personnel

7.1. GENERAL

a. Individual drill movements, manual of arms and squad and platoon drills are
executed (as previously described) while conducting company drill.

b. For the most part, company drill provides the procedures for executing platoon
drill in conducting with other platoon in the same formation.

c. For drill purposes, a company consists of a company headquarters and two (2) or
more platoons. The company headquarters personnel are attached to the platoons to equalize
platoon strength without interfering with the permanent squad organization; however, the
commander may form the headquarters personnel into a separate platoon at either flank of the
company. When headquarters personnel form a separate element, the ranking PNCO serves
as the platoon sergeant and the company executive officer serves as the platoon leader.

d. When in line or a mass formation, the right platoon serves as the base; when in a
column formation, the lead platoon serves as the base.

e. The first sergeant assumes the position of company commander, if there are no
officers present.

f. When the company commander directs that the company open or close ranks,
align, stack or take arms, extend march, close on the leading platoon, or prepare fro
inspection, the movement are executed on the command of the platoon leaders command the
movement is sequence beginning with the position.

g. During all drills and ceremonies, the first sergeant and executive officer carry their
weapons at sling arms. They remain at sling arms during all manual of arms movements
except that they execute the hand salute while at sling arms.

h. The members of a company break ranks in the same manner as in platoon drill
except that the individuals called from the formation form on the commander rather that on
the platoon leader.

i. The company marches, rests, executes eyes right in the same manner as the
platoon.

j. The company has for prescribed formations: company in line with platoons in line,
company in column with platoons in column, company in column with platoons in line (used
primarily for ceremonies), and company mass formation. However, the company may be
formed into a column of twos in the same manner as the platoon.
 Drills 58

7.2. POSTS FOR KEY PERSONNEL

a. Company Commander. When the company is in line formation or in a column

with the platoons in line, the post for the company commander is 12 steps (from the front
rank troops) to the front and centered on the company. As part of a larger unit, when the
company is in column with platoons in column and when in a mass formation, his post is six
steps from the front rank of troops to the front and centered on the company. As a separate
unit, when the company is in column with platoons in column, his post is 12 steps from and
centered on the left flank.

b. Guidon Bearer. The guidon bearer’s post is two 15-inch steps to the rear and two
15-inch steps to the left of the company commander.

NOTE: The company commander should inconspicuously direct the guidon bearer to
remain in position and move with the commander when the company is to faced to the
right and marched for only a short distance.

c. Executive Officer. The executive officer’s post is two 15-inch steps to the rear
and two 15 15-inch steps to the right of the company commander.

d. First Sergeant. When the company is in line formation, the first sergeant’s post is
three steps to the rear of the last and centered on the company; in a column or a mass
formation, he is three steps to the rear of the last rank and off center (one 15-inch step to the
left) of the company.

FORMATION AND MOVEMENTS

7.3. GENERAL

a. The company normally forms in a line formation; however, it may reform in

column when each man can identify his exact position (equipment grounded) in the
formation.

b. The company forms basically as the platoon. On the command HUMANAY (At
close interval), the platoons from in line, centered on and facing the person forming the unit,
with five-step intervals between platoons.

c. When armed, members fall in at IBABA (ISAKBAT) TA. For safety, the
person forming the unit commands SIYASAT, TA; AGAP, TA; IBABA (ISAKBAT) TA.
At the initial formation of the day, or when the last command is LUMANSAG.

d. The company may be formed by the first sergeant (platoon sergeants) or by the
company commander (platoon leaders). When possible, the platoons assemble near the
formation site before the arrival of the first sergeant or company commander. If the company
is formed by the Police non-commissioned officers the platoon leaders normally observe the
procedures from a position to the rear of their platoons.

1) Forming with Police non-commissioned officers.

 Drills 59

a) When the company is formed by the non-commissioned officers, the first

sergeant posts himself nine steps in front of (center) and facing the line where the front rank
of each platoon is to form.

b) On the command of execution, the platoons form in the same manner

prescribed in platoon drill. Each platoon sergeant faces his platoon while the platoons are
forming and directs his platoon to adjust (if necessary) and align on the platoon to its right at
the correct interval. Once the platoon is formed, the platoon sergeants face about.

NOTE: If the command MASINSING PAGITAN, HUMANAY, is given, the members

of the platoon form at close interval, however, the five-step interval between platoons is
maintained.

c) When all of the platoon sergeants are facing to the front, the first sergeant
commands (if appropriate) SIYASAT TA; AGAP TA; IBABA (ISAKBAT), TA. He then
directs (if appropriate) TANGGAPIN AND ULAT. The platoon sergeants face about and
command MAG-ULAT, the squad leaders report as previously described in Section 6
paragraph 6.2.d. After receiving report, the platoon sergeants face about. When all platoon
sergeants are facing to the front, the first sergeant commands MAG-ULAT. The platoon
sergeants salute and report in succession from right to left, the first sergeant returns each
salute individually. Having received the report from the platoon sergeants, the first sergeant
faces about and awaits the arrival of the company commander.

NOTE: If the company commander is not scheduled to receive the company, the first
sergeant commands SUMALUNAN. On this command, the platoon sergeant and
guidon bearer forward three steps. Simultaneously, the first sergeant faces about, steps
forward three steps, and occupies the position of the commander.

d) When the company commander halted at his post, the first sergeant salutes
And report, “Ginoo, narito pong lahat, “ or “Ginoo, napag-alaman pong lahat”, or salutes
and commands SUMALUNAN. The first sergeant faces about and marches forward three
steps. The platoon sergeants face to the right in marching and assume their posts beside the
first squad leader (if the platoon leader is not present, they step forward three steps). The
platoon leaders march around the left flank of their platoons and assume their posts by
inclining and halting, already facing to the front.

2) Forming with officers. When the company is formed by the company

commander, the procedures are the same as forming with the non commissioned officers
except that the platoon leaders from their platoons and the first sergeant, platoon sergeants,
and guidon bearer fall in at their posts. The command SUMALUNAN is not necessary.

7.4. CHANGING INTERVAL

a. The company changes interval in the same manner as prescribed for the platoon.

b. When the company commander wants the company to obtain close interval in a
line formation while maintaining a five-step interval, he directs “LAPIT SA UNANG
PULUTONG MASINSINANG PAGITAN.” The platoon leaders face about and command
ISAHANG BILANG, NA. After the platoons have counted off, the platoon leaders
command HARAP SA KANAN, NA, and in succession command HATING HAKBANFG,
 Drills 60
KAD. They halt at the five-step interval and face the platoon left, march (half step) forward
until the five-step interval is obtained, and then halt and face their platoons to the right.

NOTE: When the company is at close interval (line formation), the commander may
march the company (in column with less that correct distance) at the half step for short
distances. If he wants to march with a 30-inch step while marching with less than
correct distance, he directs “IDALANG AND INYONG PULUTONG”. The first
platoon leader commands PADALANG, KAD. The remaining platoons execute the
directive in the same manner as the second platoon.

c. When the company commander wants the company to obtain normal interval
from close interval in a line formation while maintaining a five-step interval, he directs
“PADALANG SA UNANG PULUTONG GAWING PAGITAN”. The platoon leaders
face about and march (half step) their platoons to a position that ensures the five-step interval
between platoons to the left, the platoon leaders command ISAHANG BILANG, NA. The
platoon leaders then command GAWING PAGITAN, KAD.

7.5. ALIGNING THE COMPANY

a. To align the company in a line formation, the company commander directs

“TUNTON SA KANAN”. On the directive, all platoon leaders face about. The right flank
platoon leader commands TUNTON KANAN, NA. He then faces to the half left in
marching, moves to a position on line with and one step to the right of the first man of the
first squad and faces (right face) down the line. After aligning the first rank, the platoon
leader centers himself on the first rank and command MANATILI then faces to the left,
takes two short steps, halts, executes right face, and aligns the second rank, then commands
MANATILI. The third and fourth ranks are aligned in the same manner as the second rank.
After aligning the fourth rank, the platoon leader faces to the left and takes one step then face
about and move straight one step forward of the platoon, then commands HANDA, RAP,
and proceeds to his post six paces front and center of his platoon. All platoon leaders to the
left of the first take the same actions as the first leader.

NOTE: If necessary, the platoon leaders to the left of the base platoon command
AYUSIN AND PAGITAN before commanding TUNTON KANAN, NA. On the
command AYUSIN AND PAGITAN, the base (squad) leader of the first squad) faces to
the right in marching and moves to the left flank member (first squad) of the platoon to
the right, halts, faces about, steps forward five steps, halts, faces to the right, and aligns
himself on the element to his right.

b. To align the company in column, the company commander directs “TUNTON

HARAP”. On this directive, the first platoon leader faces about and commands COVER.
The other platoon leaders command MANATILI. The first platoon covers as in platoon
drill, the other platoon then execute the movement in succession as soon as the platoon to
their front has completed the movement.

7.6. OPENING AND CLOSING RANKS

a. To open ranks, the company commander directs “IBUKANG TALUDTUD ANG

INYONG MGA PULUTONG”. On the directive, all platoon leaders face about. The right
flank platoons leaders commands PABUKANG TALUDTUD, KAD. And then aligns his
 Drills 61
platoon. All platoon leaders to the left of the first platoon take the same actions as the first
platoon leader.

NOTE: When clearing grounded equipment, the company may march in column (right
faces) from open ranks (double interval) for short distances. Having cleared the
equipment, the commander commands GAWING PAGITAN, KAD. When returning
to the equipment while marching at normal interval, the command DALAWANG
PAGITAN, KAD is given. If the company is marching in reverse order, the commands
TIWALAG and HUMANAY should be given.

b. To close ranks, the commander directs “IPASINSING TALUDTUD ANG

INYONG MGA PULUTONG”. On the directive, all platoon leaders face about and in
sequence from the right to the left command PASINSING PAGITAN, KAD. The platoons
execute the movement the same as in platoon drill. The platoons have completed the
movement, platoon leaders face about.

7.7. CHANGING THE DIRECTION OF MARCH OF A COLUMN

a. The company changes the direction of march basically the same as the squad and
platoon. The commands are LIKO SA KANAN (KALIWA), LIKO HATING KANAN
(KALIWA), NA.

b. The base element during a column movement is the lead platoon and the squad on
the flank, in the direction of turn.

c. When at the halt, the leading platoon leader repeats the company commander’s
preparatory command. Succeeding platoon leaders give the supplementary command
PASULONG. On the command execution NA, the leading platoon executes the movement
as prescribed in platoon drill: succeeding platoons execute the movement on their platoon
leader’s command at approximately the same location.

d. While marching, the movement is executed as described from the halt except that
the succeeding platoon leaders gives the supplementary command TULOY ANG LAKAD
rather than PASULONG.

f. When executing counter column march from the halt, the leading platoon leader
repeats the preparatory command: succeeding platoon leaders give the supplementary
command PASULONG. On the command of execution KAD, the leading platoon executes
the movements as described in platoon drill and marches through the other platoons.
Succeeding platoons execute the movement on the platoon leader’s command at
approximately the same location. When the movement is executed while marching, the
command of execution is given as the left foot strikes the marching surface. The movement
is executed basically the same as from the halt except that the succeeding platoon leaders
give the supplementary command to continue to march rather than forward. The guidon
bearer faces to the left in marching from the halt or executes a column left in marching,
marches by the most direct route outside of the formation and repositions himself in front of
the lead platoon as it clears the rear of the company. If the company commander gives the
command from his post in a separate unit, he moves in the most convenient manner to his
new position at the left flank of the unit/. If he gives the command while at the head of the
company, he moves in the same direction as the guidon bearer.
 Drills 62

7.8. CORRECTING DISTANCE BETWEEN PLATOONS

a. To obtain correct distance when the company is marching in column or is in

column at the halt, the company commander directs “LAPIT SA UNANG PULUTIONG”.

b. When at the halt, on the directive “LAPIT SA UNANG PULUTONG”, the

platoon leader of the leading platoon commands (over the right shoulder) MANATILI. The
succeeding platoon leaders command (over the right shoulder) PASULONG, KAD and then
command PATAKDA, NA and PULUTONG, TO when correct distance is obtained.

c. While marching, on the directive “LAPIT SA UNANG PULUTONG”, the

platoon leader of the leading platoon commands (over the right shoulder) HATING
HAKBANG, NA. The succeeding platoon leaders command (over his right shoulder)
TULOY ANG LAKAD, and then command HATING HAKBANG, NA as soon as the
correct distance is obtained.

d. The company commander commands PASULONG, KAD; (TO) as soon as all

platoons have obtained the correct distance and are marching at the half step.

7.9. FORMING A COLUMN OF TWOS AND RE-FORMING

a. The company forms a column of twos basically the same as the platoon. The
company commander must allow sufficient time for the platoon leaders, and the squad
leaders of the lead platoon, to give their supplementary commands before giving the
command of execution. The command for this movement is DALAWANG TUDLING
MULA SA KANAN (KALIWA), KAD. The leading platoon leader repeats the preparatory
command. Other platoon leaders give the supplementary command. On the company
commander’s command of execution KAD, the leading platoon executes the movement as in
platoon drill. Other platoons execute the movement on their platoon leader’s command.
Succeeding platoon leaders give their commands so as to follow with the prescribed five-step
distance between platoons.

7.10. FORMING A COMPANY MASS

a. The company may form in mass from a company in column (platoons in column)
when halted or while marching. The company must be at close interval (close interval,
march) before the command Company mass left, MARCH is given.

b. On the preparatory command Company mass left, given at the halt, the leading
platoon leader commands MANATILI. The platoon leaders of the succeeding platoons
command LIKO HATING-KALIWA. On the command of execution KAD, the leading
platoons stand fast. The other platoons execute the column half left and then execute a
column half right on the command of the platoon leaders to a point (line) that ensures the
platoons will be at close interval along side the platoon to their right when halted. As the
platoons come abreast, the platoon leaders command PATAKDA, KAD. While the platoon
is marking time, the members adjust their positions to ensure alignment on the man to their
right. The platoon leaders allow their platoons to mark time for about eight counts and then
command PULUTONG, TO.
 Drills 63
NOTE: On the command of execution KAD, the company commander and guidon
bearer face to the right (left) in marching and reposition themselves centered on the
company.

c. On the preparatory command Company mass left while marching, given as the
left foot strikes the marching surface, the leading platoon leader gives the supplementary
command PATAKDA. The succeeding platoon leaders command LIKO HATING-
KALIWA. On the command of execution KAD, the leading platoon begins to march in
place. After marking time for about eight counts, the lead platoon leader commands
PULUTONG, TO. The other platoons form in the same manner as from the halt.

NOTE: On the command of execution KAD, the company commander and guidon
bearer halt and immediately face to the right (left) in marching and reposition
themselves centered on the company.

7.11. ALIGNING A COMPANY MASS

a. As soon as the company has formed in mass, the company commander gives the
command IBABA, TA (if appropriate) and then commands MASINSIN PAGITAN,
TUNTOIN KANAN, NA.

b. On the command of execution NA, the platoon leader of the right platoon marches
by the most direct route to the right flank and verifies the alignment of as many ranks as
necessary to ensure proper alignment in the same manner as aligning the platoon. When he
has finished the verification, the platoon leader returns to a position one step in front of
centered on the third squad, halts, and faces to the right. When the platoon leader has
returned to his position, the company commander commands HANDA, RAP.

NOTE: On the command of execution NA, the platoon leaders and platoon sergeants
position themselves in line with the third squad of their platoon by executing one 15-
inch step to the right.

7.12 CHANGING THE DIRECTION OF MARCH OF A MASS FORMATION

a. The company changes the direction of march in mass basically the same as a
position column movement. When executed from the halt, the commander has the unit
execute KANAN, BALIKAT, TA (if appropriate), then faces in the desired direction of
march, turns his head toward the formation, and commands PIHIT SA KANAN
(KALIWA), KAD. On the command of execution NA, the platoon leaders face to the
HATING KANAN (KALIWA) in marching and continue to march in an arc until parallel to
the new direction of march. Then they begin marching with the half step, dressing on the
right (left flank platoon leader until the command PASULONG, KAD is given. The right
(left) guide (the base squad leader in the direction of turn) faces to the right (left) in marching
and immediately takes up the half step. All other squad leaders (front rank) face to the half
right (left) in marching and continue to march in an arc until they come on line with the
guide. At this time, they begin marching with the half step and dress (glancing out of the
corner of the eye) in the direction of the turn until the command PASULONG, KAD is
given. On that command, the dress is automatically to the right. All other members march
forward and execute the movement in the same manner as their squad leaders.
 Drills 64
b. When executed while marching, the movement is in the same manner as from the
halt except that the company commander faces about (marching backward) to give the
command LIKO SA KANAN (KALIWA), NA. He then faces about and completes the
turning movement himself. After the company has completed the turn, he faces about,
commands PASULONG, KAD and again faces about.

7.13 FORMING A COLUMN FROM A COMPANY MASS

a. To form a company in column from a company mass at the halt, the command is
SUNURAN NG MGA PULUTONG, KANAN PULUTONG, LIKO SA KANAN (LIKO
HATING KANAN), KAD. The right platoon leader gives the supplementary command of
PASULONG (LIKO SA KANAN or LIKO HATING KANAN) and the other platoon
leaders command MANATILI. On the command of execution NA, the right platoon
marches in the direction indicated. All other platoons follow (in sequence) in column,
executing column half right and column half left on the commands of the platoon leaders.

b. To execute the movement when marching, the company commander commands

AGAP, TA (unless at sling arms), and then commands SUNURAN NG MGA
PULUTONG, KANAN PULUTONG, TAKBONG HAKBANG, NA. On the preparatory
command, the right platoon leader gives the supplementary command TAKBONG
HAKBANG, and the other platoon leader gives the supplementary command TULOY
ANG LAKAD. On the command of execution NA, the right platoon marches in double
time. Other platoon leaders (in sequence) command LIKO HATING KANAN,
TAKBONG HAKBANG NA and LIKO HATING KALIWA, NA to bring the succeeding
platoons in column with the leading platoon.

c. The platoon leader and the platoon sergeant reposition themselves after the
supplementary command but before the command of execution.

7.14. FORMING A COMPANY IN COLUMN WITH A PLATOONS IN LINE

AND REFORMING

a. To form a company in column with platoons in line from a column formation

at the halt, the command is HANAY NG MGA PULUTONG, KAD. The platoon leader of
the leading platoon commands MANATILI. The second platoon leader commands LIKO
SA KANAN. All other platoon leaders command PASULONG. On the command of
execution KAD, the leading platoon stand fast, and the second platoon executes LIKO SA
KANAN, marches 12 steps fast the right file of the first platoon, and executes LIKO SA
KALIWA. As they come on line with the base platoon, the platoon leader commands
PATAKDA, NA. After the platoon has marched in placed for eight counts, the platoon
leader commands PULUTONG, TO. The succeeding platoons execute a LIKO SA
KANAN at approximately the same location as the platoon to their front and execute a
LIKO SA KALIWA and then halt in the same manner as the second platoon. When the
platoons have halted in position, the company commander commands HARAP SA
KALIWA, NA. On the command, the platoon leaders and platoon sergeants face in
marching and assume their posts.

b. When executed while marching, the movements are basically the same as
from the halt except that the commander gives the command of execution as the right foot
strikes the marching surface. The leading platoon leader commands PATAKDA, NA. On
 Drills 65
the preparatory command, the second platoon leader commands LIKO SA KANAN, and the
succeeding platoon leaders command TULOY ANG LAKAD. On the command of
execution NA, the leading platoon executes mark time and marches in place (approximately
eight counts) until the platoon leader commands PULUTONG, HINTO. The other platoons
execute the movement in the same manner as from the halt.

c. To re-form in column with platoons in column, the company commander

commands HARAP SA KANAN, NA; SUNURAN NG MGA PULUTONG,
KALIWANG PULUTONG KAD. On the command HARAP SA KALIWA, NA, the
platoon leaders and platoon sergeants face in marching and resume their posts in column. On
the preparatory command SUNURAN NG MGA PULUTONG, KALIWANG
PULUTONG, the left platoon leader commands PASULONG, LIKO SA KALIWA
(HATING KALIWA). All other platoon leaders command LIKO HATING KALIWA.
On the command of execution KAD, the left platoon executes movement. The other platoon
leaders give the appropriate commands so as to follow the lead platoon at correct distance.

NOTE: If necessary, the platoon following the second platoon automatically adjust the
length of their step to ensure correct distance from the platoon to their front.

7.15. DISMISSING THE COMPANY

a. The company is dismissed while at attention. It may be dismissed by the first

sergeant.

b. When the company is dismissed by the first sergeant, the company

commander commands TANDIS NG BALANGAY. The first sergeant marches by the most
direct route to a position three steps from and directly in front of the company commander.
After the first sergeant is halted, the company commander commands LANSAGIN ANG
BALANGAY. Salutes are exchanged. Upon termination of the salutes, the platoon leaders
and executive officer leave the formation. The platoon sergeants face to the right in
marching and take their posts (platoon leader’s position) six steps in front of and centered on
the platoon by marching around the right flank of the platoon, inclining and halting already
facing to the front. The first sergeant steps forward three steps and faces about. When all
platoon sergeants are at their post, the sergeant commands LANSAGIN ANG INYONG
PULUTONG. The platoon sergeants salute. The first sergeant returns all salutes with one
salute. After salutes are exchanged, the first sergeant and guidon bearer leave the formation.
The platoon sergeants then dismiss their platoons as in platoon drill.

c. When the company is dismissed by the company commander, he commands

LANSAGIN ANG INYONG PULUTONG. The platoon leaders salute. The company
commander returns all salute with one salute. After the salutes are exchanged, the company
commander, guidon bearer, first sergeant and executive officer leave the formation. The
platoon leader(s) faces about and commands SARHENTO NG PULUTONG. The platoon
sergeant faces to the right in marching and marches (inclines) around the squad leader (s),
halts three steps in front of and centered on the platoon leader, and faces to the right. Each
platoon leader then directs “LANSAGIN ANG PULUTONG”. Salutes are exchanged. The
platoon leaders leave the formation. The platoon sergeants step forward three steps, face s
about and dismiss the platoons as in platoon drills.
 Drills 66
INSPECTIONS

7.16. GENERAL

a. The company has one prescribed formation for inspecting personnel and
equipment in ranks – company in line with platoons in line. While inspecting crew served
weapons and vehicles, the personnel are normally positioned to the rear of the formation with
the operator (gunner) standing by his vehicle (weapon).

b. The commander may conduct an in-quarters (barracks) inspection to include

personal appearance, individual weapons, field equipment, displays, maintenance, and
sanitary conditions.

c. When field equipment is to be inspected, it should be displayed. Additional

equipment not shown or different models of the equipment should be arranged in a uniform
manner established by the local commander.

7.17. IN RANKS INSPECTION (LINE FORMATIONS)

a. When the company is in line formation, the company commander directs

‘HUMANDA SA PAGSISIYASAT’. On that directive, the platoon leaders face about open
ranks, and align the company. The platoon leaders take their position one step in front of the
ist squad leader.

b. The company commander begins the inspection by stepping forward and

inspecting the guidon bearer. He then faces to the half left in marching and proceeds to the
right of the line . When the company commander has halted directly in front of him, he
salutes and reports, ‘GINOO, unang/ikalawang pulutong. Tinyente dela Cruz ang
namumuno, handa nap o sa pagsisiyasat.” The company commander then directs the platoon
leader to lead him through the inspection, faces to the half left in marching, the platoon
leader faces to the right in marching, inclines and halts directly in front of the second man in
the first squad and on line and at normal interval (close interval) to the right of the company
commander.

NOTE; As soon as the platoon leader and company commander have halted in front of
the first two men, the squad leaders command TIKAS PAHINGA. When the moving
from man to man during the inspection, the company commander and platoon
leader(executive officer and first sergeant) simultaneously face to the right in marching,
take two short steps (one step if the company is at close interval) halt and face to the
left. After the company commander has inspected the last man in the front rank, the
platoon leader hesitates momentarily and allows last in the front rank, the platoon
leader hesitates momentarily and allows the company commander to precede him as he
inspect the rear of each rank, the next squad leader commands his squad to
HUMANDA. As they begin to inspect the next rank, the squad leader of the 1st rank
inspected commands TIKAS PAHINGA. Normally when inspecting the rear of each
rank the company commander inspects the rear of the last man in each rank, he turns
and halts and halts directly in front of the second man. The executive officer and first
sergeant march past (behind) the company commander and assume their position to his
left.
 Drills 67

c. As the company commander halts and is directly in front of and facing the
individual being inspected, the individual executes inspection arms. If the company
commander wants to inspect the individual’s weapon, he will inspect the weapon first, then
the individual’s uniform and appearance. As soon as the company commander grasps the
weapon, the individual releases the weapon and resumes the position of attention. When the
company commander has finished inspecting the weapon he returns it in the same manner as
it was received. The individual receives the weapon by grasping the center of the hand guard
just forward of the slip ring with the left hand and the small of the stock with right hand. He
then executes read, port arms, and order arms.

NOTE: In the event the company commander does not want to inspect the weapon,
the individual remains at inspection arms until the company commander has halted in
front of and is facing the next man. The individual then executes AGAP TA and BABA
TA. As the company commander moves to the rear of the rank being inspected, each
man, as the commander approaches, unfasten the snap of his scabbard, grasps the
point of the scabbard with the left hand, moves the point slightly forward. The
scabbard is held in position until the bayonet has been replaced or, if the bayonet is not
inspected, until the company commander has moved to the next man. At that time, the
securing straps are fastened and the position of attention is resumed.

d. The correct method of manipulating a rifle for inspection is as follows.

1) When receiving the rifle from the inspected individual, reach forward and
grasp the rifle at the upper portion of the hand guard with the right hand. Lower the rifle
diagonally to the left, twist the rifle slightly, insert the tip of the little finger of the left hand
into the ejection port (do not twist the rifle but insert the thumb into the receiver of the M16
series rifle), and look into the barrel. The fingers reflect sufficient light for the inspection of
the barrel.

2) Grasp the small of the stock with the left hand and raise the rifle to a
horizontal position (sights up) with the muzzle to the right. The rifle is centered on the body
with the forearms horizontal and the palms up. Move the rifle horizontally to the left and
inspect the upper portion of the rifle beginning with the flash suppressor. Move the rifle
slowly to the right inspecting the butt. Return the rifle to the center of the body.

3) Keeping the rifle horizontal, rotate it 180 degrees sights toward the body) so
that the sights point toward the marching surface. Move the rifle horizontally to the left and
inspect the muzzle. Move the rifle slowly to the right and inspect the butt. When moving the
rifle across the body twists the rifle as necessary and inspects the movable parts on the sides
of the receiver. Having completed the inspection of the lower parts of the rifle, return it to
the center of the body.

4) Keeping the rifle horizontal, rotate the rifle 180 degrees (sights away from the
body) so that the sights are up. Release the left hand and return the rifle in the same manner
as received.

5) When inspecting a weapon other than a rifle, the inspecting officer receives
the weapon with his right hand and inspects it in the most convenient manner. Having
completed the inspection, the weapon is returned with the right hand in the same manner as
received.
 Drills 68

e. When the company commander has completed the inspection of the platoon leader
commands the platoon to HUMANDA and overtakes the company commander enroute back
to the front of the platoon. The platoon leader halts facing to the front (six steps in front and
centered on his platoon) and exchanges salutes with the company commander. The company
commander (executive officer and first sergeant) faces to the right in marching and moves to
the next platoon. As soon as the company commander has cleared the first platoon, the
platoon leader faces about, commands PASINSIN PAGITAN, KAD and PALUWAG and
then faces about and executes at ease. When the company commander has completed
(exchange salutes with the platoon leader) the inspection of the last platoon, he returns to his
post at the center of the company and commands the company to HUMANDA. He then
dismisses the company, as previously described.

f. When the company is inspected by an officer of a higher command, on the

approach of the inspecting officer, the company commander commands BALANGAY,
HUMANDA. He then faces about salutes, and reports, “Ginoo, “A” Balangay, Kapitan Dela
Cruz namumuno, handa na po sa pagsisiyasat”. The inspection is conducted as previously
described except that the company commander takes a position immediately to the left of the
inspecting officer. The inspection is terminated by the company commander in the same
manner prescribed for a platoon leader.

7.18. IN-QUARTERS INSPECTION (STAND BY)

a. When the company commander wants to conduct an in-quarters inspection, the

members are positioned on line with their equipment or as near it as possible. The platoon
leader positions himself in the path of the inspecting officer at a point near his area of
responsibility. At the approach of the inspecting officer, the platoon leader commands
PULUTONG, HUMANDA, salutes, and reports, “Ginoo, unang pulutong Tenyente Dela
Cruz namumuno, handa napo sa pagsisiyasat.

NOTE: When the situation dictates, the platoon leader may report to the inspecting
officer outside of the quarters. A designated individual commands the members to
HUMANDA as the inspecting officer enters the quarters (bay).

b. The platoon leader then guides the inspecting officer along a route dictated by the
physical arrangement of the personnel and equipment. Upon entering the quarters (bay), the
inspecting officer commands PALUWAG. As the inspecting officer approaches each
individual or his equipment, the individual automatically assumes the position of attention.
When the inspecting officer has moved to the next man, the last inspected resumes the
position of at ease. As the inspecting officer begins to exit the quarters (bay), after
completing the inspection, HUMANDA is commanded. The platoon leader and inspecting
officer exchange salutes.

NOTE: When inspecting policeman’s rooms, attention is not commanded. The

individuals automatically assume the position of attention as the inspector enters the
room. The inspector then commands PALUWAG. As the inspector approaches each
policeman, the policeman assumes the position of attention and resumes at ease after he
has been inspected.
 Drills 69

SECTION VIII

BATALLION AND BRIGADE FORMATION

Battalion Formations
8.1. GENERAL

a. For the most part, battalion and brigade drill merely provides the procedures for
executing company or battalion drill in conjunction with other companies or battalions in the
same formation.

b. For drill purposes, a battalion or brigade consists of a headquarters (staff), colors,

and two or more companies or battalions. The right flank unit serves as base when in a line
formation; the leading element is the base when in column.

c. To facilitate the forming of a larger unit, the commander normally alerts the
component units as to the desired formation, time, place, route, uniform, and the sequence in
which the units will form. Unless the right guide’s position at the formation site has been
previously marked, the guides report to the site and receive instructions prior to the arrival of
the troops.

d. The officer staff forms in one rank, at normal interval and centered on the
commander. Staff members are normally arranged in their numerical order from right to left.
When police non-commissioned officers form as part of the officer staff, they form two steps
to the rear of their respective staff officer. The Command Executive senior police officer
forms one step to the rear of the officer staff and centered on the commander or one step to
the rear and centered on the Colors when they are carried to the rear (battalion mass) of the
staff.

8.2. FORMATIONS

a. The battalion has two basic formations – a line and a column. There are several
variations as to how the separate elements are arranged within either formations the battalion
may be formed in line with the companies in line with platoons in line or battalion in line
with companies in column with platoon in line. From those formations, the battalion may be
positioned in a battalion in column with companies in column, or companies in mass, or
companies in column with platoons in line.

b. When the battalion participates as a separate element of a larger formation, or

when space is limited, it is normally formed in a mass formation in the manner as forming a
company mass.

8.3. FORMING AND DISMISSING THE BATTALION

a. The adjutant is responsible for the formation of troops. He takes a position at the
right flank of the line on which the units are to form and faces down the line. He remains
 Drills 70
facing down the line until all units are formed and then marches to his post midway between
the line of troops and the proposed position of the commander.

NOTE: If guides are used, the adjutant takes his post as soon as the guides have been
aligned.

As the commander and his staff approach, the adjutant commands (directs) the units
to HUMANDA, faces the commander, salutes, and reports, “GINOO, HANDA NA PO
AND TALUPAD.

b. The commander returns the salute ands commands SUMALUNAN. The adjutant
marches forward, passes to the commander’s right, and takes his post as the right flank staff
officer. The commander then commands or directs such actions as he desires.

c. Normally, the Colors are positioned at the center of the battalion when formed in
line or column, and four steps to the rear of the staff when formed in mass.

d. To dismiss the battalion, the commander directs “LANSAGIN ANG INYONG

PANGKAT”. The company commanders and battalion commander exchange salutes. The
battalion commander returns all salutes with one salute. He then dismisses his staff.

NOTE: In a battalion mass formation, the platoon leaders form as the first rank of
troops: the right flank platoon leader serves as the guide.

8.4. INSPECTING THE BATTALLION

a. When the battalion is to be inspected, the adjutant forms the battalion in line with
companies in line and platoons in line.

b. The adjutant forms the troops, reports, and takes his position with the staff. When
the adjutant has joined the staff, the battalion commander directs “HUMANDA SA
PAGSISIYASAT”. Unit commanders face about and give the same directive. The platoon
leaders prepare their platoons for inspection ion the same manner as in company drill. When
all of the platoons in each company have completed open ranks and dress right, the company
commander faces the battalion commander.

NOTE: Besides of the time involved in inspecting a battalion, the commander normally
directs his staff to inspect the companies while he inspects the Colors and makes a
general inspection of the battalion. The Color guards do not execute inspection arms.

c. As the battalion commander (or his designated staff officer) approaches the
company, the company commander salutes and reports, “Ginoo, __________ Balangay,
HANDA NA PO SA PAGSISIYASAT”. The inspecting officer then proceeds to the first
platoon to be inspected. The company commander takes a position to the left of the
inspecting officer. The platoons are inspected in the same manner as explained in company
drill. In the event a platoon has already been inspected by a staff officer, or is waiting to be
inspected by a staff officer, and the battalion commander approaches, the battalion
commander is invited to inspect the platoon.
 Drills 71
d. When the battalion commander has returned to the front of the formation and all
staff officers have completed their inspection, the battalion commander commands
TALUPAD, HUMANDA and dismissed the battalion.

e. If the battalion is being inspected by a higher commander and his staff, the
battalion commander reports to the inspecting officer in the same manner as the company
commanders. The battalion commander’s staff takes a position to the left of the higher
inspecting staff and escorts them to the unit. The battalion commander escorts the higher
commander.

8.5. GENERAL

a. The brigade, like the battalion, has two basic formations – a line and a column.
There are several variations as to how the battalions are arranged within their formations: the
brigade may be formed with battalions in mass, or battalions in line with companies in mass.
From those formations, the brigade may be positioned in column with battalions in mass,
companies in mass, or battalions in column with companies in column.

b. The formation selected is normally dictated by the space available and the desires
of the commander.

8.6. FORMING AND DISMISSING THE BRIGADE

a. The brigade is formed and dismissed in the same manner as the battalion.

b. Normally, the brigade color is positioned at the center of the brigade. Subordinate
color-bearing organizations position their colors to the center of their formation when in a
line or column formation, or four steps to the rear of their staff when in a mass formation.
 Drills 72
SECTION IX

MOUNTED DRILL
9.1. GENERAL

a. This contains the procedure for the orderly formation and movement of vehicles
during drill and ceremonies for motorized and mechanized units. When necessary, the
procedures may be modified to conform to local conditions.

b. Motorized and mechanized units, when dismounted, conduct drill and ceremonies
in the same manner as prescribed fro ground units.

c. When mounted in vehicles, visible troops sit at attention. Those armed with a rifle
place at the butt of the weapon alongside the right foot in the same manner as order arms,
with the weapon vertical and parallel to the calf of the leg. Grasp the weapon with the right
hand so that the right forearm is horizontal. Visible troops not armed with a rifle, fold their
arms (right over left) and raise the elbows so that the upper arms are horizontal.

d. When marching units and motorized and/or mechanized units take part in the same
ceremony, the units from dismounted (in a formation corresponding to the marching units)
with their vehicles to the rear. On the directive “PASA MASID”, the commander faces
about and directs “SA INYONG SASAKYAN, HUMANAY” or “SAKAY”. Subordinate
commanders and leaders, in sequence from right to left, relay the command and all vehicle
members double time to their vehicles. On the signal to mount, they mount their vehicles.
Drivers observe their commander or leader for the signal to start engines (lead vehicle as a
cue).

9.2. FORMATIONS

a. The formations for motorized and mechanized units are basically the same as for
ground units. The interval between vehicles is about five steps. The distance is about 10
steps between vehicles one behind the other.

1) Column. In this formation, the vehicles are placed one behind the other, and
the right edges of the vehicles are alighted.

2) Line. In this formation, vehicles are abreast, and the two edges of the vehicles
are aligned.

3) Mass. A unit formed with two or more columns abreast constitutes a mass.
Masses may be grouped as follows:

a) LINE OF MASSES. Masses abreast with ten-step intervals (Figured D-

1).

b) COLUMN OF MASSES. Masses, placed one-behind another with ten-

step intervals between companies (Figure D-2).
 Drills 73
c) LINE OF BATALLIONS IN LINE OF MASSES. Battalions in line of
masses abreast with 20-step intervals between battalions.

d) LINE OF BATALLIONS IN COLUMN OF MASSES. Battalions in

column of masses abreast with 20-step intervals between battalions.
e) COLUMNS OF BATTALIONS IN LINE OF MASSES. Battalions in
line of masses, placed one behind another, with 20-step intervals between battalions.

f) COLUMNS OF BATTALION IN COLUMS OF MASSES. Battalions

in column of masses, placed one behind another, with 20-step intervals between battalions.

b. Mass formations may be used for ceremonies or instruction by companies or

larger units.

9.3. FORMATION AT VEHICLES

a. To form at the vehicles from any position, the command is SA INYONG

SASAKYAN, HUMANAY. At the Command HUMANAY, the men move (double time) to
their assigned vehicles and formed as shown in Figured D-3. When there are more than five
men, they form two or three ranks with normal distance. When there are more than 15 men,
the number of men per rank may be increased.

b. To load, the command is SAKAY. On the command of execution NA, each man
quickly mounts his vehicle.

9.4. MOVEMENT OF VEHICLES

a. To move forward, the commander gives warning PASULONG, and his

vehicles moves out. The other vehicles move forward at the designated distance. They are
aligned on the base vehicle (right)

b. To halt, the commander signals HINTO. The driver then slows down and halts
the commander’s vehicle. The other vehicles close to the prescribed distance and halt.

c. To change direction of travel of mass formation, the commander gives appropriate

signal (hand and/or whistle as pre arranged by the commander). On the commander’s signal,
the base vehicle turns 90-degrees and slows. Other vehicles turn about 45-degrees and
continue traveling in an arc at normal speed until on line; the base vehicle accelerates as
necessary to maintain correct distance on the commander.

d. To change a line formation to a column formation, the commander signals for a

column. The base vehicle and those directly behind it, move forward. Other vehicles move
at a 45 –degree angle until in a line with the lead vehicle and then execute a 45-degree turn.

e. To change a column formation to a line formation, the commander signals a line

formation. The base (right flank vehicle ) and all other vehicles turn at a 45 degree angle,
turn again at a 45-degree angle when the prescribed intervals is obtained and then halt when
on line with the base vehicle.
 Drills 74
9.5. MOUNTED REVIEWS

a. Motorized and mechanized units conduct ceremonies as possible to the

procedures prescribed for other units. They may participate (exactly as prescribed for
marching units) as dismounted unit and on the directive “PASA MASID” mount on their
vehicles and pass in review mounter.

b. When desired, motorized and mechanized units may position their vehicles in a
prescribed formation and remain mounted throughout the ceremony.
 Ceremonies 75

CHAPTER II

CEREMONIES
 Ceremonies 76

SECTION I

REVIEWS
1.1. DEFINITION

A review is an inspection of troops by a high officer or honored guests as a

way of showing unit strength, state of discipline and preparedness.

1.2. HISTORICAL BACKGROUND

Reviews in the Philippine National Police were patterned after the United
States Arm’s Procedures. This is due to the fact that the Americans greatly influenced the
Philippine Government, educational system and the military during their occupation of the
country right after the Spanish regime.

U.S. Military reviews were outlined in the regulations for the Order and
discipline of the troops of the United States commonly known as the Blue Book written in
1779 by Baron Friedrich von Steuben, a former Prussian Officer under Frederick the Great.
He was commissioned by General George Washington to develop the revolutionary forces
into a well-organized and highly disciplined army.

The origin of the Military reviews through may be traced back to as early as
the Middle Ages when rulers were likely to have military ceremonies as a way of showing
strength.

At the turn of the Century, armies all over the world begun adopting the
regimental system. Regiments were assigned a specific color (flag) party marched at the
front and center of its unit as a point for the unit to dress on. Since victories in those days
were expressed in terms of the number of enemy colors captured, the color party was the
logical priority target and thus suffered heavy casualties.

In the U.S. Army, the colors historically have been placed in the center of the
formation and considered to be part of the company on the immediate right of the colors.
This company is still called the color unit.

Musical elements (usually drums and fifes and sometimes a band) were used during
actual battle and marched 12 to 15 paces to the rear of the formation. By 1862. U.S. infantry
drill regulation posted bands and field music on the right of the formation or at the head of
the formation when it moved in column.

Today, the presence of the colors at the center of the formation represents their
presence in the old days at the forefront of the unit during the heat of battle. On the other
hand, the presence of the band represents the significant role that the drum, fife and other
musical instruments have played throughout military history for signaling camp or on the
battlefield.
 Ceremonies 77

1.3. PURPOSE

Reviews are often mistaken to be the same as parades. While some features are
similar, these are two distinct ceremonies although the combination of the two is normally
practice. A review is a military ceremony used to.

a. Honor a visiting high ranking commander, officials or dignitary, and or permit

them to observe the state of training of a unit.

b. Present decoration and awards.

c. Honor or recognize unit or individual achievements.

d. Commemorate events; and retirement honors.

It is more fitting therefore to entire a program “ A Review in honor of

_______________________” or A Review in Commemoration of ________________”
instead of calling it a parade and review when actually what would be done is only a review.

1.4. GENERAL

Normally, a review is conducted with a battalion-size or larger troop unit.

However, a composite or representative element consisting of two or more platoons may
serve the same purpose. A review consists of the following steps in sequence.

a. Formation of Troops
b. Presentation of command and honors.
c. Inspection
d. Honors to the nation
e. Remarks
f. Pass in Review
g. Conclusion

NOTE: The inspection stage may be omitted for decorations, awards or individual
recognition ceremonies.

Other ceremonial activities, or combinations thereof, that maybe incorporated within

the frame work of a review are:

a. Review with decorations, awards, and individual recognition ceremonies.

b. Review with change of command, activation or de activation of units.

c. Review with retreat.

d. Review with retreat and retirement, decorations and awards.

e. Review with retreat and change of command, activation or de activation of units.

 Ceremonies 78

f. Review and parade with all of the above combinations.

To enable himself to review his own command with a visiting reviewing officer a
commander normally designates an officer of his command as commander of troops. The
troop Commander (TC) is responsible for the preparation of the troops for the review.

Any of the formations described for the battalion or brigade maybe used. However,
the three recommended formations for conducting a review are;

a. Battalion in line with companies in line. (Figure 1)

b. Brigade in Line with battalions in line (Figure 2)
c. Brigade in Line with battalions in mass. (Figure 3)

The formation selected is determined by space available and other desires of

the commander. Commanders may alter the formation or prescribed distances to meet local
situations. Each unit should be sized uniformly with the tallest men at the rear and on the
left. Commanders should not cause the leaders to change position because of their size.
Officers and other key police non-commissioned officers, including squad leaders and other
equivalent by virtue of their rank and time in service, should participate in their deserved
positions of dignity.

If possible, the reviewing officer should arrive at his post (figure 4) after staff
of the TC has reversed and the TC has faced the reviewing stand. Upon arrival, the
reviewing officer should immediately take his post and refrain from greeting distinguished
spectators until after the review has terminated.

The reviewing officer, host or host commander, and distinguished persons

invited to attend the review (but not themselves receiving the review), take position facing
the troops (Figure 4).

When ceremony is conducted for an individual junior in rank to the host or

host commander, the junior takes a position to the left of the host or host commander unless
the commander yields the post of honor to him. Normally, the honor position is the position
on the right and is the reviewing officer’s post. The host or host commander gives the
appropriate directive,”IHANDOG ANG PAMUNUAN” during the conduct of the review.
(This arrangement will not hold true if the guests and hosts are seated at a grandstand. The
protocol on sitting arrangement shall be followed).

When a civilian or foreign dignitary receives the review, he takes the honor
position to the right of the host. The host or host commander returns all salutes when, in his
judgment, it would be more appropriate. As a courtesy, the host or host commander should
cue the dignitary and inconspicuously explain the procedures during the conduct of
ceremony. The position in which the flags are displayed at the rear of the reviewing party
corresponds to the position taken by the individual in the front rank of the reviewing party.

When a ceremony is conducted honoring a foreign official or dignitary

entitled to honors, equivalent honors (salutes) are rendered.
 Ceremonies 79
NOTE: If the honors of the dignitary include his or her nation’s anthem, the honors
are played in the following order: four ruffles and flourishes the foreign anthem an
approximate three-second drum rolls and Philippine National Anthem.

When the ceremony includes decorations awards or retirements the host or host
commander should be junior in rank or position to the highest ranking individual being
honored. Parallel rank will suffice if no available junior.

An officer from local staff is designated to escort and brief members of the reviewing
party and to show them their positions.

Since all situations and eventualities relative to various service or units (police
academy, Escort and Honor Guard, regular PNP units, reserve components, or units
equivalent to CMT and training commands/centers) cannot be foreseen, commanders may
take minor changes to stated procedures. However, with a review towards preserving PNP
tradition and maintaining consistency, “THEY SHOULD NOT ALTER OR MODIFY
SEQUENCE OF EVENTS OTHER THAN STATED.”

1.5. SEQUENCE OF EVENTS AND INDIVIDUAL ACTIONS

a. REVIEW (STANDARD)

1) Formation of troops

a) As soon as the troops are ready, the troop

Adjutant (from his position near the band) directs ‘IHUDYAT ANG PAGHANDA’. The
band immediately sounds attention call to signal start the ceremony.

b) Upon hearing attention, all Battalion Commanders (BC) face

about, bring their units to attention and right shoulder arms, then face front.

c) The Troop adjutant directs again “IHUDYAT ANG TAWAG

AYUDANTE “, the band sounds the adjutants‘s call, immediately followed by a march
music.
d) The BCs give PASULONG, KAD; the troops follow the route in
figure 5.

e) When the companies are already perpendicular with their markers the
battalion commanders command KALIWANG PANIG, NA, the platoon guides go to port
arms and move double time for their pre designated markers. When the platoons are already
in their markers BC commands TALUPAD TO.

{Note: Entrance of troops is optional. The review may start with the troops already in
position in front of the reviewing officer. In which case, attention call shall be sounded
to signal the start of the ceremony. The troop adjutant commands MGA GABAY
SUMAHANAY NA, then follow the sequence starting from f. This command MGA
GABAY SUMAHANAY may not be given when the guides are already on the line as
pre arranged).

f) The troop adjutant designates Alpha Company as the base

company”A”Balangay then positions himself midway between the line of troops and the TC.
 Ceremonies 80
At the last note of “A” Balangay, The BCs order TUNTUN SA KANAN simultaneously this
means that all companies will be aligned with the base company. The company commanders
face about then order TUNTUN SA KANAN.

The platoon leader faces about and command TUNTON SA KANAN, NA. When the troops
have been disposed and aligned, they command HANDA, RAP.

g) The troop adjutant now directs “MGA GABAY SUMALUNAN”.

The Bn Cmdr commands ‘MGA GABAY SUMALUNAN, NA then faces front. TA reports
to TC “ Ginoo, handa nap o ang talupad”. The TC acknowledges the salute and say
SUMALUNAN KA.

h) As the troop adjutant is posted, the TC faces his staff and commands
MGA KALUPUNAN SUMALIKOD KO, NA.

2) Presentation of Command and Honors

a) When the reviewing officer has halted at his post, the TC faces about
and directs “TANGHAL SANDATA”. The BCs face about command TANGHAL TA;
face to the front and salute together with their respective staffs. When the units have
completed this movement, the TC faces about and commands his staff and himself
TANGHAL TA.

b) Upon completion of the presentation and/or honors, the TC commands

his staff to BABA TA; faces about and directs “BABA, SANDATA”.

c) The BCs terminate their salute, face about & command BABA, TA.
They then face to the front.

d) The TC faces about.

3) Inspection

a) When the TC has faced the reviewing stand the reviewing officer and
the host commander move forward and halt three steps in front of the TC. Staffs, aides-de-
camp and orderlies do not normally accompany the inspecting party.

b) The TC salutes “ Ginoo, handa nap o ang maga talupad upang libutin”.
The band begins to play march music on the salute of the TC and continues
to play until; the reviewing officer has returned to his post.

c) The TC guides the reviewing party to the right flank of the hand. File
and the host or host commander march to the right of the reviewing officer. When riding and
the troops are in mass formation the reviewing party passes between the line and battalion
commanders and company commanders. When marching the inspecting party passes
between the front rank of troops and the platoon leaders when companies are in line
formation.

d) When the inspection is made by motor vehicle the reviewing party enters
the vehicle in front of the reviewing stand. The reviewing officer enters first and occupies
 Ceremonies 81
the left rear portion. The vehicle approaching from the left of the TC proceeds to the post of
the TC and stops. The TC salutes and enters the vehicle, occupying the right front position.

e) Upon the departure of the reviewing party, the senior staff officer
commands the staff TIKAS PAHINGA. After the inspection has been completed, the senior
staff officer commands HUMANDA before the return of the TC.

f) As the reviewing party approaches the colors the TC inconspicuously

commands GINOO, ANG MGA WATAWAT, PUGAY KAMAY, NA (six steps from the
colors and BABA KAMAY, NA (six steps beyond the colors)

g) Upon reaching the last elements of the troops, the honoree host and TC
return to their respective positions using the most direct route (Figure 6)

4) Honors to the Nation

a) When the reviewing party members have returned to their posts, the TC
faces about and directs “TANGHAL SANDATA”. The BCs face about and commands
TANGHAL SANDATA for himself and his staff. On the execution of the hand salute by
the TCs, the band begins to play the National Anthem.

b) The reviewing party and all military spectators salute while the National
Anthem is being played.

c) Upon completion of the National Anthem the TC and staff terminate their
salutes on his command. He then faces about and directs “BABA SANDATA”.

d) The BCs terminate their salute, face about, command BABA, TA then
face about.

5) Pass-in- Review

a) The TC brings his staff behind him, KALUPUNAN, SUMALIKOD

KO NA. When the staff has reversed its position, the TC directs “PASA MASID”. The
band moves to march position.

b) The honoree moves forward to acknowledge the salute of the troops

passing before the grandstand.

c) When the colors pass before the reviewing stand, the band interrupts
the music and plays four ruffles and flourishes while spectators execute hand salute or the
equivalent salute for the civilians can bring down after the play.

d) The band continuously plays until the last parade elements leave the
parade ground.

e) When all the parading troops and floats have cleared the parade
ground, the TC and staff move forward facing the grandstand and halt ten steps in front of the
honoree. The TC salutes and the honoree acknowledges the salute. He may or may not
thank or congratulate the TC and staff.
 Ceremonies 82
b) OTHER TYPES OF REVIEW

1) REVIEW WITH DECORATIONS, AWARDS AND

INDIVIDUAL RETIREMENT

a) If the inspection is omitted, the TC (following order arms after

the presentation and/or honor) shall command. MGA TAONG PARARANGALAN AT
MGA WATAWAT PUMAGITNA, KAD. The ceremony then continues as outlined in
paragraph 3 to 14 below.

b) The procedures mentioned below provide latitude for

recognition of one or a group of retirees of various ranks. However, the local commanders
should consider it appropriate to cause the review to be conducted in the retiree’s honor when
only one distinguished individual is retiring and allow that individual to participate as the
reviewing officer. When the colors are marched forward the reviewing officer (retiree)
would position himself in front and center of the colors. After remarks by the host, the
retiree returns to the reviewing officer’s post.

1) The procedures for the formation of troops, presentation and honors, and
inspection remain the same as previously mentioned.

2) When the reviewing officer has completed the inspection and has
returned to his post, the TC faces about and directs ‘MGA TAONG PARARANGALAN
AT MGA WATAWAT PUMAGITNA , KAD.”

3) The persons to be decorated and retirees are formed initially at the

ready line at normal distance behind the last rank of the Color unit. (An alternate position for
these personnel may be six steps to the left and on line with the reviewing officer. They then
join the detachment after the colors are brought forward). They line up from left to right
according to the rank of the decoration to be received. Those persons receiving decorations
of the same rank will take positions according to their police rank. On the command
PUMAGITNA, persons to be decorated execute a right face. On the command KAD, they
march forward to clear the right rear of the unit they are behind. They then execute a column
left halt, in a position centered on the colors and execute a right face. The commands halt
and right face are given by the last man in the file.

4) When unit colors or guidon are to be decorated, they are

accompanied by their commander and positioned in a single rank five steps in front of the
persons to be decorated according to the rank of the decorations to be bestowed the highest
ranking decoration on the right. The senior staff officer (battalion) or a platoon leader
(company) assumes command in the absence of the commander. On the command KAD, the
colors march forward (seven steps) and halt one step in front of the line company
commanders.

5) The staff of the TC on the command KAD, the staff marches forward for
enough to provide clearance for the colors and persons to be honored. The staff then halts
and executes left face on command of the rear staff officer.

6) The TC marches forward and takes his post five steps in front of and
centered on the leading element. He faces about and commands PAULONG KAD. On the
command KAD, the band begins to play march music and continues to play until the
 Ceremonies 83
detachment is halted in front of the reviewing officer. The TC, persons to be honored , and
colors march forward . The TC commands DESTAKAMENTO, TO when he is
approximately six steps from the reviewing officer. He then salutes and reports, Ginoo ang
mga taong pararangalanat mga watawat narito napo”. The reviewing officer returns the
salute. The host (local commander ) directs “IHANDOG ANG PAMUNUAN”.

7) The TC faces to the right in marching, passes around the right flank
of the persons being honored , and centered on his staff. He then directs,” ITANGHAL
SANDATA”. Unit commander face about and command TANGHAL TA. They then faces
about and execute the hand salute. The TC then faces about and command TANGAHL TA;
he and his staff come to present arms with the detachment.
8) Honors to the nation shall be rendered at this time. AT the last note
of the National Anthem, the TC commands (for himself, his staff and detachment), BABA
TA. He then faces about and directs, BABA, SANDATA Unit commanders terminate their
salutes , face about and command BABA,TA. The TC again directs “TIKAS PAHINGA”.
In turn unit commanders command TIKAS, NGA. They then face to the front and so with
the TC.

9) The reviewing officer, accompanied by the police host advances

by the most direct route to the right front of the line of persons to be honored. The
(command ) CPNCO (carrying the awards or certificates ) position himself one step to the
rear and one 15-inch step to the left of the host. After citation is read, the CPNCO
immediately steps forward and gives the award to the police host who in turn gives it to the
reviewing officer . After the award has been secured the CPNCO returns to his original
position to the rear of the host. The CPNCO moves down the line with the reviewing officer
as he moves down the line of awardees . As soon as the reviewing party has halted in front
of the first awardee a narrator reads the citation . The narrator pauses between citations to
permit the reviewing officer time to pin the medal on the person being decorated and move
to the next man or to fasten the streamer on the staff of the guidon or colors. As the
reviewing officer approaches the guidon to be decorated , the bearer executes present guidon
so the reviewing officer may fasten the streamer. Color bearers lower the color to be
decorated far enough for the reviewing officer to fasten the streamer the color bearer gathers
the color around the staff so it cannot touch the ground. He resumes the carry position after
the streamer has been attached.

10) When the last award has been presented, the reviewing officer
and his party return to their post . The TC commands his staff to attention faces about and
directs “TALUPAD HUMANDA”. Unit commanders face about and command
BALANGAY, DA and then face about again. The TC faces about and commands (loud
enough for the band to hear). MGA WATAWAT SUMALUNAN, KAD. On the command
SUMALUNAN, the persons being honored execute a right face. On the command KAD,
they march forward executing two column lefts halt on line six steps to the left of the
reviewing officer and execute a left face. The commands halt and left face are given by the
last man in the file. In some cases, the awardees may be given seats at the grandstand. Also
on the command SUMALUNAN, the colors execute reverse march. On the command KAD
they return to their original post.

11) On the command KAD, the band plays marching drum beats
until the colors are back in position.
 Ceremonies 84
12) Remarks are made at his time. The TC maybe requested to give
“TIKAS PAHINGA””.

13) After the remarks, the host (local commander) directs “PASA
MASID”.

14) The procedures from this point on are the same as previously
described.

2) REVIEW WITH CHANGE OF COMMAND

(See Section VI: Change of Command)

3) REVIEW WITH RETREAT

a) The formation of troops, presentation and honors are the same

as previously described.

b) At the completion of the presentation of honors to the

reviewing officer, the TC commands his staff to order arms , faces about and directs “BABA
SANDATA”. After its execution he directs “TIKAS PAHINGA”. Unit Commanders face
about and command TIKAS PAHINGA. They then face about and assume the parade rest
position. The TC then directs “IHUDYAT ANG PASULONG”, faces about and command
his staff to parade rest after which the band sounds retreat. At the conclusion of the retreat
the TC commands his staff to attention faces the troops and directs “MGA TALUPAD
HUMANDA”. When the troops are at attention the TC directs “ITANGHAL SANDATA”.
When the units have completed this movement he then faces the reviewing officer and
commands his staff TANGHAL TA. This is the signal for the band to play To the Colors.

c) When the ceremony is held on a police post the canon is fired

(When applicable and /or appropriate) on the last note of retreat and To the Colors is played
while the flag is lowered.

d) The reviewing officer, his staff and police spectators stand at

the position of attention during the sounding of retreat. On the first note of To the Colors,
they salute and hold their salute until the last note is played.

e) On the last note of music, the TC commands BABA, TA for himself

and his staff, faces about and directs “BABA, SANDATA’. As soon as the troops have
executed order arms, the TC directs “TIKAS PAHINGA”. When the units have completed
these movements, he then faces the reviewing officer.

f) The review then proceeds with the inspection and so on as on

normal view.
 Ceremonies 85
SECTION II

PARADES

21. DEFINITION

A parade is a police ceremony wherein a body of troops are formed before its
Commanding Officer or other high officer for the display of its condition, members,
equipments and proficiency. It includes exercise in the manual of arms, the report on the
members of the various units present or accounted for, the publication of orders, etc., and
ends with a pass in reviews.

2.2. DISTINCTIVE FEATURES

The preparation and organization of troops for a parade are similar to that for a
review. However, in a parade, since the commander is also the reviewing officer, the distance
between the troops and the commander is greater than that for a review. Other features are;
the band conduct sound off the inspection is omitted, reports are rendered orders are
published and officers and guidons are marched forward and centered on the commander. If
retreat is scheduled, honors to the nation are conducted concurrently with retreat.

2.3. TYPES OF PARADES AND THEIR SEQUENCE

a. CEREMONIAL BATALLION PARADE

1.) Formulation of Troops

a) Units are moved to their positions on the ready line in the most
convenient manner. The Commander prescribes the assembly area, the routes sequence, and
time of arrival on the line. He and his staff take their post prior to adjutant’s call.

b) The procedure for moving from the ready line to the final line
is the same as for a review.

2) Sound Off

a) After the battalion has been formed, aligned and given parade rest on
the final line, the adjutant directs “IHUDYAT” and assumes the position of parade rest. He
remains facing the formation.

b) At the directive IHUDYAT”, the band plays three sound off chords, at
the conclusion of the third chord, the band moves forward playing a march in quick time. The
band executes a left turn to march across the front of the troops. At the left of the line of
troops, the band countermarches and returns over the same ground to the right of the line.
After passing beyond the right of the troops, the band executes a right turn, countermarches
again, and halts in the original position. When the band has halted, it will cease playing in the
next convenient place in the music and will again play the three sound off chords. (Trooping
the line by the band may be eliminated when ceremonies are conducted indoors during
inclement weather and when space is limited.).
 Ceremonies 86

NOTE: Retreat, when scheduled, is integrated at this point. Upon completion of the
IHUDYAT chords, the band pauses briefly and then plays retreat (by the trumpet
section) without a command from the adjutant. Upon completion of retreat, the
adjutant comes to attention and directs, “MGA BALANGAY HUMANDA.” Then
“TANGHAL SANDATA.” The adjutant faces about and salutes. At the conclusion of
To the Color or National AThhem, the adjutant comes to order and faces about and
directs “BABA, SANDATA”. After the last units comes to order arms, the adjutant
faces about. The commander and his staff assume PARADE REST, ATTENTION,
PRESENT ARMS, and ORDER ARMS with the adjutant. The adjutant’s salute is the
signal for the band to play To the Color or the National Anthem.

3) Honors to the Nation

a) If retreat is not conducted, the adjutant (after the band has completed
sount off) assumes the position of attention and directs “MGA BALANGAY HUMANDA at
TANGHAL SANDATA”.

b) Unit commanders assume the position of attention, face about and

command BALANGAY, DA then TANGHAL, TA. They face about and salute.

c) When all units are at TANGHAL, TA, the adjutant faces about and
salutes. This is the signal for the band to play the National Anthem.

d) The battalion commander and his staff execute TANGHAL, TA on

his command on the first note of the music.

e) Police expectators rise and execute hand salute and its equivalent for
the civilians.

4) Presentation

a) Upon completion of the National Anthem, the battalion commander

and his staff execute BABA, TA on his command. The adjutant terminates his salute, faces
about, and direct “IBABA AND SANDATA.”

b) Unit commanders terminate their salute, face about, command BABA,

TA, and then face (back) to the front.

c) When all units are at order arms, the adjutant faces about, salutes, and
reports “Ginoo, handa na po ang patikas”.

d) The battalion commander returns the salute and commands

SUMALUNAN KA. The adjutant trots forward, passes by the battalion commander’s right,
and takes his post at the right flank member of the staff,

5) Manual of Arms

a) After the adjutant has joined the staff, the battalion commander
commands such movements in the manual of arms as he may desire.
 Ceremonies 87

b) The commander directs “PAGSASANAY SA PAGHAWAK NG

SANDATA’. He then in sequence commands SA KANANG BALIKAT, TA;
KALIWANG BALIKAT, TA’ AGAP, TA; BABA TA; SIYASAT, TA; AGAP, TA; and
BABA, TA.

6) Report

a) When the manual of arms has been completed, the battalion commander
the directs “TANGGAPIN ANG ULAT”.

b) The adjutant trots forward, halts to his position at the center of the
command and command MAG-ULAT. Unit commanders in succession, from right to left,
salute and report “Ginoo_____________, Balangay, narito po lahat o napag-alaman”. The
adjutant returns each commander’s salute.

c) After receiving the repots, the adjutant faces about, salutes and repots
“Ginoo, narito po lahat o napag-alaman”.

7) Publishing of Oders

a) The battalion commander returns the salute and directs “IPAHAYAG

ANG KAUTUSAN”.

b) The adjutant faces about and gives the orders “ Makinig sa kautusan.
Ang mga makatalag ngayon, punong panlarangan (Name of Officer), punong tagapangalaga
(Name of Officer), sa utos ni (Name of Officer) MGA PINUNO, PUMAGITA, KAD”.

8) Officers Center March

a) All officers from the company commanders to platoon leaders

including guidon bearers, at the last note of PUMAGITNA, execute center face. Then when
the command of execution of KAD is given, the officers and guidon bearers march off to the
center and mark time upon reaching their designated position. The first company commander
then commands MGA PINUNO, TO. The command of execution TO, the officer’s halt and
face front and shove off at the command KAD.

b) When they are approximately 12 paces in front of the battalion

commander, the senior company commander commands MGA PINUNO, TO. At TO, they
count silently. At the count of four, they execute the salute and bring their hands down at
seven (guidon bearers start to execute the equivalent salute at the count of three and return
same starting at the count of six). The troop commander acknowledges the salute, then
command MGA PINUNO, PABALIK, KAD.

c) The group of officers executes about face and shove off towards the
center of the troops. As they approach the line of their respective positions, the senior
company commander commands MGA PINUNO, TO. At the command TO, they halt, then
automatically face their respective position and shove off to their designated markers and
automatically halt. At the last note of the band, they automatically face front at the same
time.
 Ceremonies 88

9) Pass in Review

a) When all officers have returned to their posts and the band has stopped
playing, the battalion commander directs “PASA MASID”.

b) The battalion passes in review in the same manner as prescribed for a

review except the units render honors when six steps to the left of the troop commander and
staff; and terminate honors when the unit is six steps to the right of the commander of troops
and staff. The commander of troops and staff then assume the role of the reviewing party at
their location on the field.

c) When the last element of troops has passed the reviewing stand and
executed ready front, the band stops playing.

d) Expectators may rise, stand and applause after the parade is

completed.

b. CEREMONIAL BRIDGADE PARADE

1) The brigade ordinarily is formed in line with battalions in mass formations. The
parade is the same as the ceremonial battalions parade with the following exceptions;

a) The brigade commander is substituted for battalion commander, and

brigade for battalion, in the description.

b) In moving across the front of the brigade, the band passes in front of the
line of battalion commanders during the sound off.

2) The battalions execute present arms, order arms, parade rest, and come to
attention on the command of execution of their respective commanders. Reports are made by
the battalion commanders instead of company commanders.

3) At the command of execution KAD, of MGA PINUNO, PUMAGITNA,

KAD, the battalion commanders, their staffs, and colors close on the line of battalion
commanders and staffs. The company commanders face to the half right or half left in
marching and close on a line four steps to the rear of the battalion color. The guidon bearers
face half right or half left in marching and close on a line four steps back of the company
commanders. The other officers face the guidon bearers.

4) When the officers, guidon bearers and colors have closed and faced to the front,
the senior battalion commander commands PASULONG, KAD. The center officer of the
leading rank is the guide. On the command of the senior battalion commander, the officers,
guidon bearers, and colors are halted with the leading ranks six steps from the brigade
commander. The commands TANGHAL, TA and HANDA, RAP are given by the senior
battalion commander.

5) The brigade commander commands MGA PINUNO, SUMALUNAN (pause),

KAD. On the command SUMALUNAN, the Colors execute reverse march. All other
execute about face. On the command of execution KAD, the officers, colors and guidon
bearers march forward. The senior battalion commander commands MGA PINUUNO, TO
 Ceremonies 89
so that the rank of battalion commanders is on line with its original position. The senior
battalion commander then commands SUMALUNAN (pause), KAD. On the command
SUMALUNAN, the battalion commanders and staffs face outward, the battalion color guard
executes wheeling movements, and on the command of execution KAD the color guard
marches back to its original position. The company commanders, guidon bearers, and other
officers face to the half right or half left in marching and move back to their original position.

c) STREET PARADE

1) For street parade, troops are formed and marched in the most convenient
manner. Street parade may include police vehicles. Towed or transported weapons add to the
drama of a street parade. Cargo vehicles are included only when it is desired to increase the
size of the display.

2) Practical formations for street parades are:

a) Columns of threes and fours.

b) Two or more columns of threes and fours abreast.
c) Mass Formation

3) The vehicles move in a single column or column of twos, threes, or fours abreast,
as the width of the street permits.

4) In order to keep police units in the same cadence, units should not march between
two bands.

d. EVENING PARADE

1) Organization

The ceremonial elements shall be composed of the following:

a) One brigade of two battalions (two companies of two platoons each).

b) Band of not less than 30 members with a band conductor.

c) Two color bearers for the National and unit colors and two color guards.

2) Procedures

a) The band sounds the attention call, Battalion commanders command

TALUPAD, HUMANDA. The brigade Commander cautions his staff “KALUPUNAN
HUMANDA”.

b) At the sound of the Adjutant’s call, the 1st battalion commander commands his
unit SA KANANG BALIKAT, TA and PASULONG, KAD to its position. At the ready
line at the same time, the Brigade Commander commands PASULONG, KAD and march
with his staff to the front of the grandstand facing the projected position of the parading
troops. Once the brigade staff is halted, the Brigade Commander cautions the Brigade
Adjutant, “SUMALUNAN”. The Adjutant proceeds to his position near the band by taking
the most direct route. The 2nd battalion commander counts 24 beats after the 1st battalion
 Ceremonies 90
th
commander had shoved off. After the 24 count, he commands his battalion PASULONG,
KAD at the ready line and marches his unit to its proper position. As soon as column
movement has reached halfway of designated position, the battalion commander orders
“MGA GABAY SUMAHANAY”. Guides move out at a double time (at port arms) to the
line marked with flogs, halt and come to order arms facing the Adjutant.

c) Once the battalions are halted on their designated positions, the Brigade
Adjutant shouts BALANGAY. He then proceeds to his position approximately 24 paces in
front of and facing the Brigade Commander.

d) This becomes the cue for the battalion commanders to face about and
command TUNTON, KANAN. Company commanders, at the last note of KANAN, execute
face and caution their platoon leaders “TUNTON, KANAN”. The platoon leaders face about
and command TUNTON, KANAN, NA and proceed to dress the platoons. To make the
dressing uniform, all platoon leaders take their cue from the last platoon leader and base their
movement on him.

e) When the troops are dreesed, the Adjutant faces about, salutes and reports’
Handa na po ang patikas” to the Troop Commander.

f) The Troop Commander.

1) Acknowledges Adjutant’s salute and cautions him “SUMALUNAN KA”.

2) Faces about and cautions his staff “KALUPUNAN, SUMALIKOD KO,

KAD”.

3) Faces about and cautions the battalion commanders “TANGHAL

SANDATA”. Battalion commanders command TANGHAL, TA successively and salute
together with their respective staff after the troops execute present arms.

4) Faces about and salutes together with his staff. The band plays appropriate
ruffles and flourishes and appropriate music depending on honoree’s rank and title.
(Presentation of Troops). Guns shall be fired at this portion depending on the honoree’s rank/
title.

5) Order Arms with his staff, faces about and cautions “BABA SANDATA”.
Battalion commanders command BABA, TA successively.

g) The troop Commander faces about, salutes the honoree and reports” Handa nap o
and patikas upang libutin”.

h) Trooping the line takes place

i) After the tropping the line, the awarding ceremony shall follow. The Troop
Commander commands MGA TAONG PARARANGALAN AT MGA WATAWAT,
PUMAGITNA, KAD. His staff shall execute right face and move to the left. Colors and
persons to be decorated shall form in the center, halt and face towards the grandstand. The
Troop Commander commands PASULONG, KAD. The detail is moved close to the
grandstand. The Troop Commander faces about and report “Nandito na po ang mga taong
pararangalan at mga watawat”.He returns to join his staff at the back of the colors and
 Ceremonies 91
cautions the battalion commanders “TANGHAL, SANDATA”. With the troops a at present
arms, the Troop Commander faces about and commands present arms to his staff and
awardees. The National Anthem is played. After the last note of the music, he commands
BABA, TA to his staff and the awardees. The Troop Commander faces about to face the
grandstand.

j) The Personnel Officer reads the citations, and awards are presented. The Honoree
returns to the grandstand and the awardees march to their designated places while colors
return to their position in line of troops.

k) Speech of the Guest of Honor

l) Parade Proper- The Troop Commander orders the Adjutants “IHUDYAT.” The
Adjutant goes in front of the Troop Commander and cautions the band “IHUDYAT.” The
band plays and moves at the same time across the parade ground. Upon the band’s return to
its former position, The Adjutant goes to attention and cautions the band “IHUDYAT AND
PAGSILONG” then automatically goes to parade rest.

m) After the lat note of “IHUDYAT ANG PAGSILONG”, The Troop Adjutant
goes to attention and commands the troops MGA TALUPAD, DA followed by TANGHAL,
TA. When the troops are already at present arms, Troop Adjutant executes hand salute. The
Brigade Commander and his staff also execute hand salute.

n) As soon as the Brigade Commander and his staff have executed the hand salute,
the band plays To the Colors. (Gun fires one salvo for the retreat.). Flag details lower the
flag at the first note of the music.

o) At the last note of to the colors, the Adjutant executes under arms, faces about
and salutes of the Adjutant at the same time cautioning him to “SUMALUNAN KA.”

p) When the Adjutant has occupied his position in the staff, the Brigade Commander
commands BABA TA. This is followed by the following commands:

q) HUMANDA SA PAGSASANAY SA PAGHAWAK NG SANDATA, SA

KANANG BALIKAT, TA; SA KALIWANG BALIKAT, TA; AGAP, TA; BABA, TA;
SIYASAT, TA; BABA, TA. After the manual of arms, the Brigade Commander cautions the
Adjutant “TANGGAPIN ANG ULAT.”

r) After these commands, the Adjutant proceeds to his position in front of the
Brigade Commander staff and asks for the report by saying”MAG ULAT.”

s) Battalion commanders report to the adjutant one after the other with ”
NARITO PO LAHAT o NAPAG-ALAMAN” The adjutant acknowledges the report of the
battalion commanders. He executes about face and salutes the Brigade Commander with a
report “NARITO PO LAHAT o NAPAG_ALAMAN.”

t) The Brigade Commander acknowledges the salute of the Adjutant and instructs
“IPAHAYAG ANG KAUTUSAN”.

u) The adjutant faces about and orders” MAKINIG SA KAUTUSAN. ANG MGA
NAKATALAGA NGAYON-OPISYAL NA NAMUMUNO, KAPITAN (name of officer).
 Ceremonies 92
OPISYAL PANLANLARANGAN, MEDYOR (name of officer). “SA UTOS NI (name of
commander). “MGA PINUNO PUMAPAGITNA, KAD.”

v. All officers from the battalion commanders to platoon leader including company
guidons at the last note of PUMAGITNA execute center face including company of
execution KAD is given, the officers concerned march off to the center where they halt
individually upon reaching their respective markers. The 1st battalion Commander the
commands MGA PINUNO PUMAGITNA, KAD. At the last note of PUMAGITNA, the
officers face the grandstand and shove off at command of execution KAD. When the officers
face t are approximately 12 paces in front of the TC, the 1st BN commander commands
“MGA PINUNO, TO”. At the command execution TO, they all salute including colors.
Then responded by the TC, then Commands MGA PINUNO PABALIK, KAD. At the
command PABALIK, they execute about face and move at the command of execution KAD.
Upon reaching to the line of their original position, the 1st Bn commander commands “MGA
PINUNO, TO”, then the officers shove off to their respective positions. At the last note of
the band, they automatically face front.

w.) The Brigade Commander then commands PASA-MASID. The battalion

commanders, at the last note of PASA-MASID, execute about face. The band leader
commands HARAP SA KANAN, KAD, PASULONG, NA and BANDA, TO.

When the band has halted, the 1st battalion commander commands, HARAP SA
KANAN, RAP, SA KANANG P BALIKAT, TA; PASULONG, KAD. The colors execute
right turn at the command of execution KAD.

The 2nd battalion commander counts 24 beats before he commands PASULONG

KAD.

The company commanders and platoon leaders give appropriate commands to bring
units company in column with platoons in line as they pass the grandstand.
 Ceremonies 93

SECTION III

POLICE HONORS

3.1 GENERAL

a. In the Continental Army, honor guards were used as a protective measure and
as a means of showing the improvement in discipline in the newly formed army. They were
probably selected specifically for their size and strength and maybe their proven prowess in
combat. Today, the honor guard formation is a special courtesy to visiting dignitaries.

b. Members of the guard are selected for their soldiery appearance and superior
discipline. An honor consists of a band, Colors, salute battery (when available and
appropriate) and a formation of troops. Honor guards render personal honor to person of high
military/ police or civilian rank position upon arrival or departure from a military/police
command. Honor guards are not a substitute for those ceremonies appropriate in review or
parade.

c. An Honor Guard should not be so large as to compromise the exceptional

standards required of honor guards. The minimum size of the company honor guard should
be two (2) platoons and the battalion honor guard should be two companies. Uniform will be
those prescribed by the commander of the receiving unit.

d. There shall be a designated host who take part in the ceremony. He briefs the
honoree of the sequence of events and advises him of action that will take place during the
conduct of honors.

e. Prior to the arrival of the person(s) to be honored, the honor guard commander
position the band, the troops, and salute battery from right to left in that order. The troops are
formed in line of companies or platoons with the colors centered. When condition dictates,
the salute battery may be located separately but its control and purpose must not be impaired.

3.2 DEFINITION OF TERMS

a. Cordon Honor- type of honor rendered to a guest in lieu or in additional to

full honors. This may be in the form of foyer, ramp, concourse and sidebuoys honor.
b. Dais- an elevated platform where the honoree and police host stand to give
distinction and prominence.

c. Honoree - A high ranking local/foreign officer or civilian to whom honors are

accorded.

d. Honor Guard- consist of a band, colors salute battery (when available and
appropriate) and a formation of troops tasked to render personal honors to person entitled
upon arrival/departure from a police camp saluting base/station
 Ceremonies 94

e. Honors- ceremonies rendered to local/foreign military/police officers and

civilian dignitaries as a gesture of courtesy and a tribute to his rank and/ or position.

f. Inspection- The close examination or observance of honor guard by the

honoree.

g. Police Host- an officer designated ti escort and receive the honoree and
advises him of action that will take place during the conduct of honor.

h. Ruffle and Flourish- a ruffling drumbeat and fanfare played in honor of high
official at a ceremonial reception.

i. Saluting Station- camps, post, station, national shrines and other places
where firing of gun ceremonial reception.

3.2 POLICIES
a. Personal Honors
1) Department and Bureau Heads
a) DILG Secretary,
Undersecretary, Assistant Secretary
b) NAPOLCOM Commissioners
c) Heads of bureaus under DILG

2) PNP Officers
a) All Commissioners officers from C/Supt to Director General.
b) All retired star rank officers who are still alive.
c) Other officers entitled personnel honors
3) Civilian dignitaries making official visits shall be accorded appropriate
honor during arrival at departure from police installation/station

4) When two or more person entitled to honors arrive at or depart from police
installation/station at the same time, only the senior will receive the honors. If they arrive
successively each in turn shall be honored. However, in cases when the most senior guest has
been accorded honors, no honors shall be accorded to newly arrived junior guest.

5) Should a person entitled to honors arrive at a police installation/station at

the time when the honor have already begun. The ceremony shall continue but the senior
shall receive departure honors.

6) If the honoree has personal flag with him, the flag bearer shall be
positioned three steps behind the honoree and shall follow the honoree during the inspection
of troops and return his original position thereafter.

7) If the honoree is the President, Chief Magistrate of Sovereign or Foreign

Country. Or Members of Reigning Royal Family, the dais of the honoree must be positioned
at least six inches right forward of the host dais.

8) No honors shall be rendered by troops in trenches.

 Ceremonies 95
9) Honors shall not be rendered by troops directly engaged in war
campaigns, during exercises and disaster relief operation.

10) During personal honors at the same place and in compliments to the
same person, whether civil or military, guns shall never be fired more often that once in a
calendar year, except for a President or when international protocol requires.

11) In all cases, the national flag must be at full staff when honors are being
accosted.

b. Unit Honors

1) Local deployment

a) A ceremony shall be conducted to welcome/send off units

arriving/departing for deployment outside unit AOR for a period of not less six months.

b) The commander or his representative (at least two-levels up)

shall be responsible in welcoming/sending off units under his jurisdiction.

2) Foreign Deployment

a) A ceremony shall be conducted in honor of units arriving

departing from/for overseas deployment

b) A welcome/send off arrival honors will be conducted to

departing units

c) Spouse/parents of deployed personnel shall be invited to send off

or present leis to the officers and men of the departing/arriving unit.

c) Gun Salute

1) Gun salute shall be fired under the direction of a police commission officer

2) The National flag shall always be at full staff at the time the salute is
rendered

3) Gun salute shall only be fired during the conduct of arrival/departure

honors at the following saluting/bases

a) Police Camps/Bases

1) Camp Crame- NHQ, PNP

2) Fort Andres Bonifacio

Philippine Public Safety College

3) Camp Gen Papa- Bicutan, Taguig, M.M

4) Camp Brig Gen Oscar M Florendo

 Ceremonies 96
San Fernando, La Union-Recom 1

5) Camp Adurru, Tuguegarao, Cagayan- Recom 2

6) Camp Olivas, San Fernando, Pampanga, Recom 3

7) Camp Vicete Lim, Calamba, Lugana-Recom 4

8) Camp Gen Simon A Ola, legaspi City-Recom 5

9) Camp Martin Delgado, Iloilo City-Recom 6

10) Camp Sergio Osmenia, Osmenia Blvd, Cebu City

11) Camp Secretary Ruperto Kangleon, PC Hills, Palo

Leyte- Recom 8

12) Justice R T Lim, Zamboanga Blvd, Zamboanga City

Recom 9

13) Camp Alagar, Cagayan de Oro City, Recom 10

14) Camp Catitipan, Davao City- Recom 11

15) Camp Dumlao, Isulan, Sultan Kudarat, Recom 12

16) Camp Brig Gen Salipada Pendatum, Makling, Parang,

Maguindanao- ARMM

17) Camp Bado Dangwa, Trinidad, Benguet CRECOM

18) Camp Casteneda, Silang, Cavite-PNPA

19) All NCR District, Provincial and City Commands

20) National Shrines

- Rizal Park
- Libingan ng mga Bayani
- Aguinaldo shrine
- Corregidor National
- Dambana ng Kagitingan
- Capas National Shrine
- Pinaglabanan Shrine
- Barasoin Shrine

21) Other Places

- Malacanyang Palace
- Philippine International Airport as directed by
C,PNP
 Ceremonies 97

4) The National salute is 21 gun fired successively. This salute is

rendered in honor of: the National flag; the president; and Members of a reining Royal
Family. During National Heroes Day, the National flag shall be displayed at half from
reveille to midday at all post, camps, bases and stations. Prior to the rendering of honors the
band shall play field music.

d) How Honors are rendered

1) The President

a) The President shall be received at the salute base or

at the building where he is being entertained.

b) A 21-gun salute shall be fire during the arrival/ departure

honors

2) To certain dignitaries- The president of a foreign republic,

foreign sovereign or a member of a reigning royal family shall be rendered the honors pre
scribed in paragraph (a) above except that the national anthem of his country shall be played
first to be followed by the Philippine National Anthem.

3. To Ex-President and Vice-President _ the Ex President and

Vice President of the Philippines shall be rendered the honors prescribed for the President,
except that the Flourishes shall be followed by a march in lieu of the National Anthem and
the Vice-President shall be receive a salute of 19 guns. If no band is present the bugler shall
sound to the colors after the ruffles and flourishes.

e) Civilian and military dignitaries hereunder shall be rendered salutes

and honors with music which is considered an inseparable part of the salute and which
immediately follow the ruffle and flourishes without pause:

1) Civilian Dignitaries

RANK GUN SALUTE RFLRS &FLRS MUSIC SIZE

ARRIVAL/DEPARTURE

President 21 21 4 Natl Anthem Bn

Pres-elect 21 21 4 Natl; Anthem Bn

Ex-Pres 19 19 4 March Bn

Chf Magistrate
Of a sovereign or
a foreign country
head of state 21 21 4 Natl Anthem Bn

Members of
 Ceremonies 98
Reigning royal
Family 21 21 4 Natl Anthem Bn

Head of Govt 19 19 4 March Bn

Vice Pres 19 19 4 March Bn

Senate
Pres 19 19 4 March Bn

Speaker of
The House 19 19 4 March Bn

The Chief
Justice 19 19 4 March Bn

Secretary of
Interior and
Loc Govt 19 19 4 March Bn

Dept of Secs 19 19 4 March Bn

Foreign
Ambassadors 19 19 4 Natl Anthem Bn

Undersecretaries
Of Interior and
Loc Govt 19 19 4 March Coy

ForeignEnvoys&
Ministries accredited
To the Phil 15 - 3 March Coy

Foreign Ministers
Res accredited to
The Phil 13 - 2 March Coy

Consul Generals 11 - - March Coy

Vice Consuls or
Consular agents
Accredited to
The Phils - - 5 March Coy
 Ceremonies 99
2) Police Officer

C, PNP 19 19 4 Gen March Bn

Dir Gen 17 17 4 Gen March Bn

Dep Dir Gen 15 15 4 Gen March Coy

Director 15 15 3 Gen March Coy

Reg Dir 13 - 2 Gen March Coy

Chief Supt 11 - 1 Gen March Coy

NOTE:
Provincial governor/major hosting police camps may be given arrival/departure
honors on his visit on his visit (during his incumbency to the camp/base by the unit)

3.4. PROCEDURES

a. Arrival and departures Honors (Individual)

1) Full Police Honors

Initially, honor guard shall be at parade rest. The Honor Guard Commander
(HGC) brings the unit to attention as soon as the honoree arrives. The honoree is met by the
police host, who escorts him in front of the honor guard battalion and leads him to the area
(dais).

When the honoree has taken his position (dais), the HGC faces about and commands
TANGHAL TA, then faces about and presents sword together with his staff, while the
honoree and police host execute hand salute.

Appropriate number of ruffles and flourishes shall be played by the band followed
by appropriate music, General March or National Anthem as the case maybe. Gun
Salute, if any shall commence until the last note of the music.

After the last note of the music, the HGC carries sword with the staff then faces about
and commands BABA TA. He faces about and salutes the honoree saying”Handa napo ang
tanod pndangal upang libutin”.

The honoree acknowledges the salute and steps down with the host and the HGC
carries his sword and escorts him and the host taking position at the right side of the honoree
for the inspection of the honor guards. Upon approaching the band, the host switches his
position to the right of the HGC. As they approach the colors six paces before it the HGC
commands TANGHAL TA. The HGC shall present the sword while honoree and host shall
execute hand salute for the national colors. Three steps after the colors, The HGC commands
 Ceremonies 100
BABA TA. The HGC executes carry sword while the honoree and host drop their hand
salute. They continues marching with the honoree and host up to the point where he peels off
from the two personages and proceeds to his position in front of his staff. The host switches
his position to the left of the honoree and they march directly to their original position at the
dais.

At this point the HGC executes about face and salutes the honoree saying “Tapos na
po ang parangal”, the honoree acknowledges the salute and says “MANGYARING
LUMAPIT KA”. The HGC executes carry and return sword, then steps forward he halts
two steps in front of the honoree and salutes. The honoree acknowledges the salute and both
drop their hands the honoree then extends his hand to shake hands with HGC who takes one
step forward to acknowledge the gesture. After handshake, the HGC salutes the honoree,
faces about and returns to his position. Again, he executes about face and draws sword.

The honoree and host face other and the latter salutes the former. They then shake
hands.

2) Cordon Honors

In addition to a scheduled honor guard ceremony, the honor cordon ceremonies

may be used when welcoming or bidding farewell to distinguished visitors. The ceremony
consists of a select group of policemen with the characteristics associated with honor guards,
designated to honor and provide security at the immediate arrival and departure site.

The honor cordon normally consists of two squads a cordon commander and a host
the size of the squad is equal to the number of gun salute the honoree is entitled to. When
deemed appropriate the commander may elect to use a band colors and distinguishing flags.

a) Arrival

Upon arrival of the craft or vehicle, the cordon is marched to a position

near the exit (ramp) in two columns, centered to the exit, faced to the center and dressed with
about three steps distance between the ranks. As the honored guest and greeting party depart
the immediate vicinity of the exit, and approach within three steps of the host the cordon
commander commands TANGHAL TA and the entire cordon salutes simultaneously. After
the honored guest and all greeting party members have cleared the formation the cordon
commander commands BABA TA and the cordon member come to order arms
simultaneously.

b) Departure

The formation for the honor cordon upon departure is basically the
same as that described upon arrival. At the approach (about three steps) of the honored guest
and host, the cordon commander commands TANGHAL TA and the cordon simultaneously
executes present arms. When the honored guest has entered the conveyance the cordon
commander commands BABA TA and remains in place until the conveyance has departed.
If it is an aircraft, the honor cordon exits as soon as the honoree has boarded the aircraft.

When a band and color are part of the arrival or departure they are
positioned as shown in Fig 1 and the band plays appropriate music during the ceremony. He
organizational color is dipped in salute when the honored guests approaches to within six
 Ceremonies 101
steps after he passes it is returned to the carry position. As soon as the guest has entered the
conveyance during departure ceremony, the colors and distinguishing flags depart the area
with the honor cordon.

b) Presentation and Honors

Initially the unit is formed in mass in front of the grandstand, when the guest
of Honor/speaker (GOH) or his designated representative arrives at the grandstand; the unit
commander (UC) brings his troops to attention. When the GOH has taken his seat, the UC
brings his troops to present arms and present his troops to the GOH. The GOH
acknowledges the presentation. At this point, the band plays appropriate march music,
(everybody in the grandstand should likewise stand). After the last note of the march music,
the UC brings back his troops to attention, the chaplain proceeds to the lectern to lead the
invocation, after which he returns to his former position (everybody takes his seat after
invocation)

1) Awarding

The emcee formally announces the start of the awarding. The UC and
unit colors move forward a t a predetermined point and halt while the GOH goes down the
grandstand assisted by the host to present the award. The adjutant reads the citation of the
award before it is presented to the UC. The GOH and the host return to the grandstand after
presentation of award. The UC and unit color proceed back to their former positions.

2) Speeches

The GOH introduced by the host before he proceeds to the lectern to

deliver a welcome address. If previously ordered to bring his troop to parade rest the UC
brings his unit to attention after the address of the GOH.

3) Recessional

The UC with his troops sing PILIPINAS KONG MAHAL.

Appropriate music is played by the band thereafter for the recessional.

At this juncture, the spouses /parents proceed towards the troops to

present leis to the officers and enlisted men of the unit. Parents/spouses join their respective
relatives for the dismissal.

Note: Procedures for the send off ceremony of unit departing for overseas
deployment/duty shall be the same as the welcome ceremony except that the awarding and
presentation of leis is omitted in the program. Likewise, the National Anthem is played by
the band instead of march music during the presentation of troops.
 Ceremonies 102
SECTION IV

COLORS
4.1 DEFINITIONS

a. Colors – The term colors means the National and positional or organizational
colors.

b. Color – When used singularly the term color refers to the National Color
(National Flag).

4.2. THE COLORS AND COLOR

a. Only the national color is entitled to a salute by individuals or units.

b. In garrison, the colors are normally at the office or headquarters of the

commanding officer. They are escorted to and from the headquarters or office by the color
guard. In the field the colors are normally displayed from reveille to retreat in front of the
commanding officer’s tent or command post. During inclement weather, they are cased and
placed in the commanding officer’s office headquarters or tent.

c. Individuals or units render honors when passing or being passed by uncased

colors. When not part of a formation individuals salute at six steps distance from the Colors
and hold the salute until they have passed six steps beyond the colors. The individual in
charge of a formation calls the formation to HUMANDA and TANGHAL TA.

d. The colors maybe carried in any formation in which to or more companies

honor guards or representative elements of a command that participates.

e. Traditionally, the command Executive Senior Police Officer is responsible for

the safeguarding care and display of the organizational color. He is also responsible for the
selection training and performance of the color bearers and color guards.

f. The regulation for individual flags and distinguishing flags for general officers
and other dignitaries is the same as that for organizational colors.

g. During a review, parade or honor guard ceremony only one National color
should be present the national color is given the honor position and is carried on the
marching right of positional and organizational colors. The organizational color of the senior
headquarters sponsoring the ceremony is carried to the left of the major services flag. The
colors belonging to the headquarters conducting the ceremonies are positioned in line with
and centered on the command subordinate color bearing organizations ordinarily carry only
their organizational colors (four steps to the rear of their staff).

h. When the formation of the colors is en masse the National color is placed in
front and at the center of the two color guards. The organizational colors are placed
immediately behind the national color and arranged according to the seniority of the units
participating in the ceremony.
 Ceremonies 103

4.3. SALUTES

a. The national color renders no salute (dip).

b. The organizational color salutes (dips) in all police ceremonies while the
National Anthem, To the Color or a foreign national anthem is being played and when
rendering honors to the organizational commander an individual of higher grade including
foreign dignitaries of higher grade, and in no other case.

c. When marching organizational colors salute six steps before the person
entitled to a salute. They are returned to the carry position six steps after the person.

4.4. COLOR GUARD

a. The color guard consists of two SPO1 and two PO1. To be selected a
member of the Color Guard is an Honor. The senior (color) sergeant carries the National
Color and commands the color guard. He gives the necessary commands for the movement
and for the rendering honors.

b. When battalions or brigades carry their organizational colors in a ceremony

part of a larger command, the battalion or brigade color is carried four steps to the rear of the
staff. A sergeant act as color bearer and two experienced PO1, selected by the battalion or
brigade command senior executive police officer act as members of the color guard.

c. The color guard is formed and marched in one rank at close interval, the
bearer in the center. They do not execute rear march or about face. The color guard marches
at right shoulder arms and executes facing movements is IKOT SA KANAN NA
(KALIWA), NA. To execute a wheeling movement, the guard nearest the direction of turn
serves as the pivot point of executes the movement by marching in a place and
simultaneously turning in a new direction. Other members shorten their steps and turn in an
arc keeping abreast of each other to maintain alignment in place until the command TILAP,
TO or PASULONG, KAD is given.

d. When passing in review the color guard executes eyes right at the prescribed
saluting distance on the command of the color sergeant. The commands are TINGIN SA
KANAN, NA and HANDA, RAP. The organizational color salutes at on the right flank of
the color guard does not execute eyes right.

e. During the ceremonies the color guards remain at the right shoulder arms
except when presenting arms

f. When not participating in a ceremony and a situation occurs that warrants a

salute by organizational color the color sergeant commands PUGAY WATAWAT. The
return to carry is made at the command HANDA DALA WATAWAT.

g. When in formation with the color company and not during a ceremony, the
color bearers executes at ease and rest, keeping the staffs of the colors vertical. The color
guard executes right shoulder, order arms and present arms with the color company. During
 Ceremonies 104
ceremonies when the colors are not forward and remarks are to be made the color guards and
the color bearers are at parade rest.

h. The uniform for color guards should be the same as that prescribed for
participating troops.

4.5. RECIEVING OR DISMISSING THE COLORS BY THE COLOR GUARD.

a. When receiving uncased Colors on display in the commander’s office, the

color sergeant commands TANGHAL TA and HANDA RAP. On completion of order of
arms, the color bearers (without command) secure the colors. The color guard files outside
(guard, National color, guard and reforms in a line formation. The Color guards execute
right shoulder arms and the color bearers assumes the carry position

b. To dismiss the colors, the procedures are basically the same except that the
colors are placed back in their hands before executing present arms.
 Ceremonies 105

SECTION V

GUARD MOUNTING

Informal

5.1. SEQUENCE OF ACTIVITIES

a. The Sergeant of the guard forms the guard by commanding HUMANAY.

The relief commander falls in so that the guard is three steps in front and centered on the
sergeant of the guard. Each relief forms at normal interval to the left of its respective
commander, sentinels form in the order of their assigned post (one, two, three, etc), the
sergeant of the guard orders inspection of arms by the commands SIYASAT TA, AGAP
TA, BABA TA (Figure 2).

b. If an officer has been detailed as commander of the guard, the sergeant of the
guard faces about the reports NARITO NA PONG LAHAT. Salutes are exchanged. After
completing the report, the sergeant of the guard faces about, faces half right in marching and
marches by the most direct route to a position directly behind the commander of the third
relief at normal distance. (Figure 2).

c. If an officer has not been detailed as commander of the guard, the sergeant of
the guard takes three steps forward and assumes the position of the commander of the guard.
(Figure 2).

d. When the officer of the day arrives, the commander of the guard reports
NARITO NA PONG LAHAT. They exchange salutes

e. Marching to Center.

The officer of the day commands PINUNO AT MGA KAWAL

PUMAGITNA, KAD. On the command of PUMAGITNA the Police Non-Commissioned
Officer farthest to the rear commands the other PNCOs SA KANANG BALIKAT, TA. On
the command KAD the commander of the guard marches forward and halts three steps in
front of the officer of the day. The PNCOs march forward and execute column left without
command when on a line three steps to the rear of the commander of the guard. The PNCO
in the rear commands the other PNCOs to halt and face to the right (at right shoulder arms)
when they are centered on the commander of the guard. (Figure 3)

f. After the commander of the guard and the PNCOs halt and are in position, the
officer of the day marches forward, halts at normal distance in front of the commander of the
guard and designates PINUNO NG TANOD. He then faces half right in marching and
marches around and to the rear of the commander of the guard. He halts at normal distance
in front of the right flank PNCO and designates SARHENTO NG TANOD. He then faces
half right in marching and marches around and to the rear of the commander of the guard.
He faces to the right in marching takes two steps, halts, executes a left and designates.
PINUNO PANGALAWANG PAMALIT and PINUNO UNANG PAMALIT. He then
 Ceremonies 106
faces about marches by the most direct route to his post halts and faces about again (Figure
4). If an officer is not present as commander of the guard the officer of the day designates
the right flank PNCO. PINUNO NG TANOD.

g. Return to Post

The officer of the day commands SUMALUNAN. At this command, the

commander of the guard and PNCO face about, march to their designated post, and halt
without command. The sergeant of the guard commands the relief commander to
BABA TA and HARAP SA LIKOD, NA. If an officer has not been detailed as commander
of the guard, the first relief commander gives these commands (Figure 5).

h. Inspecting the Guard

1) The officer of the day commands HUMANDA SA PAGSISIYASAT.

At the command, the commander of the guard, without saluting, faces about and commands
PABUKANG TALUDTOD, NA. Ranks are opened and dressed. When the commander of
the guard has taken his post, the officer of the day inspects the guard.

2) The officer of the day orders sentinels who are not presentable for
guard to fall out and return to quarters, supernumeraries, if any, replace the men who have
fallen out.

3) After inspecting the guard, the officer of the day resumes his original
position and commands DALHIN ANG MGA TANOD SA BAHAY TANURAN.
Salutes are exchanged. The commander of the guard faces to the left and commands LAPIT
TALUDTOD, NA. He then moves to his position six steps in front of and centered on the
guard, faces the guard and commands HARAP SA KANAN, NA; KANANG BALIKAT,
TA. He positions himself at the head of the left file at normal distance and marches the
guard to the guard house.

i. Relieving the Old Guard

Before the new guard arrives, at the guard house, the old guard is formed in a
line formation with two or more relief. The commander of the old guard positions himself
six steps in front of and centered on the guard, when the new guard is six steps from the left
flank of the old guard, the commander of the new guard commands KANAN, TINGIN, NA.
He faces back to the front and renders the proper salutes. When the new guard has cleared
the right flank of the old guard, the commander of the new guard commands HANDA, RAP.
The commander of the old guard faces about, commands BABA, TA and faces back to the
front.

j. Formation of the Old Guard and New Guard at the Guardhouse

After the new guard executes HANDA, RAP, commander of the guard
commands HARAP SA KANAN, RAP then PASULONG, KAD. At the command KAD
he positions himself six steps to the rear of [ ] and centered on his guard. He halts the new
guard when it is on line with and six steps to the right of the old guard. Then he commands
BABA, TA; HARAP SA LIKOD, NA. The left flank man, first relief, verifies six steps
interval; dress left dress. He aligns his guard (Figure 6).
 Ceremonies 107
k. Presenting New and Old Guard

When the new guard is in position, the commanders of both guards face about
and command TANGHAL, TA. Then they face each other and exchange salutes, face
toward their respective guards, command BABA, TA and face back to the front.

l. Presenting the Guards to the Officer of the Day

1) After the new guard has been presented to the old guard, the new
guard and old officers of the day take their positions 18 steps in front of and centered on their
respective guards. Commanders of both guards face about, command “ITANGHAL, TA, “
face back to the front, and salute their respective officer of the day.

2) After salutes have been exchanged, both commanders face about,

command”BABA, TA,” and face back to the front. When both have face back to the front,
and salute their respective officer of the day.

m. Disposition of the new and old guards

1) After both officers of the day have faced their guards, the new officer
of the day commands”POST THE FIRST RELIEF’. The new commander salutes the new
officer of the day, faces about, and commands “TIWALAG.” The guard reports to the
guardhouse and commander of the first relief reports to the commander of the guard for
instructions on posting his relief.

2) The old officer of the day commands” LUMANSAG”. The old

commander salutes the old officer of the day, faces about and command”TIKAS
PAHINGA.” He then contacts the new commander and conveys any instructions and
orders.

a) If the old guard was furnished from one company, the

commander of the old guard marches the guard to the company area and dismisses it by
commanding “AGAP, TA;LUMANSAG.”

b) If the guard was furnished from more than one company the
old commander instructs the senior member of each company to march the guard detail to the
company area and dismiss it, in accordance with (1) above.

c) After the third relief of the old guard has been relieved, the
commander of the relief reports to the commander of the new guard. The commander of the
new guard inspects the relief and orders the relief commander to march the relief to the
company area and dismiss it. Salutes are exchanged. The relief is dismissed in accordance
with (1) above.

5.2. POSTING RELIEFS

a. General

1) Before a relief goes on post, the commander of the relief assembles the
sentinels and checks their appearances, fitness for duty and the condition of their arms, if
 Ceremonies 108
carried. He issues ammunition, supervises loading the if required and makes sure that the
sentinels understand their instructions. When the relief is large it may be more convenient to
form the relief call the roll and inspect the sentinel in ranks.

2) The relief commander writes down the names of the sentinels, the
number of their posts, the time he directed them to their posts, and the time they report back
to the guard house after being relieved. The commander of the guard keeps this record on
file.

b. Posting Sentinels

1) The commander of the new relief forms it by commanding

“HUMANAY”. At that command the relief forms in two ranks, three steps in front of and
centered on the relief commander. Sentinels assigned to even numbered posts (2, 4,6,8) form
in the front rank. Sentinels assigned to odd numbered posts (1, 3, 5, 7) form in the rear rank.
The commander of the old relief falls in to the rear of the sentinel for post No 1 (Fig. 7).

a) The commander of the new relief commands, “SIYASAT,

TA” (if arms are to be loaded, he gives the necessary commands at this time and makes
certain that safety procedures are carefully observed);”AGAP, TA” “BABA, TA.

b) He commands “TULUYANG BILANG, NA.” The sentinels

call off the number of their assigned posts, rear to front and from right to left.

c) He reports to the commander of the guard, “Sir, the

_________relief is present and ready to be posted,” or “Sir, ______absent.” Salutes are
exchanged. (If the commander of the guard is a non commissioned officer, the commander
of the new relief reports, “Sergeant, the________ relief is present and ready to be posted, “or
“Sergeant, _____absent.”

d) After the commander of the guard commands POST YOUR

RELIEF,” salutes are exchanged. The commander of the new relief takes charge of his
relief and commands” HARAP SA KANAN, RAP; SA KANANG BALIKAT, TA” (If
appropriate), and PASULONG KAD.” He marches to the left of the rear rank at normal
interval while the commander of the old relief marches on the right of the leading rank.

2) During daylight hours, the commander of the new relief halts his relief
six steps from the old sentinel and commands “NUMBER ONE” (TWO, THREE, ETC).
The new sentinel called marches forward and halts three steps in front of the old sentinel. If
armed with the rifle carbine, he executes port arms. Both relief commanders advance and
halt so that they are centered between the two sentinels. Then they execute a left (right) face
each other (Fig. 8a).

a) The commander of the new relief commands “TRANSMIT

YOUR ORDERS,” and the old sentinel transmits any changes in orders occurring during his
tour or states, “Post and orders remain the same.” The relief commander then questions the
new sentinels, “Do you understand your orders? If the new sentinel understands his orders
he replies, ‘Yes, I do. “If not the new relief commander clarifies the orders.

b) The commander of the new relief commands “SENTINEL,

POST.” On that command, both sentinels resume right shoulder or sling arms if appropriate,
 Ceremonies 109
face the new commander, and march backward until they are online with the commander of
the old relief.

3) The commander of the new relief commands his relief “FORWARD

MARCH.” The commander of the old relief takes one step backward to clear the old
sentinel (Fig. 8b). The relief advances and the relief commanders take their original
positions as it passes them.

a) The old sentinel takes his place at the rear of the relief as it
passes him.

b) The new sentinel stands fast until the relief has passed six steps
beyond him and then he walks his post.

4) The commander of the old relief takes command when his last sentinel
has been relieved.

a) The commander of the new relief commands “RELIEF

COMMANDER POST” and both commanders exchange positions by passing each other
right shoulder to right shoulder, halt, and face about, both sentinels stand fast (Fig. 8 c).

b) After the relief commanders face about , the commander of old

relief commands” SENTINELS, POST.” On that command, both sentinels resume right
shoulder or sling arms if appropriate, face the commander of the old relief, and march
backward until they are online with the commander of the new relief.

1) The commander of the old relief commands his relief

“PASULONG, KAD.”

2) The commander of the new relief takes one step

backward to clear the old sentinel. The relief takes one step backward to clear the old
sentinel. The relief advances, the relief commanders take their new position, and the old
sentinel takes his place at the rear of the relief as it passes him.

5) When the old relief returns to the guard house, the commander of the
old relief commands “HINTO” and the commander of the new relief and the commander of
the new relief falls out.

a) The commander of the old relief commands “SIYASAT,

TA”,. (if weapons are loaded, they are unloaded at the time and safety procedures are
carefully observed);”AGAP, TA; LUMANSAG.” He reports to the commander of the
guard that his relief has been relieved and is present in the guard house.
b) If the old relief was the third relief of the old guard, the relief
commander dismisses his relief in accordance with paragraph_________.

6) During the hours of challenging, the commander of the new relief halts
the relief when the sentinel challenges “HINTO”! “Who is there?” The commander answers,
“Relief.” The sentinel commands “MANGYARI LUMAPIT PO UPANG MAKILALA”
and the relief commander advances until the sentinel commands “HINTO.” The
commander marches the relief forward and halts it six steps from the old sentinel. The
procedure for relieving the old sentinel is the same as in b above, except that when a new
 Ceremonies 110
sentinel is armed with a pistol he comes to “raise pistol “ after halting and when posted
returns his pistol.

7) If transportation is utilized to post the relief, the sentinels are posted

and relieved using the procedure described in f—above. The old and new relief commanders
and the sentinel to be posted are the only members of the relief who dismount.

c. Posting Other Relief

1) To post a relief when there is no sentinel on the post, the

commander forms his relief as prescribed in paragraph b 1(a), (b), and (c).

a) He halts the relief six steps from the limits of the post concerned
and commands “NUMBER ONE” (TWO, THREE, ETC). The sentinel called takes three
steps forward; halts execute port arms if armed with the rifle or carbine, and faces to the left.
The commander advances three steps in front of the relief, halts, and faces to the right, facing
the sentinel. The sentinel if armed with a pistol executes “raise pistol” after facing to the left.

b) The relief commander asks, “Do you understand your orders?” If

he understands the orders, the new sentinel replies, “Yes, I do.” If not, the commander
explains any points necessary.

c) The relief commander commands “POST”. The sentinel execute

right shoulder or sling arms or return pistol as appropriate, takes four steps backward to clear
the relief and walks his post when the relief is six steps beyond him.

d) The commander resumes his original position as the relief passes

him.

2) If post are numerous or widespread, the officer of the day can

authorize the relief to be divided into small groups, placing each group under a non
commissioned officer for posting; have sentinels posted individually; or use a combination of
these two methods.

a) If sentinels are posted individually, the relief commander orders,

“Sentinel, take your post.”

b) If sentinels are posted as a group, the relief commander orders

“Take your posts.” Each sentinel then proceeds directly to his post. Sentinels relieve each
other at a specified point and transmit changes in orders.

c) A sentinel relieved individually proceeds directly to the

guardhouse and reports to the commander of the old relief. The last sentinel guarding a post
from which he will not be relieved by another sentinel proceeds directly to the guard house at
a designated time.

5.3. FORMAL GUARD MOUNTING

a. General

1) Uniforms, arms and equipment for formal guard mounts are

 Ceremonies 111
prescribed by the commanding officer.

2) Formal guard mounting requires a band and is held on the

parade ground of the organization from which the guard is detailed.

b. Assembly of Band

The band takes its place on the parade ground at a point where its left flank is
12 steps to the right of where the right flank of the guard will be (fig. 9). The adjutant makes
sure that the guard is ready to march onto the parade ground and then signals the band to
sound Adjutant’s Call.

c. Assembly and Forming the Guard

1) The Guard Details are formed as prescribed in paragraph 5.1.b of

informal guard mounting. When assembly sounds, each guard detail is marched to the point
of assembly of the parade ground and is reported to the Sergeant of the Guard.

2) The guard Details are assembled and formed into a platoon. If there
are more than 14 men per rank the guard is divided into two platoons.

3) The assistant sergeant of the guard takes his post three steps in front
and centered on the second. The remaining PNCOs if any form on the left flank to equalize
the number of men in each rank. After the platoons are formed, the sergeant of the guard to
the right.

d. Marching the Guard to the Parade Ground

1) Upon the Adjutant’s call, the band plays march music. The Adjutant,
with the CPNCO on his left, marches forward on the first note of the music.

2) The Sergeant of the Guard takes his post three steps to the left of the
left file and centered on the guard. He commands KANANG BALIKAT, TA at the first
note of the adjutant’s Call and marches the guard in column onto the parade ground. He
approaches the parade ground from a direction near to the final line which the guard will
form. He halts the guard when the head of the column is 12 steps from the left flank of the
band and centered on the CPNCO. At this time, the band stops playing. The Sergeant of the
Guard faces to the right and, if appropriate commands BABA, TA: HARAP SA KALIWA,
NA.

e. Dressing the Guard

The Sergeant of the Guard and the assistant sergeant of the guard, if there are
two platoons, dress the guard.

f. Sergeant of the Guard

1) When the Sergeant of the guard commands HANDA, HARAP, the

commander of the Guards takes position six steps in the rear of the right flank man of the rear
flank, (if there are two platoons, the assistant commander of the guard takes his post behind
the second platoon in the same position as prescribed for the commander of the guard) The
 Ceremonies 112
Sergeant of the guard faces about and reports to the CPNCO, “NARITO PO LAHAT “or
“_____ANG WALA”. Salutes are exchanged and the CPNCO commands SUMALUNAN,
The sergeant of the guard faces about, faces half right in marching, and marches to his post.
He halts at normal distance directly behind the commander of the third relief.

2) If an assistant sergeant of the guard is present, he executes the

movements cited above at the command SUMALUNAN, and post himself directly behind
the commander of the third relief. The Sergeant of the Guard positions himself behind the
assistant sergeant of the guard at a normal distance (figure10).

g. CPNCO’s Report

1) After commanding SUMALUNAN, the CPNCO faces about and

reports to the Adjutant. “NARITO PO LAHAT” or “_________ANG WALA.” They
exchange salutes. The CPNCO faces about, marches to his post and halts at normal interval
to the left flank men of the first rank of the second platoon.

2} When the CPNCO has finished his report and has faced about the
commander of the guard marches from his position in the rear of the guard around its right
flank to his post six steps in front of and centered on the guard. If there are two platoons the
assistant commander of the guard, if present, takes his post in front of the second platoon
(Figure 10).

h. Marching to Center

1) The adjutant commands PINUNO (or MGA PINUNO) AT

PINUNONG HINDI HIRANG, NA. The procedures for marching to center is the same as
in paragraph 5.1e of Informal Guard Mounting except that when there are two commanders
of the guard, the senior is designated “Punong Tanod” and the junior “Pangalawang Punong
Tanod.”

2) If there are two Sergeants of the Guard, the senior is designated

“Tandes ng Tanod” and the junior “Pangalawang Tandes ng TANOD> “The post of the
assistant sergeant of the guard is the position of guide for the second platoon.

i. Return to Post

After returning to his post, the Adjutant commands SUMALUNAN. post are
taken as directed in paragraph 5.1g of Informal Guard Mounting (Figure11 (a) and (b).

j. Inspecting the Guard

1) During formal guard mounting, the adjutant instead of the Officer of

the Day inspects the guard.

2) After the Officer(s) and PNCOs have taken their posts, the
Adjutant commands HUMANDA SA PAGSISIYASAT.

3) During the inspection, he selects the orderlies and color sentinels and
orders men who are not prepared for guard to fall out and return to their organization
 Ceremonies 113
Substitutes for men who have fallen out report to the commander of the guard of the guard
house.

3) The band plays during the inspection.

k. Closing Ranks

1) After the inspection, the commander of the guard orders the guard to
close ranks and returns to his original post. If there is an assistant commander of the guard,
he orders the second platoon to close ranks after it has been inspected. Then he returns to his
post in front of the second platoon.
2) The adjutant takes his post 35 steps in front of, centered on, and facing
the guard.

3) The New Officer of the Day posts himself 36 steps to the rear of the
Adjutant.

4) The old officer of the Day posts himself three steps to the right of the
New Officer of the Day.

l. Sound Off

1) The adjutant commands TANOD, HANDA; TIKAS PAHINGA;

IHUDYAT. Then he executes Tikas Pahinga. (The commander of the guard and assistant
commander of the guard shall not repeat any preparatory commands given by the adjutant at
this time).

2) At the command IHUDYAT the band plays the sound off, then moves
forward playing. I t passes to the left of the line between the commanders of the guard and
the adjutant and then back to its post on the right where it halts and plays the sound off again
(Figure 12 (a) and (b).

3) While the band is sounding off, the officers of the Day stands at
attention.

m. Adjutant’s Report

The Adjutant commands TANGHAL, TA, faces about toward the

New Officer of the Day, and reports “Ang Tanod ay Nakahanay Na Po”.

n. March in Review

1) The New Officer of the Day returns the salute and directs the
Adjutant PASA , MASID. The adjutant faces about and commands BABA TA; HARAP
SA KANAN. At the command NA the guard executes the movement. The band front of the
leading platoon, and faces to the right, marches to a point where its rank is approximately 24
steps in front of the leading platoon, and faces to the leader of the first platoon who is the
commander of the guard. The CPNCO maintains his position behind in the left file when
there is one platoon (Figure 13) and behind the rear men left file of the second platoon when
there are two platoons (Figure 14).
 Ceremonies 114
2) The adjutant commands KANANG BALIKAT, TA; PASULONG,
NA.

3) When the playing band and the guard march past the officer of the day
(Figure 14), the guide of the first platoon halts 24 steps behind the band during the march in
review.

4) When the adjutant is six steps from the officer of the day, he
commands HANDA, KANAN, TINGIN.

a) When there is only one platoon, the Officer of the Guard, the
Adjutant and the CPNCO executes the hand salute on the command TINGIN and hold it
until the CPNCO commands HANDA, RAP.

b) When there are two platoons (Figure 14), the Adjutant commands
HANDA, KANAN, TINGIN, for the first platoon. He commands HANDA, RAP for the
first platoon when the last rank is six steps beyond the officer of the day. The assistant
commander of the guards commands HANDA KANAN TINGIN, for the second platoon.
He commands HANDA RAP, when the last rank of the platoon is six steps beyond the
officer of the day. The adjutant and the commander of the guard salute with the first platoon,
the assistant commander of the guard and the CPNCO salute with the second platoon.
5) While the guard is marching in review the officer of the day stands
attention.

a) The new Officer of the day returns the salute of the Adjutant and the
Commander of the Guard. He salutes only once because the adjutant and the commander of
the guard salute together.

b) When there are two platoons, the officer of the day does not return
the salute of the assistant commander of the guard.

6) After the band passes the officer of the day it returns column left and
positions itself in front and facing the officer of the day it turns column left and positions
itself in front of and facing the officer of the day 18 steps from where the left flank of the
guard passes. It continues to play until the guard leaves the parade ground.

7) The adjutant steps out of column and halts when he is 25 steps beyond
the officer of the day. The CPNCO steps out of column and halt abreast of the adjutant and
three steps to the left. The Adjutant and CPNCO then face each other salute and leave.

8) The commander of the guard marches the guard to the guard house
without changing his position in the formation.

9) If the guard consists of two platoons the commander of the guard halts
it and forms it into one platoon. The assistant commander of the guard marches behind the
last man in the rear of the right file.

10) The officers of the day face each other and salute. The old officer of
the day gives his orders to the new officer of the day.
 Ceremonies 115
o. Formation of the New and Old Guard at the Guard house

1) The old guard is formed at the guard house (Figure (14) (a)).
If the field music has been authorized , it forms three steps to the right of the old guard the
field music of the new guard forms three steps to the right of the new guard (Figure 14 (b)).

2) Relieving the old guard At the guard house is in accordance with

paragraph 5.1 to m of informal Guard Mounting
 Ceremonies 116
SECTION VII

CHANGE OF COMMAND

6.1. GENERAL INFORMATION

A change of command is a ceremony for the relinquishment and assumption of a

command.

For a change of a command of a major PNP unit/command either the Chairman of

NAPOLCOM/ Secretary of the Interior and Local Government or the Chief PNP shall be
invited as the witnessing /presiding officer. However in their absence any senior police
officer duly designated to act in their behalf.

The change of command in the lower units is normally attended by the immediate
Senior Commander or his duly designated representative as Guest of Honor (GOH). On the
other hand that of a subordinate unit is attended by the commander or representative of the
next higher unit.

Invited personalities entitled to arrival/departure honors shall receive appropriate

honors.

6.2. SEQUENCE OF ACTIVITIES

a. Change of Command (Indoor)

1) Processional
2) Entrance of Colors
3) National Anthem
4) Invocation
5) Reading of Relief/Designation Order by Personnel Officer
6) Remarks and Relinquishment of Command (Outgoing) _ _ _
Reading and Signing of Relinquishment Order
7) Presentation of Award to the Outgoing
8) Assumption of Command _ _ _ Reading and Signing of Assumption
Order
9) Turn-over of Command Symbol
10) Remarks of the New Commander
11) Remarks and Introduction of the Guest of Honor by the New
Commander
12) Inspirational Talk
13) Exit of Colors (optional)
14) Recessional
 Ceremonies 117
b. Change of Command in a Review

1) Entrance and formation of Troops

2) Presentation and Honors
3) Inspection (Trooping of the Line)
4) Reading of Relief/Designation Order
5) Remarks /Relinquishment of Command (outgoing)
6) Presentation of Award
7) Retirement of Personal Flag (For flag officers only and for retiring
comdrs)
8) Assumption of Command
9) Turn-over of Command Symbol
10) Raising of the Personal Flag of the Incoming (for flag officer and
when the ceremony is for retiring cmdr)
11) Remarks and Introduction of the Guest of Honor by the New
Commander
12) Inspirational Talk
13) March in Review

c. Change of Command with a Review

1) Entrance and formation of Troops

2) Presentation and Honors
3) Inspection (Trooping of the Line)
4) Marc-in-Review
5) Mass formation (in front of the grandstand)
6) Reading of Relief/Designation Orders
7) Remarks/Relinquishment of Command (outgoing)
8) Retirement of Personal Flag (for Flag Officer only and for the
Retiring comdr)
9) Presentation of Awards
10) Assumption of Command
11) Turn-over command of symbol
12) Raising of the Personal Flag of the Incoming (for flag officer and
when the ceremony is for retiring cmdr)
13) Remarks and Introduction of the Guest of Honor by the New
Commander
14) Inspirational Talk (Guest of Honor)

6.3. CHANGE OF COMMAND PROPER

a. The EMCEE announces “We now begin the change of command ceremony”

b. The adjutant proceeds to the left podium and reads the relief and designation
orders.

c. The outgoing commander proceeds to the right podium to make his remarks.
He gives the troops TIKAS PAHINGA after the troop commander (TC) faces about.

d. At the end of his remarks, the outgoing commander shall say “I

 Ceremonies 118
will now read my relinquishment orders. “Then pauses for a few seconds. (At this point, the
TC and his staff go to attention ). The TC faces the troop and commands MGA TALUPAD
DA as soon as the troops are attention. The outgoing commander reads his relinquishment
orders and signs, and then says “Commander, I am ready to be relieved.” He stays where he
is. At this juncture, the personal flag of the outgoing is brought down by the CPNCO and
hand it over, cased, with the star conspicuously displayed to the former.

e. The incoming Commander proceeds to the left podium and reads the orders
for his assumption of office and signs. He pauses for a few seconds, and then says
Commander, I relieve you, Sir.” At this juncture, the personal flag of the incoming is hoisted
by the CPNCO in place of the personal flag of the outgoing.

f. The outgoing commander and the incoming commander face each other.
The incoming commander salutes the outgoing commander and the latter acknowledges the
salute. Both Commanders proceed to the center of the grandstand, halt and face the Guest of
Honor /Presiding Office. The guest of Honor (GOH) stands and takes the center position in
front of two commanders.

g. The outgoing commander salutes the GOH saying, “Sir, I have relinquished
the command of ____________ effective this date.

h. The GOH acknowledges the salute, then congratulate him,

saying “Congratulations, and well done.”

i. The incoming commander salutes and says “Sir I have assumed the
command of __________effective this date.

j. The GOH acknowledges the salute, and then congratulate him,

saying “Congratulations, make your post”.

k. At this point, the CPNCO moves forward with the office command symbol
and hands it over to the outgoing Commander. After handling over the command symbol,
The CPNCO moves to the other side near the Incoming Commander.

l. The outgoing commander passes on the command symbol to the GOH.

m. The GOH receives the command symbol and passes it on to the Incoming
Commander.

n. The Incoming Commander receives it and gives it back to the CPNCO.

o. The PNCO, moves forward, takes hold of the command symbol then exits.

p. The new commander and the former commander face each other. The New
Commander salutes the former commander. The latter acknowledges the salute. (At this
point, the audience may give a round of applause).

q. The GOH and the former commander take their seats, with the former
commander taking the seat of the New Commander. The New Commander goes to the right
podium and delivers his speech. (He may direct the troops to TIKAS PAHINGA). The
New Commander ends his speech with the statement “….. all orders and instructions shall
 Ceremonies 119
remain undisturbed until they are rescinded or amended “. He pauses. (The troop
commander commands HUMANDA).

Note: If the GOH is the President of RP, all speakers other than the GOH
shall use the left podium reserving the right podium for the GOH.

r. The commander introduces the GOH.

s. The GOH delivers his remarks. (He may order the troops to TIKAS
PAHINGA).

t. After the remarks, the band plays recessional pieces. The ceremony end.

6.4. TURN-OVER OF OFFICE CEREMONIES

a. Turn-over of offices maybe done jointly or severally when there are

more than one (1) office affected. This is normally done indoor (without troop parade and
review).

b. Sequence :

1. The officiating Officer /Guest of Honor (GOH) is

Seated.
2. Entry of colors
3. Pambansang Awit
4. Invocation
5. Outgoings’ Valedictory Remarks
6. Outgoing will read his Relief Order
7. Pinning of his award (s)
8. Turn-over of Saber through the GOH and then the
latter turn-over the Saber to the Incoming. (Note: At
this portion, the outgoing and incoming stand one (1) step in
front of the GOH and one (1) step away from the center
respectively. In turning-over the saber, the handle should be at
the right hand of the outgoing; then the GOH will see to it that
in turning –over the Saber to the Incoming , the handle will be
at the right arm. When the outgoing receives the Saber, he
immediately transfer the handle portion to his right arm. After
the turn over the two officers salute to the GOH then execute
about face to their respective seats. However, at this time they
change their position- the outgoing exchanges position with the
Incoming. In case of joint turn over the higher or highest
office should be the nearest to the GOH.
9. The Incoming reads his Assumption Order followed
by his short Remarks.
10. Introduction of the GOH
11. Inspirational Talk of GOH.

Note : In case of joint turn-over, the awarding of the outgoings should be

simultaneous.
 Ceremonies 120

Wives if around are called to assist during awarding.

Two (2) podiums (speaker’s stand) are advisable – one (1) at the right and one (1) at
the left, each outgoing and incoming takes the nearest podium. This system will afford no
unnecessary traveling or crisscrossing before the GOH.

Remarks: Cocktails follows after the ceremony, where mementos and other awards are
presented in an appropriate place. Officers and their ladies (optional) attending the cocktails
shall not leave the promises until the departure of the honoree.
During the cocktails, the honoree, if retiree shall be formally turned over to the
Police Retirees Association as a new member. Hence, the presence of the President of
Retirees, Association is necessary. After the departure Honors, the officers and their ladies
shall form for the send-off line where the honoree retiree is accorded the farewell handshake.
His car waits at the end of the line.
 Ceremonies 121
SECTION VIII

FLAG HOISTING/LOWERING AND

REVEILLE CEREMONIES

7.1 FLAG RAISING

Flag hoisting is a ceremony in which the unit honors the Philippine flag when it is
used every Monday morning. The ceremony is conducted at the direction of the unit
commander. The commander sets the time for the flag hoisting. All members of the unit
shall be present during the conduct of the ceremony.

7.2. SEQUENCE OF EVENTS

a. Formation of troops

1) Thirty minutes before the scheduled flag hoisting time, the units are
formed in line formation facing the flag pole.

2) Fifteen minutes before the appointed time, the siren shall be sounded
for 30 seconds to signal the start of the ceremony. This shall be followed by the
announcement of “Humanda sa pagpupugay sa Watawat” by the command duty officer.

b. Start of Ceremony

1) The band plays ATTENTION CALL.

2) Subordinate unit commanders bring respective elements to
Attention.
3) The band plays “drum rolls”.
4) Color details with flag march forward followed by the TC and
Staff. (Color detail towards the flagpole and the TC to his designated position facing the
flagpole).
5) The band stops playing as soon as the National flag is hooked
into the riser of the flagpole.
6) The TC faces about and directs his staff to move behind him.
7) He then directs his adjutant to receive the report.
8) The adjutant trots to a point between the TC and sub unit
commanders and receives the reports of the subordinate unit commanders.
9) He faces about and renders reports to the TC.
10) The TC receives the report and directs his adjutant to take his
post.
11) He then faces about and directs his staff to move behind him.
12) He then faces about and commands TANGHAL TA. After the
troops have executed present arms, he faces about and commands present arms to his staff.
13) The band plays to the colors after the TC and his staff have executed
present arms (hand salute) the National Flag is hoisted simultaneously with the mass singing
of the National Anthem led by a designated member of the unit.
 Ceremonies 122
14) The TC and his staff execute order arms after the playing of “To the
Colors”.
15) The TC faces the troops and commands BABA, TA. He then faces
about.
16) The Chaplain proceeds to the microphone for the invocation.
17) After the invocation, the CPNCO proceeds to the microphone. TC
faces the troops and commands “TAAS KANAN KAMAY, NA” then faces about then
executes “TAAS KANAN KAMAY” with his staff. CPNCO leads the troops in the
“Panunumpa sa watawat”. Any announcement speeches shall be done after the Panunumpa.
18) After the Panunumpa, TC brings his staff to attention, faces about then
commands HANDA RAP and faces front.
19) A designated member of the unit leads the mass singing of Pilipinas
Kong Mahal and everyone sings the song with accompaniment of the band or a lead singer.

c. Pass-in-Review

1) The GOH/reviewing officer moves forward and directs the

TC to Pass-in-Review
2) TC faces about and directs his staff to “KALUPUNAN,
SUMALIKOD KO” then commands “PASA MASID”.

3) After the last element has passed the GOH/reviewing officer, the TC
with his staff marches back in front of the GOH/reviewing officer and reports for conclusion
of the review/ceremony says ”GINOO, TAPOS NA PO ANG PARANGAL SA
WATAWAT.”

7.3. FLAG LOWERING (RETREAT)

a. General

1) The term “Retreat” is taken from the French word “Retraite”

and refers to evening ceremony. The bugle sounded at retreat was used in the French army
and dates back to crusades. Retreat is sounded at sunset to notify sentries to start challenging
until sunrise, and to tell the rank and file to go to their quarters.
2) To the Color is being used as music honoring the flag as it is
lowered in the evening.

b. Meaning

Retreat is a ceremony in which the unit honors the flag when it is

lowered in the evening.

c. Procedure

1) The unit is formed facing the flag at least five (5) minutes before the
time of retreat. Commanders normally prescribes the time for the retreat.

2) As soon as the unit is formed, the designated commander takes his

position facing the line of troops and commands TALUPAD, HUMANDA and then TIKAS
PAHINGA. Retreat is sounded at this time.
 Ceremonies 123
3) After the retreat the designated commander executes attention with his
staff, faces about and commands TALUPAD, HUMANDA then TANGHAL SANDATA.
The TC then faces about and executes present arms with his staff. The band begins playing
To the Color.

4) After the last note of To the Colors, TC brings his staff to attention
faces about, commands BABA, TA and faces front. This terminates the retreat formation.
7.4. REVEILLE

a. General

Reveille was not originally intended as honors to the flag. In 1812, it was a
drum call to signify that soldiers should rise for the day and sentries should leave off night
challenging. As time passed, reveille came to connote the hoisting of the flag in the morning
and the honors paid to it.

b. Meaning

Reveille is a ceremony in which a unit honors the national flag as it is being

hoisted in the morning.

c. Procedure

1) At the sound of the reveille, the unit is formed facing the flag.

2) As soon as the troops are formed, the designated TC takes his

position centered on the line of troops and commands the unit HUMANDA then
MAGULAT.
3) All sub-units report in succession from right to left, “Ginoo___
balangay narito pong lahat napag alaman”. The sub-unit should also report the absentees in
this manner”Ginoo__________balangay _________ang wala hindi napag alaman.” Salutes
ae exchanged with each report.

4) The TC commands TIKAS PAHINGA and faces about then assumes

parade rest himself. If a band is present, about 30 seconds before the time of reveille the
designated commander commands TALUPAD HUMANDA. When the troops are in
attention, TC commands TANGAHAL , TA and then faces about and executes hand salute
with his staff. The commander’s salute is the signal for the band to sound to the color.

5) After the last note of To the Color; the TC with his staff terminates
their salute. TC faces about, commands BABA, SANDATA and then directs ‘PAMUNUAN
ANG INYONG MGA BALANGAY”. The sub-unit commanders salute simultaneously and
the TC salutes in return. This ends the ceremony.

Note: Participation of the Troops is optional. In such case, the reveille shall be
conducted by designated guard details only.
 Ceremonies 124
SECTION VIII

WELCOME CEREMONY FOR UNITS

ARRIVING FROM OVERSEAS DUTY
(UNIT HONORS)
8.1. FORMATION

Initially, the unit is formed en masse in front of the grandstand. When the
senior unit commander or his designated representative arrives at the grandstand, the unit
commander (UC) brings his troops to attention. When the senior unit commander or his
representative has taken his seat, the UC brings his troops to present arms and presents his
troops to the senior unit commander. The latter acknowledges the presentation and
immediately the band plays appropriate marc music. (Everybody takes seat after the
invocation).

8.2. AWARDING

a. The UC commands MGA WATAWAT AT MGA TAONG

PARARANGALAN, PUMAGITNA KAD. The unit staff executes right face and at the last
note of the command of execution KAD, marches forward and halts after a considerable
distance, allowing space for the colors and awardees when they come forward. The senior
unit commander and the unit commander standard join the colors; the most senior unit staff
member commands HARAP SA KALIWA then PASULONG to position themselves
behind the colors. When the colors and awardees are already in their proper position, the UC
salutes and reports ato the major service commander. “Nandito nap o ang mga watawat at
ang mga taong pararangalan.” After being acknowledged, he executes order arms faces
about then joins his staff at the back of the colors taking the most direct route. There after,
he commands TANGHAL, TA for his staff, color, awardees. The band then plays the
National Anthem, after which the UC commands BABA TA. If the UC is an awardee he
takes his proper position in line with the other awardees.

b. The Guest of Honor (GOH) and the major service commander go

down the grandstand for the awarding ceremony. The citations of the awards are read before
they are presented to the awardees. After the presentation of awards, the GOH goes back to
the grandstand while the colors and awardees return to their former positions.

c. At this point, the spouses/parents proceed toward the troops to present

leis to the officers and policemen of the unit. They return to their respective seats after
presenting the leis.

8.3. SPEECHES

a. The unit commander concerned introduced the GOH for the

welcome remarks.

b. If previously ordered to bring his unit to parade rest, the UC bring the
unit to attention after the address of the GOH. Recessional follows.
 Ceremonies 125

Note: As a doctrine the EMCEE will always shake hands with the Speaker(s)
before and after his speech.
 Ceremonies 126

SECTION IX

ACTIVATION/DE-ACTIVATION OF UNITS

ACTIVATION

9.1 SEQUENCE OF ACTIVITIES

The following are the procedures/sequences in the activation of units.

a. Arrival of the Guest of Honor/Speaker (GOH)

1) The elements of the units to be activated are formed en masse in front of the
grandstand or ceremonial venue and are initially at parade rest. The band ( if available) is
likewise prepositioned at the vicinity of the ceremonial venue,

2) As soon as the party of the guest of Honor/Speaker arrives, the designated

troop comman4er (TC) calls the troop to attention. He commands, TALUPAD, HUMANDA
or as appropriate.

b. Singing of National Anthem

1) When all the guests are seated. The designated emcee announces, ''PLEASE
RISE FOR THE PHILIPPINE NATIONAL ANTHEM")

2) The TC directs the troops to execute present arms. He commands. TANGHAL

TA. The band then plays the National Anthem.

3) After the band finishes playing of the National Anthem, the TC. commands
the troops to execute order arms. He commands, BABA,TA.

4) The emcee then announces, "Please remain standing for the invocation”.

c. Invocation

The chaplain approaches the rostrum and delivers the invocation. When the
invocation is finished, the chaplain exits and proceeds to his seat.

d. Reading of the unit Activation Order

1) After everybody is seated, the emcee announces, "The activation order of

(Name of unit) will now be read by the Director for Personnel and Record Management (any
designated person). "
 Ceremonies 127
2) The Adjutant proceeds to the rostrum and reads the unit activation order. After
reading the order, the Director for Personnel and Record Management returns to his seat.

e. Unfurling of the Unit Color

1) After reading of orders the emcee announces, "We will now witness the
unfurling of the unit color by the GOH to be assisted by the host. "

2) The GOH and the Host stand, while a color bearer escorted by the
designated Command Police Non-Commissioned Officer (CPNCO) of the activated
unit approaches them with the cased unit color. The color bearer then lowers the color
in front of the GOH and Host. The GOH and Host untie and remove the case of the
color. Upon removal of the case, the color bearer slowly unfurls the color. At this
point, the band plays appropriate background music or the unit hymn_(No part of the
color should be allowed to touch the ground). The CPNCO then hands over the
unfurled color to the Host who in turn gives it to the GOH

3) The Adjutant proceeds to the rostrum and reads the appointment order
of the Incoming Commander of the activated unit. After reading the appointment
orders, the adjutant exits and the emcee announces, "The incoming commander of
(Name of unit) will now receive the color."

4) The incoming unit Commander proceeds in front of the GOH and

salutes. The GOH hands over the unit color to the Incoming Commander who then
gives it to the Executive and color bearer to be placed in a prepositioned flag stand.
The GOH and Host then proceed to their respective seats.

f. Assumption of Command

1) As soon as the GOH and Host are seated, the emcee announces "The incoming
commander of______________will now read his assumption of command”.

2) The Commander proceed to the rostrum and reads the order. He says
“Pursuant to General Orders Number _____. Headquarters______ Dated I
hereby activated (Name of Unit) effective this date. I sign in your presence.

After signing the document, the newly designated commander delivers his
remarks. Then, he introduces the GOH.

g. Speech of the GOH

The Guest of honor/speaker delivers his-speech after the introduction.

h. Conclusion

1) .After the speech of the GOH, the emcee announces “Ladies and
Gentlemen, that concludes our activities. Thank you very much.”

2) The TC then marches off the troops and dismisses them in a designated
area.
 Ceremonies 128

Note: As a doctrine, the EMCEE regardless of rank shall always shake hands, with the
Speaker before and after the speech.

De-Activation of Units

9.2 SEQUENCE OF ACTIVITIES

The following procedures/sequences in the de-activation of units:

a. Arrival of the Guest of Honor/Speaker (GOR)

1) The elements of the units to be de-activated are formed en mass~ in front of

the grandstand or ceremonial venue and are initially at parade rest. The band (if available) is
likewise prepositioned at the vicinity of the ceremonial venue.

2) As soon as the party of the Guest of Honor/Speaker arrives,. the designated

Troop Commander (TC) calls the troops to attention. He commands, TALUPAD, DA or as
appropriate.

b. Singing of National anthem

1) When everybody has settled down or is already seated. the designated

emcee announces, "PLEASE RISE FOR THE PHILIPPINE NATIONAL ANTHEM".

2) The TC directs the troops to execute present arms. He commands

TANGHAL, TA. The band then plays the National anthem.

3) When the band finishes playing the National anthem, the TC commands the
troops to .execute order arms. He commands, BABA, TA.

4) The emcee then announces, "Please remain standing for the invocation.”

c. Invocation

The Chaplain approaches the rostrum and delivers the invocation. When the
invocation is finished the chaplain exits and proceeds to his seat. The emcee announces.
“Thank you”.

d. Reading of the Unit De-activation Order

 Ceremonies 129

1) After everybody is seated. The emcee announces “The de-activation

order of (Name of Unit} will now be read by the “designated person”.

2) The Director for Personnel and Records Management proceeds to the

rostrum an reads the order. He says “Pursuant to General Order
Number___Headquarters_________Dated______, (Name of Unit) is hereby de-activated
effective this date”.After reading the de-activation order, the Director for Personnel return to
his seat.

e. Hauling down/Encasing of the Unit Color

1) The emcee announces, "We will now witness the hauling down and
encasing of the{Unit}color by the GOH to be assisted by the host.

2. The GOH and the host stands. A color bearer escorted by II designated
CPNCO of the de-activated unit approaches them with the unburied Unit color. The color
bearer then lowers the color and slowly furls it in front of the GOH and Host (while the band
plays Auld Lang Syne or appropriate music) 'The GOH covers/encases color is handed by
the CPNCO to the host who then gives it to the GOH.

3. The incumbent Commander then approaches the rostrum and delivers

his remarks then introduces the GOH.

f. Speech of the GOH

The Guest of Honor/speaker delivers his speech.

g. Conclusion

1) After the speech of the GOH, the emcee announces "Ladies and
gentlemen, that concludes our activities. “Thank you very much.”

2) The TC then marches off the troops and dismisses them in a

designated area.

NOTE: If former commander of the tie-activated unit are present the ceremony, the cased
unit color should be passed on to them in succession then returned to the incumbent
commander before it is given to the GOH. Normally, the GOH is the commander of the unit
that issues the de-activation order.
 Ceremonies 130

SECTION X

FUNERA.L HONORS AND SERVICES

10.0 GENERAL

The practice of giving final tribute and honors to a dearly departed has evolved over
the years from a simple ceremony to elaborate and colorful rites to make the occasion more
meaningful in perpetuation of the memory of the dead.

The funeral rites of policemen more than any other ceremony have followed an old
pattern as the living honor to the brave dead.

10.2 PERSONS ENTITLED TO FUNERAL HONORS AND SERVICES

a. Police Personnel in the Active Service

b. Retired Police Personnel

c. Honorably Separated Police Personnel

d. Government Officials and VIPs as directed by the SILG and the President.

f. Reserved Officers in the inactive status and Veterans.

10.3 TYPES OF FUNERALS

a. Police funerals are divided into two classes

1) Chapel service, followed by a movement to the grave or place of local

disposition with the prescribed escort.

2) With graveside honors only.

b. A full police funeral normally consists of the following elements:

1) Band

2) Escort appropriate to the deceased, including a firing party and bugler.

3) Colors

4) Clergy

5) Hearse (caisson) and active pallbearers

 Ceremonies 131
6) Honorary pallbearers

7) Personal color (if appropriate)

c. Upon .request, chaplains may conduct or arrange for appropriate burial

services for interment of members of the police service, active and retired, and for members
of their families. The family of the deceased (or their representative) My however, request
some other clergyman to officiate in lieu of a police chaplain A civilian clergyman can
conduct all religious elements of a police funeral interment. Although the desires of the
family are to be given the fullest consideration possible in the selection of elements involved.
The funeral, however, should be conducted as prescribed in the manual.

d. The commanding officer of the deceased or his representative, in coordination

with the cemetery superintendent and the funeral director, makes the funeral arrangement and
supervises the conduct of the funeral.

e. When honorary pallbearers are desired, they are selected by the family of the
deceased or their representative, or when they so desired, by the commanding officer. As a
rule, no more than twelve (12) honorary pallbearers should be selected

f. At a police funeral, persons in police uniform attending in their individual

capacity, must first face the casket and execute the hand salute at the following times.

1) When honors, if any, are surrounded.

2) At any time when the casket is being moved (the exception being
when they themselves are moving);

3) During cannon salutes, if sounded

4) During the firing of volleys; and

5) While Taps is being played.

g. During the religious graveside service, all personnel bow their heads at the
words "Let us pray". All mourners at graveside except the active pallbearers follow the
example of the officiating chaplain. If he uncovers, they uncover; if he remains covered they
remain covered. But when the officiating chaplain ~ears a biretta (clerical headpiece) during
the graveside service, all personnel, as indicated above, must uncover.

h, The remains of a member of the Police Forces, who die while on active duty
may be consigned directly to a national cemetery from a police installation. In such cases, the
cemetery superintendent wilt, regardless of the time of arrival (if not otherwise provided for)
engaged a funeral director to receive the remains at the common carrier terminal, hold the
remains at his establishment until the date of the funeral, if necessary and deliver the remains
to the cemetery. The superintendent is not authorized to allow the funeral director to render
any other service incident to the interment.
 Ceremonies 132
i. The word chapel is interpreted to mean church, home or any other place where
services are held, other than the service at me grave.

j. The word casket is interpreted to include a receptacle containing the remains of the
deceased.

10.4 DEFINITION OF TERMS

a. Funeral Services - include escort, band, colors, clergy, caisson and/or funeral
pallbearers, and chapel services.

b. Graveside Services - include the clergy, pallbearers, firing party and buglers.

c. Vigil Guards - the sentries posted to keep watch on the bier when remains of
a deceased are lying in state.

d. Interment Flag – The interment flag is used to cover the casket of the
deceased. The white part with the sun and stars shall cover the head of the casket. the blue
portion is to the right and the red part to the left of the deceased with both colors lowered in
the grave. No wreath of flowers should be placed on top of the flag shrouded casket.
Nonetheless, a small cross of flowers may be placed over the flag as a symbol of “God above
the country”. Issue of one interment flag to heirs of deceased police veterans is authorized

e. Escort and Transportation - This shall be provided by unit commanders

upon request of heirs or nearest relatives of the deceased.

f Burial Expenses - Reimbursement of burial expenses is authorized pursuant

to Sec 699 of the RAC.

(Note: To be referred to BPAO, DP or further research),

g. Interment at Libingan ng Mga Bayani - For those who may be entitled to

Interment at Libingan ng mga Bayani.

h. Lie-in-state at PNP Chapel - Before the actual funeral, a deceased may lie-in-
state at a PNP Chapel provided such service does not interfere with regularly scheduled
church services of said chapel. However, it shall be the PNP Chaplain directly in charge of
the chapel who shall make the necessary arrangement for the deceased personnel authorized
to lie-in-state in PNP Chapel.

10.5 FUNERAL WITH CHAPEL SERVICE

a. Before the beginning of the service, the funeral escort is formed in line facing the
chapel. The band forms on the flank toward which it is to march.

b. Members of the immediate family, relatives, and friends of the deceased are
requested to enter the chapel and be seated before the casket is taken in. Members of the
immediate family and relatives occupy pews (seats) to the right (front) of the chapel.
 Ceremonies 133
c. The hearse bearing the remains to the chapel should arrive in front of the chapel
few moments before the time set for the service. As the hearse approaches, the escort
commander commands MGA GABAY, DA and he salutes until the hearse stops in front of
the chapel. When the casket is ready to be moved into the chapel, the commander of the
escort brings the escort to TANG HAL TA. As the escort commander present arms, the band
renders the honors, and if appropriate, followed by a hymn. At the first note of the' hymn, the
casket is moved from the hearse by the active pallbearers and carried between the ranks of
honorary pallbearers, if any, into the chapel, the remains are handled in a dignified, and
reverent manner, ensuring that the casket is carried level and feet first at all times. As soon as
the casket enters the , chapel, the band ceases to play, and the escort commander brings the
escort to BABA, TA and PALUWAG. .

d. When honorary pallbearers are present, they are formed in two ranks, teach
one facing the other, in order of seniority, with the most senior being the closest to the
hearse, thus forming an aisle from the hearse to the entrance of the chapel. As the first note of
the music and while the casket is being borne between the ranks of honorary pallbearers, they
uncover or salute. They then follow the casket in column 'of twos and occupy pews (seats) to
the left front of the chapel.

e. When the casket has been placed on the church truck, two active pallbearers
push the truck to the front of the church while the other active pallbearers move to the
vestibule and await the termination of the church service. If there is no such truck, the active
pallbearers carry the casket to the front of the church as in. structed by the chaplain before
the service. When no honorary pallbearers are used, and if the active pallbearers are selected
friends" of the family, they may, if desired by' the family, occupy the pews (seats) to the left
front of the chapel.
I
f After the chapel service, the honorary pallbearers (if present) precede the
casket in column of twos as the two active pallbearers push the church truck to the entrance
of the chapel. The honorary pallbearers again form an aisle from the entrance of the chapel to
the hearse with the most senior closest to the chapel. They uncover or salute as prescribed.
When the casket has been placed in the hearse, the honorary pallbearers enter their vehicles.
When marching, the honorary pallbearers form columns on each side of the hearse, the
leading member of each column opposite site the front wheels of the hearse.

g. The casket, followed by the family group, is moved to the entrance immediately
behind the honorary pallbearers. As soon as the honorary pallbearers have taken their
position, the active pallbearers carry the casket to the hearse and form a column of twos
behind it (if the honorary pallbearers march). If the honorary pallbearers do not march, the
active pallbearers form files on each side of the hearse, the leading members of each column
opposite the front wheels of the hearse. The family group remains at the chapel entrance until
the honorary pallbearers have broken ranks to enter their vehicles or have taken their
positions for marching. The members of the family group then are guided to their vehicles.

h. When the casket appears at the entrance of the chapel at the conclusion of the
service, the funeral escort and band repeat the procedure as prescribed for .entering the
chapel. When the casket has been secured into the hearse, the band
ceases playing and the escort is brought to the order.

i. The procession is then formed in the following order:

 Ceremonies 134
1) Escort commander.
2) Band.
3) Escort, including colors, firing party, and bugler.
4) Honorary pallbearers, if riding in cars.
5) Clergy.
6) Caisson or hearse, and honorary pallbearers, if walking.
7) Active pallbearers.
8) Personal color (if appropriate)
9) Family
10) Friends and patriotic or fraternal organization

j. When the procession has been formed, the escort commander command,
PASULONG, KAD to the band and escort. The elements in the rear conform. The
procession marches slowly to solemn music (cadence of 100 beats per minute). When there is
considerable distance from the chapel to t)'le grave, the escort, after leaving the vicinity of
the chapel, may march in quick time. The band plays appropriate music throughout the
march. Care must be exercised to avoid disturbing other funeral processions of service that
may be passed on the route of the march. When the escort is in the vicinity of the grave, it
resumes a slow cadence to solemn music. Customary music is used.

k. As the procession approaches the grave, the marching elements move directly
to their predesignated positions. The band and police escort are formed in line in view of the
next of kin. The other marching elements are halted as near as practicable to the grave. The
firing party is positioned so that it fires over the grave, and so that it is in view of the next of
kin.

l. Before the hearse is halted, the honorary pallbearers are formed in two ranks,
the most senior closest to the hearse, forming an aisle extending from the hearse toward the
grave. When the grave is near to the road to permit this formation, they take their position at
the grave before the casket is removed from the hearse.

m. When the casket is ready to be moved from the hearse, the escort commander
commands TANGHAL, TA. At the command of execution TA, the escort execute present
arms and the band renders honors, if appropriate, followed by a hymn. At the first note of the
hymn, the active pallbearers remove the casket from the hearse.

NOTE: If a police chaplain is not present, the officer in charge or police non
cimmisioned officer in charge presents the flag to the next of kin.

10.6. GRAVESIDE SERVICE

For a funeral without chapel service, all elements of a police funeral must be present.
However, if troops are not conveniently available, or if the family desires to eliminate other
elements, the following must be used.

a. Clergy
b. Officer in charge or police noncommissioned officer in charge, appropriate to
the grave of the deceased.
c. Active pallbearers.
 Ceremonies 135
d. Firing party.
e. Bugler.
f. Personal color bearer (if appropriate).

These elements are in position at the graveside before the arrival of the remains.

10.7. CREMATED REMAINS

a. When the remains are cremated and the ashes interred with police honors,
necessary modifications, will govern.

b. For all phases of the funeral, where the cremated remains are carried by hand,
one man is detailed to carry the receptacle (casket) containing the ashes and another is
detailed to carry the flag, folded into the shape of a cocked hat. The pallbearers carrying the
flag is always positioned to the right of the remain. When the receptacle is carried from the
hearse into the chapel and from the chapel to the hearse, these two men are the only
participant in the ceremony. During the procession to the gravesite, the receptacle and flag
are carried by the two pallbearers followed by four (4) additional pallbearers. When the
receptacle has been placed on the gravesite, all six pallbearers unfold the flag and hold it over
the grave.

c. When the receptacle and flag are placed before the chancy of the chapel are
transported to gravesite by vehicle, the receptacle and folded flag are placed side by side. If
the pallbearers walk to the gravesite, the two bearers who carried the receptacle and the flag
join the other four pallbearers already prepositioned on either side of the hearse.

d. When no hears is used, suitable transportations provided for the receptacle and
flag bearers and the other pallbearers

e. When the remains are removed to a ceremony and the ashes are to be
interfered with police honors at a later time, the ceremony consists only of the escort to the
crematory. All personnel salute as the remains are carried into the crematory. The firing of
volleys and the sounding of Taps are omitted. When the funeral ceremony is to be held at the
crematory, and when no further honors are anticipated, the volleys are fired and Taps is
sounded at the discretion of the commanding officer.

10.8. CEREMONY IN TRANSFERRING REMAINS

a. If the remains of a flag officer are brought ashore in the vicinity of a police
post, the flag will be displayed at half-staff and gun salute will be fired as the procession
moves. The number of guns will be that to which the officer was entitled as a salute.

b. When the remains of a deceased police are moved to a railway station or any
other point for shipment to another place for interment or final disposition, funeral services
are modified as necessary. When no further police honors are anticipated at the place of the
interment or final disposition, the volleys are fired and Taps sounded at the discretion of the
 Ceremonies 136
commanding officer. When police honors are anticipated at the place of final disposition, the
volleys and Taps are omitted.

10.9. GUN SALUTE

a. When the funeral of a general officer on the active or retired list, who was
entitled to a gun salute, takes place: at or near a police installations, guns equal to the number
to which the officer Was entitled, may be fired at noon on the day of the funeral. The police
installation mentioned in general orders fires the prescribed salutes.

b. Immediately preceding the benediction, a gun salute corresponding to the

grade of the deceased is fired at five-second intervals. Following the benediction, three
volleys are fired.

10.10. FUNERAL OFF POST

a. The commander, upon request, provides a funeral detail for deceased

active duty or retired armed forces personnel when the burial is to take place in a civilian or
national cemetery off the installation. The detail is normally composed as follows

1) Officer in charge or noncommissioned police officer in charge.

2) Six active pallbearers.
3) Firing Party.
4) Bugler.

NOTE: When police pallbearers are not available, the firing party folds the flag.

b. The arrangements for the funeral are supervised by the survivor

officer. The officer in charge or noncommissioned police officer in charge of the funeral
detail coordinates all aspects of the ceremonies with this officer.

c. Upon arrival at the destination where the funeral is to be conducted,

the officer in charge or noncommissioned police officer in charge meets the survivor
assistance officer and ascertains the sequence of the ceremony. The normal sequence of
events is as follows:

1) At the funeral home, on the order of the funeral director, the pallbearers move
the casket to the hearse. The pallbearers should be certain to carry the casket feet first and
level at all times.

2) At the church:

a) The active pallbearers carry the casket from the hearse into the chapel.
 Ceremonies 137
b) When the casket has been placed on the church, two pallbearers push
the truck to the front of the church while the other pallbearers move to the vestibule and
await the termination of the church service. If there is no church truck, the pallbearers carry
the-casket to the front of the church as instructed by the funeral director or minister
concerned. It desired by the family, the active pallbearers may occupy the pews (seats) to the
left front of the church.

c) After the church service, the pallbearers, under the direction of the
funeral director, move the casket to the hearse. When the casket has been placed in the
hearse, the pallbearers enter their vehicle.

3) At the Cemetery

a) The officer in charge or a designated individual commands the

prepositioned firing party and bugler to TILAP, DA and TANGHAL, TA as soon as the
casket is moved from the hearse. The command BABA, TA is given when the casket reaches
the grave.

b) The pallbearers carry the casket, feet first and level, to the grave. On
reaching the grave, the casket is placed on the lowering device. The pallbearers raise the flag
from the casket and hold it in a horizontal position, waists high, until the conclusion of Taps.

10.11. PARTICIPATION OF AVIATION

When aviation participates in a police funeral, it is timed so that the aircraft appears
over the procession. .

10.12. PARTICIPATION OF FRATERNAL OR PATRIOTIC ORGANIZATION

The family or representative of the deceased may request fraternal or patriotic

organizations, of which the deceased was a member, to take part in the funeral service. With
immediate family’s approval, fraternal or patriotic organizations may conduct graveside
sevice, at the conclusion of police portion of the ceremony, signified by the flag presentation
to the next kin and escort departure from the cemetery.

10.13. DUTIES OF THE CHAPLAIN

The chaplain takes his position in front of the chapel before the arrival of the remains.
He precedes the casket, when it is carried from the hearse into the chapel II" from L ~ chapel
to the hearse. While the remains are being placed in the hearse, he stands at the rear and to
the side facing the hearse. When he is wearing vestments, he may, at his discretion, proceed
from the chancel to the sacristy (vestry) at the inclusion of the chapel service and divest,
joining the procession before it moves from the chapel. He then precedes the hearse to the
graveside and precedes the casket to the grave.
.
 Ceremonies 138
10.14 PRELIMINARY ARRANGEMENTS

The officer incharge of a police funeral, the commander of the escort, the funeral
director, and the superintendent of the cemetery of his representative visit the places involve
and make carefull arrangement before the time set for the funeral. They determine the
positions at the grave for the various elements of the funeral and make arrangements for
traffic control.

10.15. FLORAL TRIBUTES

a. In the absence of the chaplain, the chaplain's assistant helps the funeral director in
arranging all floral tributes in the chapel. The commanding officer or his representatives
coordinates with the funeral director for necessary transportation for prompt transfer of floral
tributes from the chapel to the gravesite. The vehicle bearing the floral tributes is loaded
promptly at the conclusion of the chapel service. It precedes the funeral procession, moving
as rapidly as practicable to the site of the graves. The funeral procession does not move from
the chapel until the vehicle carrying the floral tributes has cleared the escort.

b. The funeral director or the cemetery representative is responsible for removing

cards and making a record that gives a brief description of the flora piece pertaining to each
card. After completion of the funeral services, the cards and records are turned over to a
member of the family of the deceased.

10.16. RULES FOR CEREMONIAL FIRING

a. For a ceremonial firing, the firing party consist of not more than seven (7)
gentlemen but not less than five (5) with one police non-commissioned officer in-charge.

b. The firing party is normally pre-positioned at the grave site and facing in the
direction that allows it to fire directly over the grave. However, care should be taken to
ensure the rifles are fired at 45 – degree angle from the horizontal.

1) To Load

a) Magazine or clips are loaded with three rounds and blank

adapters are attached before forming the firing party.

b) The conclusion of the religious services or on the escort

commander’s command, the Command Police Non-Commissioned Officer in charge directs
the loading of blank ammunitions. At the command each rifleman executes port arms, faces
to the half right, and move his right foot ten (10) inches to the right to a position that gives
him a firm, steady stance. He then chambers around, places the weapon in the position, and
resume port arms.

2) To fire by volley
 Ceremonies 139
a) When the riflemen have completed the movements and
weapons are locked, the commands are HANDA, SIPAT, PUTOK. At the command
HANDA, each rifleman moves the safety to the fire position. On the command SIPAT, the
rifle is shouldered with both hands to the muzzle to the frontof an angle of 45 degrees from
the horizon. On the command of execution PUTOK, the trigger is squeezed quickly and the
weapon is immediately returned to port arms.

b) To continue the firing with weapons that function automatically

(blank adapter), the commands SIPAT and PUTOK are given and executed as previously
prescribed. To continue the firing with weapon that must be manually operated to chamber
another round (with blank adapters), the command, HANDA, SIPAT, PUTOK are again
given. On the command HANDA, each rifleman manually chambers the next round. The
commands SIPAT and PUTOK are given and executed as previously prescribed.

c) When the third round has been fired and the rifleman have
resumed port arms. The riflemen immediately place the weapons on safe assume the position
of attention (at port arms), and face to halt. From this position, the firing party is
commanded to TANGHAL before the playing of Taps or Tawag Paghimlay. After they
commanded to order arms, the Command Police Non-Commissioned Officerr in charge
executes a right (left) face and remains at attention until the flag has been folded and saluted
by the officer in charge or noncommissioned officer in charge 01 the funeral detail. At this
time, the firing party noncommissioned officer in charge executes (left) face commands
HARAP SA KNAN (KALIWA), RAP; AGAP,TA and PASULONG, KAD. The weapons
are unloaded and cleared as soon as possible living the gravesite

10.17. NOTICE OF DEATH

a. President/Ex-President

On the day after receipt of an official notice of death of the President or an Ex-
President of the Philippines. The Commanding Officer at all installations/ stations equipped
with necessary personnel and material shall cause the performance of the following.

1) Eight guns to be fired at reveille and a gun fired every half hour,
begins one hour after reveille, and ending at retreat after which the salute of one gun
representing each province shall again be fired.

2) All troops at all police stations or bases and the cadets of the PNPA
shall be paraded at I 000 hours and the official announcing the death shall be read:

3) On the day of the funeral, while the remains are being borne to the
place of interment, after the funeral service at the house, building or church, 21 gun' salute be
fired at intervals of one every minute (minute guns) at all police installations/stations
equipped with necessary personnel and material.

4) Posts distant from the place at which the funeral is held shall fire the
salute directed in (a) above at a reasonable time after the hour set for the funeral.
 Ceremonies 140

5) If the remains are removed from the immediate vicinity of the place of
death, all troops along the route of the funeral train shall be aligned along the. funeral route
to render appropriate honors.

6) Police mourning shall be observed for a period of one (1) month after
the date of the order announcing the death.

b. Vice-President

On the day after receipt of the official notice of death of the Vice-President of
the Philippines, unless this day falls on a Sunday or holiday, in which case the honors shall
be rendered on the day after Sunday or Holiday, the Commanding Officer at all police
installations/stations will cause 8 guns to be fired every half hour until retreat is sounded and
immediately after which a salute of one gun for each province shall be fired.

c. Secretary of Interior and Local Government/Chairman, NAPOLCOM

In the event of the death of the Secretary of Interior and Local

Government/Chairman, NAPOLCOM, the same honor shall be rendered as prescribed in
case of the death of the Vice-President of the Philippines, omitting the guns to bt' fired at
reveille.

d. Undersecretary of DILG for Peace and Order

In the event of death of the Undersecretary of DILG for Peace and Order, the
minute guns to be fired on the day of the funeral and the gun salute to be fired immediately
after retreat shall be limited to the number of guns to which that official is entitled.

e. PNP General

1) Orders announcing the death of a PNP general on the active or retired

list will specify the police installation/station at which gun salute shall be fired. One hour
after reveille following the date of receipt of the order, gun shall fired at half hour interval
until retreat.

2) When the funeral of an officer on the active or retired list entitled to a

salute takes place at or near a police installation/station, minute guns shall be fired while the
remains are being borne to the place of the interment.

10.18. FUNERAL ESCORTS

a. Funeral and Graveside services - Funeral services within the context of this
manual shall include escort, band, colors, clergy, caisson and/or funeral car, caparisoned
horse, pallbearers, and chapel services, graveside services including clergy pallbearers, firing
party and buglers.
 Ceremonies 141
The funeral party normally consists of the following elements'

1) Band
2) Escort
3) Color
4) Clergy
5) Caisson and active pallbearers Caparisoned horse or Funeral car
6) Honorary pallbearers
7) Firing part

b. Funeral Escorts - The following guidelines will govern the composition of

funeral escorts, however, local commanders may vary the composition as maybe appropriate
to suit local situations:

1) One Squad - PNCO from PO1 to SPO1

2) One Section - PNCO from SPO2 to SPO4
3) One Platoon - Inspector’s Grade Officer
4) One Company of - Chief Inspector’s Grade
3 or 4 Platoons
5) One Company of - PNP C,Supt & Directors/
3 or 4 Platoons Dep Dir Gen/Dir Gen, and
Civilian entitled to a gun
Salute from 13 to 19 guns

6) Bde Size of3 Bns - President, Ex - President

or as prescribed by - Chariman, Napolcom, CPNP
Napolcom Speaker of House Reps
and Supreme Court Justices

c. Composite Escort Units :

1) Normally, the funeral escort will be composed of personnel from the

Recoms/NSUs responsible for providing the funeral services. However, the funeral escort
may be composed of a composite/PNP unit for persons that maybe prescribed in appropriate
regulations.

2) Commanders of Composite Units and the band will be provided by the

Recoms/NSUs responsible for providing funeral services.

3) All elements of the funeral party except the caisson and caparisoned
horse are present during the graveside services. However if troops are not conveniently
available or fit into the family so desires, the following are used instead.

a) Clergy c) Firing Speed

b) Active pallbearers d) Bugler

d. Pallbearers
 Ceremonies 142

1) Six active pallbearers shall be selected at the request of the family of

the deceased, if present, otherwise, the office/unit Supervisor/Director

2) The decision selecting honorary pallbearers rests with the, if present,

relatives of the deceased otherwise, the office/unit Supervisor/Director

10.19. POLICE MOURNING

a. When a police personnel dies, the Commander of the camp where the
deceased was last assigned shall declare police mourning within the police camp post or
station concerned unless mourning is inappropriate due to the circumstances of the death.
The badge of police mourning shall be prescribed, The badge of police mourning is a straight
band or plain black cloth or black crepe four inches wide, worn around the sleeve and above
the elbow of the service uniform. It shall be worn during periods prescribed or when
specifically ordered by proper authority, and by all police personnel in uniform attending a
police funeral in their individual capacity.

b. National Flag at half-staff – the Camp Base/Director of the camp/base where

the deceased lies in state shall be responsible for placing the National Flag at half staff. The
national and regimental colors and standards will draped into streams of black crepe (7
inches long and about 12 inches wide) attached to the ferrule below, will be used.

1. Death of an Officer – for Officer who died at a police post, the

National Flag will be displayed at half staff.

2. Funeral of a PNCO – during a funeral of a PNCO at a police post, the

National Flag will be displayed at half staff. It will be then be hoisted to the top after the
final volley or gun is fired, or after the remains are taken from the post.

3. The Funeral Honors Services and other last courtesies mentioned in

paras (1.) and (2) above are also given to retired police personnel when their remain are
brought to the chapel.

4. DP shall be responsible for coordinating with relevant offices or units

for the availability of funeral services and other last courtesies for deceased PNP veterans,
and PNP retirees.

5. Unless directed otherwise CPNP or higher authority, Recoms/NSU’s

Director are responsible in arranging and conducting the funeral services according to the
following guidelines:

a) For PNP personnel who dies on active service-By the

Recoms/NSU’s to which deceased was assigned at the time of death.
 Ceremonies 143
b) For PNP personnel on Retired status, and for civilian when so
directed:

1) By the recoms/NSU’s to which deceased was last

assigned at time of separation from the PNP.

2) GSC, will provide funeral services fpr all others and

falling under the foregoing classification, when so authorize and directed by proper authority.

c) Funeral services in localities where the responsible for

Recoms/NSU’s has no mean or facilities to conduct said services, the same will be assigned
to the Recoms/NSU’s which is the most convenient positions to provide the same. DP in
coordination with DO shall designate the particular Recoms/NSUs which shall rendered the
services referred to above.

d) CPNP or higher authority, may direct, in specific case, the

funeral services that will be rendered to include funeral escorts and honors. In such cases,
GSC will be responsible for planning, and coordinating the funeral services and
arrangements, unless otherwise directed.

10.20. COMMANDER OF FUNERAL ESCORT

The Commander of a Funeral Escort will be as follows

a. Of the President or an ex-President: as directed by the Secretary,

DILG.

b. Of the Secretary of DILG/Chairman, NAPOLCOM as directed by

Vice-Chairman, NAPOLCOM.

c. Of the Undersecretary of DILG for Peace and Order as directed by the

Secretary of DILG/Chairman, NAPOLCOM

d. Of the CPNP or a former Chief PNP: as directed by the Secretary of

DILG

e. Of an officer: an officer of the ,same grade; if non such be present, as

directed by the unit/office Director/Supervisor.

f. Of a cadet: a cadet of the same class.

g. Of a police non-commissioned officer of one of the first three grades:

by a police non-commissioned officer of the highest grade available
 Ceremonies 144
10.21. POLICE ATTENDANCE AT A FUNERAL

a. 1) The funeral of a person in the police service is attended by such personnel

as directed by the Director/Supervisor of unit/office"

2) All persons in the police service not in information attending police

funerals will follow the mourners in order of rank, seniors in front. All persons in the police
service in uniform attending in their individual capacity will face the casket and execute the
hand salute at any time when the casket is being lowered into the grave, during the firing of
the volley, and while Taps is being sounded. During the prayer or blessing of the remains at
the graveside, police personnel in uniform remain covered and vow their heads. Honorary
pallbearers in uniform will conform to those instructions when not in motion.

3) Police personnel in civilian clothes in the above case will stand at

attention uncovered, and hold the headdress over the left breast.

4) The chaplain will remain uncovered except in inclement weather o if

religious rites prescribed head covering.

5) During a police funeral, the drum shall be muffled and covered with
black crepe or thin' black serge.

6) The regimental colors shall not be placed in mourning or draped

except when ordered by the Secretary of Interior/Chairman, NAPOLCOM. When so ordered,
two (2) streams of black crepe 7 feet long and about 12 inches \-vide. attached to the ferrule
below the spearhead shall be used.

7) Uniform - Uniform during the Funeral is as prescribed.

b. When in formation under arms. - Execute as prescribed in drills under arms.

10.22. OFFICER AND OTHER GRADES OUT OF RANKS

a. At a police funeral all persons in the police service in uniform or civilian

clothes attending in their individual capacity or as honorary pallbearers will stand at attention
uncovered, and hold the headdress over the left breast while the casket is being carried from
the caisson to and lowered into the grave during the firing of the volley while Taps is being
sounded, and during the services at the grave. . During the prayer, they also bow their heads.
In cold or inclement weather, they will remain covered and will remain executing the hand
salute as the casket is carried past them. to grave or until it is carried beyond saluting
distance. They~ will a1.so execute the hand salute during the firing of the volleys and while
Taps is being sounded. This will also apply to the chaplain except during the reading of the
service.

b. While the casket is being carried from the house to the caisson to the church,
or from the church to the caisson, they will stand at attention uncovered and place the
headdress over the left breast In cold or inclement weather however, they will remain
covered and will execute the hand salute
 Ceremonies 145

c. They will salute the casket as it passes in any police funeral at any time or
place, by facing the casket, assuming the position of attention uncovering placing the
headdress over the left breast. In cold or inclement weather they will remain covered and will
execute the hand salute.

d. The active pallbearers while carrying the casket will remain covered; at other
times they will conform to the above prescription.

10.23. WHERE REMAINS OF THOSE ACTIVE SERVICE ARE TURNED OVER TO

THE RELATIVES

The Camp Director of any post, camp, depot, or other station will furnish a firing
squad of not to extend eight (8) men and a bugler, preferably from the branch of the
deceased, to attend the funeral of a person who has died in active police service and whose
remains have been turned over to the relatives or friend of the deceased, and provided that
such a firing squad can be furnished without interfering with duties of the man composing it,
and without expense to them or the Government, except in the use of available transportation.

10.24. WHERE THE FUNERAL OF THOSE ON RETIRED LIST Nor HELD AT

POLICE POST

a. Where the funeral of an officer or PNCO on the retired list occurs other than
at a police post, base, camp or station, but near one, a funeral escort maybe ordered by the
commander of the post, base, camp, or station which is nearest to the place where the funeral
is to be held. Such escort will not exceed the number prescribed in paragraph 10.18 for the
rank of the deceased officer or PNCO

b. Where the funeral occurs other than at a police post, base, camp or station and
too remote there from to justify the sending of the eight (8) men and a bugler preferably from
the branch of the deceased, a funeral escort may be ordered. by the proper commander under
provisions of paragraph 18.
 Ceremonies 146

SECTION XI

WREATHLAYING CEREMONIES

11.1 GENERAL

Wreathlaying is a historical function that immortalizes great men, events and places.
This activity is usually being given by visiting dignitaries ,ranking government and police
officials to pay tribute, homage and respect to a particular place or person or significant
occasions and dates that are of great importance to a history of a person .This ceremony is
usually done to the following places:

a. Rizal Monument
b. Libingan ng mga Bayani
c. Bonifcacio Monument
d Aguinaldo Shrine
e. Corregidor Shrine
f. Tejeros Convention Market
g. Dambana ng Kagitingan
h. Other national shrine and sites.

II.2 ORGANIZATION

The ceremonial elements is composed of the following:

a. Escort of Honor of thirty six (36) men (or as the space area warrants) with one (I)
Sr Inspector or Inspector as Escort Comdr and one (1) guidon bearer.

b. Two (2) wreath bearers or more (in even numbers) depending on the number of
wreaths to be laid with Sr Inspector/Inspector as Wreath Commander.

c. Firing Party of twenty one (21) men (3x 7) with Firing Party Comdr.

d. Band of not less than twenty five (25) members with a conductor. A drummer and
three (3) buglers will be made as part of the band.

e. Two (2) color bearers for the National and Unit colors with two (2) color guards.

11.3 FORMATION OF TROOPS

a. The members of the Escort of Honor form at both sides of the path where the
Guest of Honor and Host will walk in going towards Point 4 (where the wreath is to be laid
facing each other and maintaining proper interval between each other. The Escort
Commander and the guidon bearer behind him position themselves approximately six paces
 Ceremonies 147
to the front of the marker (Point 2)) where the Guest of Honor and the Host will stand for the
ceremony.

b. The National and Unit color bearers and guards are prepositioned at both sides
of the tomb, monument or shrine with the National Color at the right sides.

c. The firing Party are formed approximately ten (10) paces to the right of
monument, tomb or shrine.

d. The wreath detail position themselves at a point and ready to assist the GOH
in bringing the wreath to Point.

e. The band is formed at vicinity right area dictates.

11.4 PROCEDURE

a. The GOH alights from his car at Point 1 where he will be met by the host (If
the host is riding in a car with the guest of honor (s), both will alight at the same point ).At
this time, the ceremonial troops are brought to attention by the Escort Commander.

b. The host escorts the GOH to Point 2. In accordance with protocol

requirement. The Host stays at the left side of the GOH. Other guest stay behind them.

c. As soon as the GOH and the host have occupied their respective position at
Point 2, the Escort commander faces the troops and command . TANGHAL TA. He assumes
his original position. Then he and the guidon bearer execute the appropriate salute.
d. Band plays the National Anthem of the GOH (if he is the head of state or
ambassador) and then followed by the playing of the Philippine National Anthem. The
GOH is not a head of a state or ambassador, only the Philippine National Anthem will be
played.

e. After the National Anthem has been played, Escort commander together with the
guidon bearer executes the order arms. He faces the troops and commands: ABA, TA He
faces about , salutes and says, "Ginoo, handa na po ang pag-aalay. "The escort commands
together with the guidon bearer goes to the side giving way to the GOH and Host.

Note: In cases where there are more than one wreathlayers, the most junior will lay
the wreath first.

f. Band plays the Pilipinas kong Mahal

g. At the first note of the music, the Host invites the GOH to move forward.

h. As the GOH and the Host approach the wreath the wreath commanders
command DAMPOT BULAKLAK NA and simultaneously signals them to proceed toward
Point 4 followed by the GOH and Host. Other guest remain in their position at Point 2. this
instance, the drummer and three (3) buglers who were initially with the band position
themselves near the monument.
 Ceremonies 148

i. When the honoree and host reaches Point 3 the Host stops. The GOH and
wreath Details continue walking until they reach Point 4 (Note: the movement from Point 2
to Point 4 should be completed to coincide with the last note of the music Pilipinas Kong
Mahal)

j. At Point 4, the Wreath Commander immediately positioned himself at the site

of the monument facing the front. The GOH by the wreath bearers, lays the wreath then step
back to Point 4. Wreath bearers salute the monument then face about and occupied their
respective position at both sides of the monument.

k. At this instance, Escort, Commndr Commands TANGHAL TA. Then

together with the guidon bearers they execute present arms.

l. Drummers sounds four (4) ruffled drums. Everybody in the area renders
appropriate respect/salute.

m. After the ruffled drums had been sounded, the firing party fires three (3)
volleys while the bugler sounds the Taps.

n. At the last note of Taps, Escort Comdr and the guidon bearer execute order
arms. He commands the troops BABA TA

o. The band plays Sampaguita while the GOH is moving to Point 4 to Point 3
where he will join the Host.

p. From Point 3 the GOH and Host proceed back to Point 2.

q. The band ceases playing music as soon as the GOH and Host have occupied
their original position at Point 2.

r. Escort Comdr and with the guidon bearer move to their original position at
Point 2. Escort Comdr execute about face and commands TANGHAL TA. He again
executes about face and together with the guidon bearer their execute present arms. After the
honoree has acknowledge the salute, the Escort Comdr and the guidon bearer execute order
arms. The Escort Comdr and faces about and commands BABA TA. Again he faces about
and executes hand salute to the GOH and says “TAPOS NA PO ANG PAGAALAY or
“SIR, THAT ENDS THE CEREMONY”.

s. the GOH acknowledges the salute and may motion the Escort Cmdr to come
forward of the GOH and executes hand salute.

t. Escort Comdr moves forward, halts two (2) faces in front of the GOH and
executes hand salute.

u. The GOH acknowledges he salute and shake hands with him.

v. Thereafter, Escort Cmdr one (1) step backward and again salute the GOH who
intern acknowledges the salute. Escort Cmdr goes back to his original position facing the
front.
 Ceremonies 149
w. The GOH and Host faces each other. THE Host will render appropriate
respect/salute and exchange pleasantries with the GOH.

II.5 DIAGRAMS

Attached are diagrams depicting the formation of troops during wreathlaying

ceremonies in the following places:

a. Diagram 1-2- Rizal Monument,Luneta

b. Diagram 3 - Libingan Ng Mga Bayani
c. Diagram 4 - Dambana Ng Kagitingan
d. Diagram 5 - Bonifacio Monument, Caloocan
e. Diagram 6 - Aguinaldo Shrine
f. Diagram 7 - Tejeros Convention
g. Diagram 8 - Corregidor Shrine
h. Diagram 9 - Police Heroes Monument
 Ceremonies 150

SECTION XII

THE POLICE WEDDING

12.1 GENERAL

The police wedding is like any other weddings except for the following
differences: members of the PNP in the bridal party are in uniform and the bride and
groom usually leave' the chapel or church under the traditional arch of swords. Another
difference that during the reception, the groom's sword will be used by the bride to cut
the piece of cake. The uniform worn is in accordance with the kind of wedding which
was planned by the concerned parties. Members of the PNP, however, usually wear dress
white/white duck
and gala uniform during such occasion.

The arch of swords takes place immediately following the ceremony when the
couple leaves the chapel or church. Prior to the conduct of this, however,
approval/permission from the officiating chaplain or clergyman must be sought especially
when it is being done inside the chapel or church considering that said place is a
sanctuary.

12.2 PLANNING THE WEDDING

The date and time of the wedding are decided by the couple, their parents and
some close relatives. Likewise, they decide on where the wedding ceremony and the
reception have to take place. In planning the wedding, the following are to be considered:

a. Religious Ceremonies
b. Parents
c. Best man for the Groom
d. Maid of Honor for the bride
e. Bouquet or corsage for the Bride
f. Rings for the Bride and Groom
g. Wedding Gown for the Bride
h Reception
i. Wedding trip

12.3 PREPARATION FOR THE WEDDING

a. The chapel

The chapel is reserved on a first come, first served basis. Permission for its use
shall be obtained as soon as possible, in order to ensure the desired date and hour for the
wedding. Reservation for the chapel should be done by the couple with the chapel
authority at least one month prior to the scheduled date.
 Ceremonies 151

b. The chaplain

As in the case of all weddings, it is important that engaged couple consult their
chaplain (clergyman) at least one month before the schedule of the wedding. The
chaplain will advise the couple concerning such requirements as medical tests, obtaining
the marriage license and other requirements. Although most chaplains prefer to officiate
at ceremonies held in the chapel to which they are assigned, a clergyman from the
coup!.::'.; home church may assist the ceremony if this is acceptable to the chaplain and is
arranged beforehand. The official chaplain (clergyman) will be in accordance with the
religious preference of the couple.

c. The Music

In conformity with the religious aspect of wedding ceremonies, the organist will
play traditional wedding music and selections from the library of sacred music available
in the chapel or church.

d. Flowers and Decorations

Flowers and decorations may be done by church authorities. It may also be done
by the concerned parties. However, decorations which require alterations to the chapel or
church or which are to be fastened to the pews, walls or items of furniture should have
prior clearance and approval by the chaplain (clergymen).

12.4 REQUIREMENTS FOR THE WEDDING

The following are to be secured a month or so prior to the schedule of the

wedding:

a. Birth Certificates for both groom and bride.

b. Baptismal Certificates also for groom and bride.

c. Background information of the bride in case the groom is a police officer and
vice versa

d. Request permission to marry Subject to Letter form thru Channel, addressed

to the Regional Director/Director of NSUs or Directorate for Personnel.

e. Certification that the prospective groom and bride have undergone series of
seminars on family planning from Population Commission Centers or from Rural Health
centers.

f. Certification that the couple has undergone pre-marriage counselling at NHQ

PNP chapel, Camp Crame, or the Recoms Chapel or any of the local church.
 Ceremonies 152
g. Certification that the marriage has been announced several times in
churches/church residence of the bride and groom.

12.5 WEDDING ENTOURAGE

a. The entourage is normally composed of the following:

1.) Sword Sponsor 7.) Coin Bearer

2.) Groom with parents 8.) Flower Girl/s
3.) Ushers 9.) Secondary Sponsors
4) Bestman 10.) Bridesmaid/s
5.) Principal Sponsors 11.) Bride with Parents
6) Ring Bearer 12.) Maid of Honor

b. The bride and groom may have one attendant each, these would be the
bestman and maid of honor. The bride will ask a sister or close relative, or an intimate
friend to be her maid of honor. The bride can also have bridesmaids. They are close
friend of the bride and usually include a sister or .relative or relative of the groom . Other
members of the bridal attendants are the following: flower girls with the age of 4-7 years
old, coin bearer and ring bearer (4-5 years old).

c. Best Man

The groom chooses his ,best man and ushers from among his closest
friends or relatives. His best man may be a brother or intimate friend. The best man is the
groom’s aide. It is his duty to insure the smooth administration of the rites. Before the
ceremony, the best man checks on the groom’s uniform, marriage license, wedding ring
and swords. He checks what has to be signed, and that everything is in order. He notifies
the ushers to be at the chapel or church at least twenty minutes before the ceremony and
he will arrive with the groom to be sure that the latter is not late and he is properly
dressed. Following the couple’s vows, the best man joins in the recessional in which he is
customarily escorts the maid of honor. Afterwards, he may hurry on to the place of the
reception and check details. He does not stand in the receiving line at the reception, but is
near the groom to be further help.

d. The Ushers

The ushers represent not only the groom but the families of the bride and
the groom as well. They act as unofficial hosts, greeting the guest in a pleasant manner,
and are escorts in the chapel, church and in the place of reception When ushering, the
ushers should not wear the swords. They may however, leave their swords at a place
convenient for the arch of sword (sabers) ceremony.

e. Secondary Sponsors

Secondary sponsors are selected by the couple from their close relatives
and friends. Usually the secondary sponsors are composed of three pairs and their duties
are the following:
 Ceremonies 153

1.) Candle - The first pair is usually designated as the pair to light the
candles.

2.) Veil - The second Pair is designated to pin the veil on the couple
.
3) Chord - The third group will put on the chord to the couple.

f. Principal Sponsors

The principal sponsors are selected persons usually of higher age bracket
than that of the couple and coming from relatives, family friends and senior officers of
the PNP chosen by the couple. The main duty of the principal sponsors is to act as
secondary parents to the couple.

g. Sword Sponsors

Sword sponsors are selected officers of the PNP usually composed of

classmates of the groom to perform the arch of swords. The sword sponsors is composed
of a minimum of four (4) pairs and a maximum of eight (8) pairs, depending upon the
size of the chapel or church.

12.6 WEDDING CEREMONY

a. The Processional

Normally, the bridal entourage is arranged in the order stated below ,during the
processional, however, varies depending upon the couple and church authorities.

1.) Sword sponsor

2.) Groom with parents
3.) Ushers
4.) Bestman
5.) Principal Sponsor
6.) RingBearer
7.) Coin Bearer
8.) Flower Girl
9.) Secondary sponsor
10.) Bridesmaid/s
11.) Bridesmaids with parents
12.) Maid of honor

b. Procedure

As soon as the bridal entourage has been formed at a designated or appropriate

area in the vestibule as in (Figure I), the Sword sponsors march in column of two's
towards the altar with the most senior or designated commander, giving the commands.
 Ceremonies 154
When the first two .elements have reached the point which is in line with the first pew,
the Commander commands, TILAP, TO, As soon as they are hnltl1d. the Sword
Sponsors automatically execute center face. They maintain said formation until the last
element of the bridal entourage has passed and everyone has reached their respective
positions on the altar as in (Fig.' 2) the sword sponsor commander then commands
PALABAS RAP and then marches towards the entrance of the chapel or church. The
groom who had been prepositioned near the altar waits for the bride, When the bride
reaches the point between the groom and the maid of honor, she pauses about three paces
from the groom. Then the groom advances tomeet her where her father pauses for the
bride to take the groom's left arm. The father of the bride then gives his daughter in
marriage and goes to his seat The couple proceeds to their designated seats. The chaplain
then gives the signal for the guests to take seats. The ceremony follows.

c. The Recessional

1) The Bride and Groom are the first to leave the chapel, with the bride on
the right side of the groom. The Maid of honor and the Best Man walk out together,
followed by the Bridesmaids and ushers in pairs. The Recessional will be conducted in
the order in (Fig. 3).

2) Arch of Swords (Sabers) Ceremony - Before the end of the ceremony,

the sword Sponsors again form at the vicinity of the entrance of the chapel. They march
towards a designated area where the bridal entourage will form for the recessional with
the designated commander, giving commands. Upon reaching the designated point, the
Sword commander commands, TILAP, TO: the Sword Commander halts and
automatically execute center face. As soon as the Bride and groom and other members of
the bridal entourage are formed and ready for the recessional, the Sword Sponsor
Commander then commands, PALABAS, RAP first and then PASULONG KAD. The
sword sponsor marches towards a designated area outside of the chapel or church where
the arch of swords has to be conducted. upon reaching the area, the sword Sponsor
Commander then commands, TILAP, TO. The Sword commander halt and
automatically execute center face. As soon as the Bride and Groom are approximately 6
paces before the first elements of the Sword Sponsor, the Sword Commander commands,
ANTABAY, BUNOT, KALIS. The Sword sponsor execute the command wherein each
sword/saber bearer raises his right arm with the sword/saber, rotating in a clockwise
direction, so that the cutting edge of the sword/saber will be on top, thus forming a true
arch with his opposite across the isle. As the groom and bridge pass by a pair of swords
sponsors, the swords of that particular pair will be rotated with the snap and hitting each
other’s swords thereby producing a sound. After which the pair automatically executes
carry sword. This series of sword ceremonies is done up to the last pair of swords
sponsor.

12.7 WEDDING RECEPTIONS

a. The type of reception as well as the number of guests to be invited,

depends upon the choice of the couple. A reception may be held at home, in an officers'
club, at a hotel or other similar places which the-couple may select
 Ceremonies 155
b. A receiving line may also be formed at the entrance of the place of
reception. An example of a receiving line is indicated in (Fig. 4). To greet the bridal
party, one offers like the following "Best Wishes to the Bride and Congratulations to the
Bridegroom.

c. Seating Arrangements - A presidential table is always prepared in the

reception area. Usually, the Groom and Bride, Principal sponsors, chaplain or clergy-man
the parents are seated at the presidential table. The seating arrangements at the
presidential table will be determined by authorities from the place of reception.

.12.8 WEDDING PRESENTS

The giving of gifts to newly-wed couples is a custom among people

every-where that is bound too by rules to which guests should observe. These are as
follows:

a When a friend or relative is so close to either bride. or groom, he/she

shall send a present/s to the couple. However, one is not required to sent a present to
everyone who sends a wedding invitation or announcement.

b. A person who accepts an invitation to a wedding reception may send or

bring along a gift. (If he/she regrets the invitation, he/she is not obliged to send a gift)

c. Gift-givers need not send more than they can afford (but rather must
always remember that quality is superior to quantity).

d. When invited to many wedding receptions, a person gives presents only

to his or her classmates or close friends, whether he/she attends the ceremony or not.

e. When the invitation is limited to the wedding ceremony (which means

there is reception, which happens out very seldom), the invited person may give a
present depending upon his/her friendship with the couple.

f. When there are no invitations or announcements, a person may give or

send a present to the couple according to one's friendship with them. Every young couple
enjoy a wedding present and will always treasure such.

12.9 WEDDING FINANCES

Customarily, financial expenditures for the wedding are shouldered by the groom.
However, there are instances when the bride contributes a sum in order to reduce the
financial burden of the groom.

12.10 WEDDING INVITATIONS

a. It is a must that wedding invitations should be received by the invited

persons at least one (1) week prior to the ceremony.
 Ceremonies 156

b. Normally, the following are printed in the wedding invitation:

1.) Names of the members of the wedding entourage.

2) The date and time of the wedding.

3) Place of the wedding ceremony.

4) Place of reception.

5) The suggested attire.

 Ceremonies 157

SECTION XIII

OATH TAKING

13.1 GENERAL

Oath taking may be a separate and distinct ceremony or integrated as a part of a

formal ceremony such as flag raising.

13.2 OATH TAKING ( INDOOR PART OF A PROGRAM)

a. As soon as the emcee announces that an oath taking ceremony will take
marcher of the group comes in front, faces the audience and says: MGA TAONG
MANUNUMP , PUMAGITNA, KAD. The persons who will take their oath rise seats
and orderly form a line in front of the marcher facing the

b. The marcher faces about, salutes the person who will administer the oath
reports: "Ginoo, ang mga taong manunumpa nandito na po lahat. "

c. The person who will administer the oath rises, acknowledges the salute,
proceeds to the rostrum and says: "Mangyaring itaas ang kamay at sumunod sa akin”.
He then administers the oath.

d After the oath taking, the person who administered the oath shakes hands
with the oath takers, after which, the marcher again says: MGA TAONG NANUMPA,
SUMALUNAN NA, The oath takers go back to their seats and sit down on signal from
the marcher.

e. The next number of the program follows.

11.3 OATH TAKING (OUTDOOR)

a. The oath takers are initially positioned opposite the troop commander nnd
staff.

b. As soon as the emcee announces the oath taking, the marcher commands:
MGA TAONG MANUNUMPA,PASULONG NA. They march forward and stop
approximately six paces away from the troop commander.

c. The marcher salutes and reports to the troop commander: "Ginoo, ang
mga taong manunumpa narito po lahat. "
 Ceremonies 158
d. The troop commander acknowledges the salute and directs his staff to
march at the side. The person who will administer the oath goes to the rostrum and says:
"Mangyaring itaas and kanang kamay at sumunod sa akin. " He then administers the
oath.

e. After the oath taking, the VIPs shake hands with the oath takers. The
marcher then commands the oath takers to occupy their positions which may be:

1) Designated seats in the grandstand, or

2) A single line to the right of the troop commander and staff facing the
troops to witness the pass-in-review if there is any.
 Ceremonies 159

SECTION XIV

OPENING AND GRADUATION CEREMONIES

14.1 GENERAL

This section provides the standard procedures and sequences to be adopted

for the Course Opening and Closing Ceremonies in the conduct of any unit training.

14.2 DEFINITION OF TERMS

a. Course- includes all courses, seminars and training conducted by

units.
b. Party- includes the host, guest/s, and distinguished personalities
who are supposed to have seats or places at the stage or similar places.

14.3 SEQUENCES

a. Opening Ceremony (Indoor)

1.) Processional

2) Entry of Colors (Indoor only)

3) National Anthem (Mass singing)

4) Invocation

5) Presentation of Students

6) Declaration of Opening of the Course

7) Introduction of the guest speaker

8) Speech

9) Presentation of Plaque to the Guest (if any)

10) Exit of Colors (Indoor only - optional)

11) Mass Singing of Pilipinas Kong Mahal

12) Recessional
 Ceremonies 160

b. Closing Ceremony (Indoor)

1) Processional

2) Entry of Colors (Indoor only)

:3) National Anthem (Mass Singing:)

4) Invocation

5) Opening Remarks

6) Presentation of Candidates for Graduation

7) Declaration of Graduates

8) Distribution of Certificates of Awards

9) Introduction of the Guest Speaker

10) Speech

11) Presentation of Plaque to the Guest Speaker (optional)

12) Mass Singing of Pilipinas kong Mahal

13) Exit of colors (Indoor only -optional)

14) Recessional

14.4 PROCEDURES

a. Opening Ceremony (Indoor)

1) Processional- This part of the program marks the entrance of the party.
Here, the students arise and stand at attention. To make simultaneous movements, a
command may be necessary or any form of signal that f!1ay serve as cue. The party
members, on other hand, position themselves right in front of their respective designated
seats and remain standing facing the students.

2) Entry of Colors - Colors to be used are the national color and . unit color
and (training unit)

3) Singing of National Anthem - The cue when to start the singing of

National Anthem may be given by the one designated to lead and shall position
himself/herself at the middle before the students. After the singing, everybody remains
standing for the invocation.
 Ceremonies 161

4) Invocation - The minister or the designated person who will lead the
invocation proceeds to the podiums/rostrum after singing will take their seats. Again, a
pre-arranged signal shall be made as a cue for everybody to sit at the same time.

5) Presentation of Students- Students shall be presented to the commander

to his to his representative who has the authority to declare the opening of the course by
the school commandant or by his authorized representative. The statement during the
presentation shall include the number of students, title of the course and the
recommended date of opening. The students rise upon presentation at a pre-arranged cue.

6) Declaration of Course Opening - At this portion the Commander. Or his

representative declares the course open. The moment the commander leaves the
rostrum/podium, the students in coordinated movement sit down.

7) Introduction of the Guest Speaker - Everybody remains seated while the

guest speaker is being introduced. The moment the guest speaker is presented, everybody
rises.

8) Speech of the Guest Speaker - Everybody remains standing unless told

by the guest speaker to sit down. At the end of his speech, everybody rise will a round of
applause.

9) Presentation of Plaque of Appreciation to the guest (if any). This portion is

optional.

10) Exit of Colors. (optional)

11) Mass Singing of Pilipinas kong Mahal

12) Recessional- Exit of the party and the program ends.

Note: Headgears shall be taken off upon entry to the hall.

b. Opening Ceremony (Outdoor)

Basically, the sequences and procedures are the same except that there will
be no entry and exit of colors. Colors will be in place at the ceremonial area before the
start of the ceremonies.

c. Graduation Ceremony (Indoor)

1) Processional - This is the first part of the program which mark.,;

the entrance of the party. Here, the students rise and sta:1d at attention. The party
members, upon reaching ~he stage, will position themselves right in front of their
respective designated seats and remain standing.
 Ceremonies 162

2) Entry of Colors.

3) National Anthem- The clue when to start the singing of National

Anthem shall be given by the one designated to lead. after the singing, everybody
remains standing for the invocation.

4) Invocation- The minister or the designated person who will lead

the invocation approaches the podium/rostrum after the singing and proceeds with the
invocation. After the invocation, everybody takes their respective seats. A prearranged
signal will be made as a cue so that everybody will sit down at the same time.

5) Opening Remarks - This is an address by a Class Valedictorian.

In courses where there is no class standing, the most senior or the class president in that
order, will render the opening remarks. Here, he will proceed directly to the podium to
deliver his speech. The class need not stand up. At the end of the speech, the class will
rise with a round of applause. As he steps down and leaves the stage, the class
sits down.

6) Presentation of Candidates for Graduation - the candidates for

graduation shall be presented by the school commandant or by the training director! s for
the in-service Unit Training. The presentation statements shall include the number of
candidates, and the course title among others. In this part, the candidates rise as soon as
they are presented. Pre-arranged signal is needed in order to achieve a coordinated and
simultaneous movement.

7) Declaration of Graduates - the Commander or his authorized

representative by virtue of his authority, declares the candidates for graduation as
graduates. Right after the declaration of graduates, the graduating class gives a round of
applause and then sits down.

8) Distribution of Certificates and Awards - the Adjutant or the

administrative officer reads the orders for those who will graduate, followed by the
giving of certificates and awards in that order for outstanding students. This distribution
of certificates maybe given in bunch or individually and the sequence shall be at the
option school or unit concerned. The awards, however, shall be given and be given and
received individually.

9) Introduction of the Guest Speaker - Everybody will be seated

while the guest speaker is being introduced. The moment the guest speaker is presented,
everybody rises.

10) Speech - Everybody remains standing unless told by the guest

speaker to sit down. At the end of his speech, everybody rises with a round of applause.

11) Presentation of Plaque of appreciation if any, to the Guest speaker,

12) Mass Singing of "Pilipinas kong Mahal" followed by unit or

School hymn, if any - the one designated to lead positions himself at the 'center in front
of the class. After the singing, he goes back to his place.
 Ceremonies 163

13) Exit of colors.

14) Recessional- End of the program.

d. Graduation Ceremony (Outdoor)

Basically, the sequences and procedures are the same except that there are
no entry and exit of colors. Colors are in place at the ceremonial area before the start of
the ceremonies.

14.5 OTHER DETAILS

a. A Master of Ceremonies in this particular program is optional.

b. Parade and Review

Parade and review shall only be tendered during graduation in honor of the
graduating class and also for the guest of honor. The parade sequences and procedures
are similar with that of giving honors to awardees. The program proper is conducted in
such manner. However, there are modifications in the processional, the playing of
National Anthem and the recessional. The processional is substituted with the marching
of graduating class with the colors towards the grandstand being led by the troop
commander. In the recessional, the graduating class exits in the manner and sequence at
the option of the School or unit concerned. When the band plays the National Anthem,
everybody renders hand salute.

c. Appropriate authorized Representative of the Commander:

Appropriate persons to act as authorized representatives of the commander

or person to act in his behalf to declare the opening of the course or to declare the
graduates are the Deputy City Director, the Executive Director and any Senior Staff in
Training or their equivalent, in that order.

d. Cue and Signal

Cue or any form of signal must be established to achieve a coordinated

simultaneous execution by the graduates.

GRADUATION CEREMONIES (INDOOR)

Entry of Guests

Entry of Color

Singing of the National Anthem - To be led by the Band

 Ceremonies 164
Declaration of Graduates – By the highest Comdr/Head/Supervisor of the said
training.

Introduction of the Guest of Honor – By Director of School or Training Center

Remarks/Speech of the Guest of Honor – ( No other speech/ remarks after the

Guest of Honor

Presentation of Plaque of Appreciation –

Exit of Color (optional)

Recessional

ENTRY AND EXIT OF COLOR

1. General Provisions

a. Entry and Exit of colors are normally conducted as part of indoor

ceremonies, especially, during the following:

1) Awarding Ceremony

2) Opening and Graduation Ceremonies

b. To be used are the national and host unit colors. In case there is a
designated color commander, he commands the color bearers and guards. If there is no
designated color Commander, the color bearer of the national color will be the one to
give the Command.

2. Procedure

a. Color bearer and guards are positioned outside the front doors and door
facing the. stage before the start of the ceremony. However, if the hall is quite big and
will take time for movement, colors and bearers could be positioned immediately behind
last row of audience. Color guards are at right shoulder arms while the bearers at carry
colors

b. When all the guests including the GOH have already arrived and sitted,
the emcee announces “ Everybody is requested to rise for the entry of Colors.”

c. The Color Commander (or National Color Bearer) commands

PASULONG KAD. At about 2-3 paces from the stage. Color commander commands
TILAP, TA. Color bearers and guards halt and without the orders execute color turn,
Drum rolls are conducted while color bearers and guards are marching.

d. Mass Singing of National Anthem follows . Color guards are present arms
during the mass singing and return to right shoulder arms commander then commands
SUMALUNAN, NA. As the command of execution, in the stage, National color with
 Ceremonies 165
bearer and guard move to the right of the stage, while the color bearer to the left crossing
each other's path on the process.

e. After placing the colors in their respective stand, color bearers and
guards return in front of the stage facing outward. Color commander PASULONG, KAD
and proceeds to a rest area outside of the ceremonial area.

3. Exit of Colors

a) Before the end of the speech of the GOH color bearer and guards
assembled at the starting point (near the door). After the Speech of the Guest of Honor
and some amenities at the stage, the emcee announces “Everybody is requested to remain
standing”, (or stand stand at the case may be) “For the exit of colors”.

b) Color commander commands PASULONG, KAD, Color guards are at

right shoulder arms while marching. Upon reaching about 2-3 pawces from the stage, out
command proceed to pick-up respective colors

c) After the colors are carried, color guards bearers (who are at right shoulder
arms) face about and on cue return to respective position in front of the stage.

d) Color commander commands PASULONG, KAD, then marches out.

Drum rolls are conducted while color bearers and guards are marching.

(Note: EMCEE should always shake hand with the speakers before and after his
speech
 PROTOCOL AND SOCIAL USAGE 166

CHAPTER III

PROTOCOL AND
USAGE
 PROTOCOL AND SOCIAL USAGE 167

SECTION I

GENERAL COURTESY AND SIMPLE AMENITY

Education and training are normal standards for commission in the police service.
A commission carries the obligation to observe the customs and traditions is the police
service. Among these traditions is the acceptance of an officer as a gentleman. The
officer must live up to this expectation.

A gentleman conducts himself with dignity and grace. It should appear that an
officer is tailor-made to become a gentleman. However, this does not follow
automatically. There are certain efforts to be done, largely in the field of social relations.

An officer shows breeding, and is therefore considered a gentleman by his

conduct in all dealings. He knows that:

1. Being late for any engagement is the height of bad manners.

2. A police Officer is expected to behave and conduct himself with dignity

and restraint. Under the present taste, smoking is a form of discourtesy.

3. It is bad taste to address a woman by her first name or nickname unless

she has indicated otherwise.

4. A Police Officer always ask himself to be permitted to smoke in the

presence of a woman especially in a room or in an automobile.

5. If a Police Officer invites a friend to his club, he should be out of sight

only when necessary.

6. A Police Officer stands when introduced to a woman, a clergyman, an

official or an old man.

7. It is not polite to compliment a person in a company because the others

might feel slighted.

INTRODUCTIONS

Introduction is the act of formally making persons known to each other or the art
of presenting one person to another. It follows either of the two types; self introduction
(or introducing one self), and the introduction by a third person.

When to Introduce

1. It is the duty of the host or hostess to introduce all his or her guests to
the guest of honor.
 PROTOCOL AND SOCIAL USAGE 168

2. At formal dinners, every gentleman is introduced to the lady he is paired

with, except when the introduction would be impractical.

3. Strangers when seated next to each other at a table should introduce

themselves to each other.

4. When taking a house guest not known in your neighborhood, he should

be introduced to all close acquaintances at a party.

When not to Introduce

1. A guest who have just arrived is not introduced to another who is just
leaving.

2. An animated conversation should not be interrupted to introduce another

person.

Whom to Introduce

1. The younger person is always introduced to the older.

2. A Police Officer is always introduced to a lady regardless of his rank.

3. A woman is never presented to any Police Officer regardless of his rank or

to any man, except to the President, a royal personage or a church dignitary

How to Introduce

In introduction, the words "introduce:' and "present" are equally proper. However,
the latter is more formal.

1. "Director Cruz, may 1 present (introduce) Supt Reyes. "

2. "Mr. President, I have the honor to present Mrs. Cruz. "

General Introduction

“Director Cruz, Supt Reyes.”

(The first name is spoken with a slightly rising inflection; the second is said as a
mere statement of fact)
 PROTOCOL AND SOCIAL USAGE 169

What to Say when Introduced

Under all possible circumstances, persons introduced to each other should say,
“How do you do?”

1. A member of the reigning family is addressed, "Your Royal Highness."

2. A foreign ambassador is addressed, "Your Excellency.”

3. A judge, doctor, or bishop is addressed, "Judge ", "Doctor," or “Bishop”

respectively.

4. A senator is addressed, "Senator" even if he is no longer in office.

5. An ex-president is introduced as "Mr. President" not as "Ex-President.”

6. Repetitions such as Director Cruz, Supt Reyes; Supt Reyes, Director

Cruz” should be avoided.

Handshakes in Introduction

1. Gentlemen always shake hands with each other when introduced.

2. It is very rude not to look into the countenance of the person whose hand
one takes. A smile rendered during the handshake is a very polite act.

3. The general rule is; a woman has the privilege of offering to shake hands
with a gentleman. However, she should not embarrass a man who has offered his hand.

GREETINGS

A greeting is nothing more than a brief expression of thought or salutation at a meeting.

How to Express Greetings

1. A "how are you?" greeting is correctly answered by "All right, thank

you."

2. "Good morning" and "good evening" are acknowledged by the same

greetings.

3. Other greetings may be acknowledged by a bow:

a. Formal Bow - This is done by joining the heels together with a

graceful bend over from the waist to the neck.
 PROTOCOL AND SOCIAL USAGE 170
b. Ordinary Bow - An ordinary bow is similarly executed as the
formal bow but more with ease.

c. Lady's Bow - This is done by slightly inclining the head and with a
smile as if to say "/ am glad to see you. "

4. In a public place, when a man greets' a woman, he gestures by half rising

and bowing gracefully.

5. Greetings are also acknowledged by lifting or tipping the hat

 PROTOCOL AND SOCIAL USAGE 171

SECTION II

CUSTOM OF THE SERVICE

Customs of the service are the long established practices or usages in the
Philippine National Police that have, by reason of constant and repeated observance,
acquire the character of unwritten norms of conduct.

Most of the customs and traditions in the PNP are embodied in regulations while
others are simply adopted to supplement the pleasantries of police life.

Despite the possible changes in customs to suits the needs of modern living, these
established precedents remains as the minimum accepted practices in the police service.

THE OFFICERS’ CODE

Official Statements

A Police Officer’s official statement, whether written or unwritten, is accepted

without reservation. Making false official statements knowingly is not only
Contrary police ethics but is also punishable under existing penal laws.

Responsibilities

It is a Police Officers' duty to prepare himself professionally for higher

responsibilities, The rank of a Police Officer carries with it commensurate responsibilities
When an officer accepts his commissionship, it is also his duty to prepare himself for
higher responsibilities.

Tact and Foresight

A Police Officer must not only be discreet in the exercise of his duties but must be
prepared to perform his task skillfully under all circumstances.

Personal appearances

A Police Commissioned Officer must at all times appear neat and clean. Nothing
destroys the respect and confidence of subordinates than the shadiness of their superiors.

Police Commissioned Officer - PNCO Relationship

 PROTOCOL AND SOCIAL USAGE 172
He must be able to exercise good leadership. The common familiar saying,
"familiarity breeds contempt" is particularly true in a Police Officer – PNCO relationship.

Familiarity as referred to here may not be the same as in other countries. In some
police forces, non-commissioned officers address their superiors by their first names or
nicknames, but the manner of conversation is not one that breeds familiarity or facile
relations. In the Philippines, custom does not allow such.

Welfare of the Police Personnel

The welfare of the Police Personnel should be the paramount concern of a Police
Officer.

THE PRIVILEGES OF AN OFFICER

1. Police personnel are required to extend unfailing obedience and loyalty to

senior commissioned and Police non-commissioned officers. Obedience should be shown
with respect and courtesy.

2. A senior Police Commissioned Officer is normally addressed by the use of

the word, "Sir" by PNCO's and NUP's.

For example: "Sir, a messenger wants to see you, " "Sir, do you wish to attend the
conference tomorrow?" "Yes, sir “

In Continental Europe, the address by rank is the accepted practice. In France,

Switzerland, Belgium, and Spain, for example, a senior officer is addressed “ Mi
Colonel," "Mi Coronel, " "Mon Capitane," "Mi Captain, " and "Yes. my Colonel. " In the
Philippines, custom does not allow such.

“ Monsieur” the equivalent of "Sir" is never used. In the Israel Defense Force,
junior officers and enlisted men can address their superiors by their nicknames but
always in a respectful manner.

3. A senior Police Officer is accorded the place of honor. In walking or

riding, junior sit, walks, or rides at the left or behind the senior officer.

4. Courtesy demands that an officer use polite words in a well modulated

tone to convey an order. The use of phrases, "I wish" or "desire" partakes of the full force
of a direct order.

5. A Police Officer enjoys the reputation of being a good creditor. He is

expected to settle all account promptly.
 PROTOCOL AND SOCIAL USAGE 173
CALLS NEW YEAR'S DAY

One of the beautiful traditions of the PNP is the New Year's call rendered by
Officers on their Commanding Officer. The Commanding Officer usually prescribes the
time of this call.

WELCOME FOR NEWLY ARRIVED OFFICER

A new arrival, after making the prescribed call on the Commanding Officer,
should be presented to the members of the Police Post at its social gathering.

GROUP ACTIVITIES

An Officer actively participates in an athletic, social, civic, and cultural activity of

his unit.

SICKNESS AND DEATH

1. Police Officers of a command visit another who is confined in the hospital

or sick at his quarters.

2. When a Police Officer's wife is sick, flowers are normally sent to her in
the name of the officers and ladies of the unit to which her husband belongs.

3. A Police Officer belonging to the same unit as the deceased, is assigned as

liaison officer between the command and the bereaved family. A similar courtesy may be
extended if a member of an officer's family dies. Flowers or wreaths are also sent in the
name of the officers and ladies of the unit.

MISCELLANEOUS CUSTOMS

POLICE OFFICER'S DEPORTMENT

1. The Police Officer's uniform should reflect the dignity of his organization.
Under no circumstances must his uniform be dishonored. A policeman in uniform should
behave with the dignity expected of him.

2. Leaning or sitting on desks is taboo. It is always proper to stand erect

and sit only when invited to do so
 PROTOCOL AND SOCIAL USAGE 174
COURTESY TO THE NATIONAL FLAG AND
THE NATIONAL ANTHEM

THE NATIONAL FLAG

a. The National Flag shall be displayed in all public office buildings, official
residences,. and public squares, and shall be hoisted at sunrise and lowered at sundown. It
should be on the mast at the beak of day, should remain flying throughout the day, but
shall not stay flying after the sun has actually set, except when specifically prescribed.
The flag-staff must be straight, tapering slightly and gently at the end.

b. The flag should never be used to return the salute of any individual or
organization. It should never be dipped by way of compliment or salute to or for any
person.

c. The only flag that float above the National Flag is a church pennant
symbolize “ God ab0ve the country”

d. The Flag, if flown from a flagpole should have its blue field on top in time
of peace and the red field on top in time of war.

e. In hoisting the Flag, it should be hoisted clear to the top end of the
flagpole which if planted on the ground, should be at a prominent place and higher than
the roof of the principal building in the compound, or of such height as would give the
flag a commanding position within the compound . If the pole is attached to a building , it
should be on top of its roof, and if placed at a window, it must project at an angle
pointing upward.

f. When the National Flag is used together with the flag of the PNP or civil
organization or with that of another nation, it must always be above or on the right of the
other flag. When the National Flag is displayed in a parade with those of foreign nations
it shall always be in front of the center of the line of the other flags.

g. When the Flag is passing in a parade or in review, the people, if walking,

should halt stand at attention, uncover and salute.

h. The Flag shall be displayed on Independence Day (June twelfth), on

National Heroes Day (November thirtieth), on Rizal Day (December thirtieth) of each
year on such other historic or special occasions as the President may designated not only
in squares, and institution of learning, but, whenever practicable, also in all private
buildings and homes from sunrise to sunset.

i. On national holidays of his country and other historic or special occasions

any alien whose country is at peace with the Philippines may display the flag of his
nation on any building or property owned or rented by him without simultaneously
displaying the f1ag of the Philippines. However, if the alien is located in a building or
other building or other property owned or rented by the Philippine Government, the flag
of the Philippines shall always be displayed when that of his country is displayed. When
so displayed, the f1ag of the alien's country should at least be the same as the Flag of the
 PROTOCOL AND SOCIAL USAGE 175
Philippines which shall be placed on the right of the former (left of the observer facing
the flags.)

j. When hoisting or lowering the Flag, no part thereof should touch the
ground, while the National Anthem is being played, the people salute. Moving vehicles
should stop, but passengers should remain inside and keep silent until the National
Anthem is finished.

k. The flag may be hoisted at half-mast in sign of mourning. To display the

flag .at half-mast, it must first be hoisted to full mast, allowing it to fly there for a
moment before bringing it to half-mast. From this position it may be hoisted but not
lowered. To lower the Flag at sunset or at any other time when ordered, it must again be
hoisted to full-mast before bringing it down.

l. The Flag shall never be festooned, and shall always hang with nothing to
cover its surface. It shall always occupy the highest place of honor and shall not be
placed under any picture, or below a person.

m. The Flag shall never be used as a staff or whip, covering for tables nor for
curtain of doorways. However, the Flag may be used by the PNP to cover the casket of
their honored dead, including deceased civilians who rendered services in the police
service or civil office of great responsibility. The white triangle of the sun and stars will
cover the head end of the casket, the blue stripe to the right, the red to the left end of the
deceased, with both colors should not be lowered to the grave nor allowed to touch the
ground. Wreaths of f1owers should not be placed 0:1 top of a flag-shrouded casket. A
small cross of flowers may be placed over the Flag as. a symbol for "God above country"

n. No imprint shall be made on the Flag nor shall it be marred by

advertisement, or in any manner desecrated. It shall not used as a pennant in the hood or
any part of a motor vehicle except in celebration of the Independence Day, 12th of June,
or on such other patriotic occasions as the President may designate.

o. It is inappropriate to use the Flag in a dancing pavilion or in any place

where hilarity is prevailing. its use inside or outside a cockpit, club or other places where
gambling or other vices are held is prohibited.

p. When the flag is used for unveiling ceremonies, it should not be allowed
to touch to the ground but should be carried aloft to wave out, forming a distinctive
feature of the ceremony. The Flag shall never be used as a covering for the statue.

q. A National Flag worn out through fair wear and tear, should not be thrown
on a garbage heap or used as rag. It should be reverently burned to avoid misuse or
desecration.

THE NATIONAL. ANTHEM

a. The National Anthem should not be played except on public acts of

official or semi-official in formal civil ceremonies, People in the immediate vicinity, if
outdoor, should face the band, uncover, stand at attention, and salute.
 PROTOCOL AND SOCIAL USAGE 176

b. Whenever band is present during the lowering of the Flag, the National
Anthem should played by the band, The Flag should be lowered slowly in such a manner
that termination of the lowering coincides with the last note of the flag, stand at attention
and salute, If the National Anthem played indoors, everyone should stand at attention and
face the band.

c. National Anthem should not be played or sung for mere recreation,

amusement or entertainment purposes in social gathering purely private in nature or at
political or partisan meeting or places of hilarious or vicious amusement. It should
however , be sung in schools so that the children may know it by heart.

MANNER OF SALUTING

a. Members of the PNP and those belonging to military and semi-military

organization in uniform should adopt the military police salute provided in their
regulations.

b. Civilian, if outdoors, should stand at attention place their right hands over
their hearts and if wearing hats, should uncover and hold the hats over their hearts.
Complete silence should be observed and no person should be allowed to walk around
while the ceremony is going on.
 PROTOCOL AND SOCIAL USAGE 177

SECTION III

CALLS AND CALLING CARDS

Officers are expected to be familiar with the etiquette on calling and leaving
calling cards. It is best to remember that necessary calls should always be made by
officers if time and circumstances permit. Although the practice of paying calls declined
during the war because of profound changes in the modes of living around the world, it is
still maintained in police and diplomatic circles to show deference and to establish
working relationships.

In gene ral, calls are made in order to pay one's respect to officials of higher rank
or to establish official and social contacts with the public officials, individual and social
groups. In the latter case, rank need not necessarily be considered. A PNP Officer who
arrives in a new station makes the calls first here or abroad. The reverse is true in
ordinary civilian life in that the new arrivals must wait for old residents of a community
to recognize them first. In the police, an officer reporting for duty at a new post must
ascertain immediately the current practices regarding calls on the commanding officer or
commanding general and other officers of the post.

SPECIAL RULES ON CALLS AND CARDS

1. Calls must be brief, usually not extending fifteen minutes. The time is
spent on light conversation which must be limited unless there are reasons for the caller
to stay longer. Normally, unless the hosts invite the callers to stay longer, they should
take leave after the call.

2. Gentlemen, single or married, call or leave cards with both men and
women in a household, including sons and daughters over 18 years of age. Ladies call on
ladies only. It is not proper for a lady to make a social call on or leave cards with. any
gentleman, regardless of the rank or position of the latter.

3. The initial call at the quarters of the commanding Officer should be made
within two days after arrival in the station. Necessary calls on other officers must be
made soon after that. Calls of more or less personal nature may be made later.

4. The initiative in making appropriate arrangements is on the callers. In the

police, these may be made with the Adjutant General, or with the Aide-de-Camp to the
commanding General. In civilian life, arrangements may be made with the secretary or
with an assistant of the official one wishes to call upon.

5. Callers arrive at the appointed time-not before or after. It is always safe to

allow more than usual for the distance to be covered. Extra time just before the appointed
hour may be spent driving in the immediate vicinity, but not in front of the place where
there be made. A few minutes allowance should be made for parking. Arrival at the front
steps or main entrance at the exact time could be assured only if will pay close attention
to all details of time and distance. The party called upon must likewise be ready to
receive the call at the appointed hour.
 PROTOCOL AND SOCIAL USAGE 178

6. A PNP officer making a call leaves two of his cards-one for the man called
upon and the other for his wife. The officer's wife leaves one personal card of her own for
the wife of man called upon. It is customary for the male caller to leave additional for
single men and women members of a family who are over 18 years of age in the
household. The women caller leaves additional cards for other women who are age 18
years of age in the household. The number of cards to be left, however is limited by
another rule-that is, not more than three cards of one kind should be left at one place. For
example, if the couple called upon has it number of children over 18 years old, the man
making a call may leave only one additional card for all. The wife in this situation may
leave two additional cards for the other ladies of the household. In strict usage, cards of
sons who are of age are also left for each lady and gentlemen in the household. Cards of
daughters of age are left for the ladies. The rule to leave not more than three cards of one
kind applies in all cases.

7 The husband-wife card (joint card) is not used when making post calls. In
police and military circles, it is a better form to use separate cards. Joint cards may be
used by women when making social calls' outside the police service as it is really the
women’s responsibility to fulfill certain social obligations of the family. For example,
when a wife makes a normal call alone, she may leave such a card just before departing.
An officer leaves a joint card. When calling alone, he may properly leave only his own
card.

8. If the official or person upon whom the call being made is not at home or
is otherwise not in a position to receive calls, cards may be left with one of the upper
corners card bent to indicate that the caller came in person. Some countries prescribe
corner for uniformity.

9. Calling cards are never handed directly to the officer or individual on

whom the call is being made. They maybe left on a convenient table near the front door,
or handed to the member of the household or aide opening the door. It is practical for the
persons being called upon to provide a card tray on a convenient place. Some people
leave a few cards on the tray as cue to identify such tray.

10. The writing of one's residence address in the lower right hand corner of
the card left at the place where the call is made makes it easy for the persons called upon
to communicate with the calling party. It is necessary to write Telephone Numbers in the
card for easy communication with the calling party.

11. The hours ('If cal1ing vary in different countries of the world. In the
absence of official guides, formal calls should be made on week days only. In a police
post, camp or station, the customary hours of cal1ing should first be ascertained by newly
arrived officers, Normally, calls may be made from 7:30 p.m. to 9:00 p.m. on weekdays
and 4:00 p.m. to 6:00 p.m. on Sundays. Calls are not normally made on Saturdays unless
urgent. Normally, calls should be made during the early evening hours but not during
dinner time.

12. When for some important reasons a call is made by a married woman
without being accompanied by her husband, the wife must also leave her husband's
calling card. This is permissible particularly when the husband is immediately too
 PROTOCOL AND SOCIAL USAGE 179
occupied with his new job to call on his superior officer and his wife. However, it should
always be made by both.

13. Calls on visit are always made when' one is informed of events like birth f
a baby, illness, arrival from abroad, and the like.

14. Calling cards must always be engraved. It is preferable not to have any
card at all rather than use printed cards, which show poor taste except in countries where
engraved cards are not available.

15. The double cards may be sent with a wedding present, flowers to a sick
person or flowers to a debutante. No message is necessary.

16. It is highly improper to use business cards in place of regular visiting

cards.

17. It is most considerate on the part of anybody to phone first before making
an ordinary social call or to inquire when it is convenient to do so.

18. Visiting cards should never be enclosed with Christmas greeting cards.

19. Although the use of calling card for the issuing of invitations is now
accepted, it is better to use regular invitation cards. In some countries, calling cards In
some countries, calling cards are never used for invitations.

20. The phrase "not at home" means simply that the person called upon is
either out of the house or not in a position to receive visitors.

21. First visits must always be returned. There is absolutely no excuse for
failure to do so formally. Visits made later depend on the degree of intimacy of parties
concerned.

22. In order to be able to make necessary calls promptly on arriving at new

station one should carry cards in accompanying baggage. In diplomatic and official life
the initials below are correct to convey appropriate messages, These initials are written in
the lower left hand corner of the calling cards, but only on one card of a group.

APPROPRIATE MESSAGES

Correct initials French English

P.p. pour presenter to present

p.r. pour remercier to express thanks

 PROTOCOL AND SOCIAL USAGE 180

p.f. pour feliciter to express congratulations

p.c pour condoler to offer sympathy

p.p.c. pour prendre conge to say good-bye, take leave

pf.n.a. pour feliciter nouvel an to express congratulations

When one receives cards with "p.p." "p.c." or "p.f. they are answered with
the cards of the person to whom they are sent with initials "p.r. which means "Thanks", A
PNP and his wife send such cards to their diplomatic colleagues and their wives, to
officials of the foreign government and their families with whom they are in frequent
contact, and to local residents who have entertained them during their tour of duty. It is
customary to leave cards in person upon those who have become close friends. Others
may be sent by messenger, or even by mail. The latter is accepted because it is
understood that departing persons are too busy to call in person.

SIZE AND STYLE OF CARDS

The size of the calling card depends on the length of the name and the tide
to be engraved. Initials should not be used if one wishes to be perfectly correct. However,
names customarily written out with first or middle initials may be engraved as such.
Some abbreviations are permissible, only if writing out the necessary information in full
would make the card look awkward. The advice of the engravers and people familiar with
calling cards should be sought.

In general, a man's card is narrower in shape and a married woman's card

more square. The man's card should be about 3 and 3/8 inches long, and from 1 1/4 to 1
3/4 inches high. The married woman's card is usually from 3 to 3 1/2 inches long and
from 2 1/4 to 2 1/2 by 2 1/2 inches. The use of a two-ply glade white card is in good
taste.

An officers calling card reflects taste. Only engraved cards are correct,
unless they are not available, with the rank and name normally written out in full (see
Appendix D-l). Script,. which is considered by conservative people as the most correct is
recommended. But shaded and antique Roman are getting more popular. Cards must be
engraved only in black and not be plate-marked. Matching envelopes go with cards.

SPECIFIC RULES ON FOR AND ENGRAVING

1. A PNP Officer must use his title (rank) on his calling card. Letters of
degrees, no matter how impressive, are never used. It would be in bad taste to do so.

2. Normally, when it is not important to include the specific assignment of

 PROTOCOL AND SOCIAL USAGE 181
an officer on his calling card, the information on rank, assignment and designation are
indicated on the lower right hand corner of the card. In this case,. only the full name
should appear on the middle of the card. If the information on present assignment is to be
shown, however, the rank precedes the full name at the middle of the card, and the
particular r position occupied indicated directly below. While these are the accepted
rules, an individual officer is at liberty to choose where to indicate his rank, regardless of
the inclusion of the assignment. Certain posts, e.g. PNP Attache’ or Aide –de-Camp,
must always be indicated. In the application of these rules, one must be guided by the
general appearance of the lines, and neatness in the grouping of names and words.

3. A married woman's card should match that of her husband's. Thus the
card of CInsp Jose Antonio Cruz' wife should read Mrs. Jose Antonio Cruz.

4. A single woman's social card is written in the form "Miss Maria Carmen
Cruz”.

5. ”Jr.” when written out must be small letters, as “junior." The son ceases to
be “Jr.” upon the death of his father unless the latter was a very well known and
,distinguished public figure.

6. Official cards of high government personages are somewhat larger that

ordinary man’s card , Names are not written; only the rank or position, and no other
information.

Example: "The Secretary of National Defense," "The Governor of Davao Sur” “ The
Mayor of Davao City."

7. The little of courtesy "The honorable" is never correct in a card. Neither

should an official refer to himself as "Honorable."

8. The use of nickname on calling cards is considered poor form. Women

are prone to use nickname even in cards

9 A man's social card is in the form "Mr. Jaime de los Reyes." The "Mr."
should be omitted when a young man is still dependent on his parents, or when he is not
yet twenty-one.

10. A girl over sixteen years of age uses "Miss" on her calling cards, which
must be of same size as her mother's.

11. When assigned abroad, an officer must ascertain specific practices in the
nation which may be at variance with those suggested here.
 PROTOCOL AND SOCIAL USAGE 182

SECTION IV

INVITATIONS, ACCEPTANCES, REGRETS

Written invitations may be issued in various ways, and the particular form
adopted depends upon the importance and character of the occasion (see Appendix D-2).
Invitations may be made by telephone but it is always safe to issue written ones. There
would then be no confusion on time, date. and place; and essential information pertaining
to the party will not be missed.

Formal invitations to luncheons, dinners, and receptions are engraved or

handwritten on appropriate cards measuring about 5 3/3 inches by 4 1/2 inches. The most
formal invitations issues on very special occasions. must normally be completely
engraved consistent with the facilities available in the locality. Others may be partially
engraved or completely handwritten or combination of both. Typewritten invitations are
not used. In diplomatic circles. one must observe the forms and practices in the country
of assignment.

Invitations to informal or semi-formal luncheons, cocktails, buffet suppers, tea,

etc., may be extended by using the fold-over card (informal) or pal1ially engraved cards
or by writing a short note. The use of visiting cards for this purpose is now accepted, but
it should be limited as much as possible. In the diplomatic service, they should never be
used even when extending an invitation to an informal gathering. As stated before, the
practice is not accepted in some countries.

Acceptance and ,regrets, sent in reply to invitations may be made by telephone or

in writing, depending on what is indicated on the invitation card. If made in writing, the
form and language must be the same as that in the invitation. A prompt reply is always
expected by the hosts, preferably within 24 hours upon receipt of invitation. It is essential
for them to know in the course of the preparation just how many of the invited will
attend. On certain occasions, it would enable also the hosts to invite others if some of
those originally invited cannot come. It is the height of
rudeness not to answer invitations.
.'

POINTERS OF INVITATIONS AND RESPONSES

1. All formal invitations are worded in the third person. Corresponding

acceptances and regrets are handwritten in the same form on good white stationery.

2. On informal cards, only the very basic information of time, date, place
nature party, etc., are required

3. For officers who must entertain very often, the use of partially engraved
card is recommended as they are most practical and least expensive. These cards are
appropriate for luncheons, receptions, cocktails, dinners, etc. When using this type of
card, the name of the person or couple invited, the time, date and placed and other
information are handwritten (never typewritten) in the spaces provided.
 PROTOCOL AND SOCIAL USAGE 183
4. On formal invitations, the only accepted abbreviation are: “Mr”, and
“Mrs” and “R.S.V.P.”The time, date and hour are always spelled out on engraved
invitations or when filing out a partially engraved card.

5. It is correct to extend even formal invitations by telephone. But these are

confirmed by the issuance of a formal card on which is written “ to remind “ or “ par
memoir.” Further acknowledgement of such card is not required.

6. The phrase “ honor of the company" is much better form than "pleasure of
the company” when extending invitations to high ranking government officials.

7. On formal or on visiting cards, some information need not be spelled out.

For example: Thurs. 14th, 4:00-6:00" is sufficient. In France and in other countries the
twenty four (24) hour system is used.

8. In France and the diplomatic communities, "R.S.V.P." is the correct form

for the French phrase ”respondez”." "R. S. VP." is correct in connection with social
activities outside diplomatic circle.

9. The phrase "In honor of…………………………………………….." or

"To meet……...................................... " is usually written at the top of the card.
The first one is more correct persons in high government and diplomatic positions. The
phrase "To meet” is usually more appropriate for new arrivals at a certain post or officials
in rank and position of the honoree is also stated.

10. On a completely engraved invitation, the phrase "In honor of…………"

follows the word describing the occasion. For example:”………………………..request
the pleasure of your company at a reception in honor of………………………….”

11. An invitation with an "R.S.V.P." must be answered either by telephone

or in writing. If the "R.S.Y.P." indicates a telephone number, the invitation may be
answered by telephone, otherwise in writing. The written answer to an invitation must
always be in the third person and in the same form as the invitation itself. If the
acceptance is to be made to another location either by telephone or in writing, the exact
address or telephone number be indicated clearly under the "R.S. Y.P."

12. When appropriate, the position of the one attending to the acceptances and
regrets like "social secretary" or "aide-de-camp" indicated below the "R. S. Y.P." In the
absence of this, reply to an invitation is addressed to the host or hostess.

13. Black ink is most preferable when writing out a formal invitation or when
filling in the spaces on a partially engraved invitation. The same is true for acceptances
and regrets. Fancy colored inks, like green and red, are never used.

14. The appropriate attire or uniform should be indicated at the lower right hand
corner of the invitation. For example: "Service Dress, White" "Dress, Gray," "Black,
Tie," "Informal,"' "Barong Tagalog," etc.

15. The address of the envelope must be handwritten. Abbreviations are not
normally used. A return address should not be written. Extra care should be taken to
 PROTOCOL AND SOCIAL USAGE 184
insure the correct spelling of names, and exact titles of persons invited. The civil status
and titles of all persons invited should always be verified.

16. Letters of thanks for invitations must also be handwritten. A typewritten letter
is at once stiff and cold; a handwritten one, warm and friendly.

17. It is correct to extend invitations by wire. In this case, acceptance or regrets

may also be sent by wire.

MISCELLANEOUS

1. When entertaining in someone's honor, it is customary to offer him the

choice of the date and to consult persons close to him concerning the guest list and party
details. It is also helpful to know the honoree's particular likes and dislikes.

2. Formal invitations must be sent about two weeks in advance. Others may
be sent about a week to ten days in advance, depending upon the degree of the
preparation necessary and the size of the gathering expected.

3. When it is desirable to control the entrance of guests, particularly in large

gathering admittance cards may be enclosed with the invitation. The instruction “please
present at the door" or "please present" must be indicated on this card. In all cases it is
best to carry the invitations for the particular occasion.

4. It is always courteous to explain one's inability to accept an invitation.

One should doubt the sincerity of the party extending the invitation.

5. "It is more in good taste to postpone than to cancel an invitation, How

ever, when invitation have to be recalled due to unavoidable circumstances, like the
death of the President or of an important government oft1cial, the invited guests must be
notified immediately, briefly stating the reasons for the cancellation. If made in writing,
the form may be printed to save time.

6. Once transmitted the acceptance to an invitation may not be withdrawn

for some flimsy reason. Such an action is proper only on account of sudden illness,
official absence from the town or city where the party is to be held, or the recent
death of close relatives. It is understood that oft1cial duties take priority over social
engagement.

7. If one already accepted an invitation to a party on a certain date, he must

not accept another one to be held on the same date unless he is absolutely sure he
would be able to attend both, Conditions of traffic, distance, and weather may govern in
this case. The first acceptance must prevail even if a later invitation to a party on the
same day is considered more important.

8. In the police service, an officer and his wife must take ,active part in
social activities of the organization. It is also their duty to accept invitations from outside
the organization, particularly those extended in consideration of the husband's rank and
position in the PNP. The wife's obligation to attend is as much as the husband’s.
 PROTOCOL AND SOCIAL USAGE 185

9. When an officer is absent from station, the wife is expected to continue to

fulfill social obligations as far as practicable.

10. When an officer is abroad as an official guest of a foreign government he

should never decline invitations from his hosts for any reason other than illness. It is
understood that acceptance of an official invitations to spend some time in the foreign
country carries with it the obligation to be present in all activities, official and social,
connected with the visit One should never allow matters of personal convenience to
interfere with the agreed itinerary.

11. The honoree in a party should arrive about five minutes before the
appointed time. Thus, if a reception is being held in one's honor during the hours from
6:00 p.m. to 8:00 p.m., he should arrive around 5:55 p.m. It is most inconsiderable for
one being honored, to keep the hosts and guests waiting.

12. The hosts must see to it that everything is set at about ten minutes before
the appointed time. They should also be ready to receive guests at that time.

13. It is never proper for an officer to send someone else to attend a party to
which he was originally invited.

14. It is wise not to invite persons whose precedence is still doubtful and may
be in conflict with those of important guests. It is also important to consider the
compatibility and pm1icular interests of a given group of guests. This would require
some knowledge of "personalities.:

15. Invitations must be checked against the guest list before they are mailed or
delivered by messenger. An omission would certainly mean embarrassment on the part of
the hosts.

16. In private life, replies to invitations are addressed to the hostess only. It is
assumed that the woman in the family normally attends to this detail.

17. When attending socials in a foreign country, an officer wears the PNP
uniform equivalent to the one indicated on the invitation card. The advice of the PNP
Attache should be sought on this matter.

18. An invitation by the President of the Philippine Republic is a "must" and

supersedes all other social engagements. This is the only situation which allows
withdrawal of acceptance to a party on the same date. A note of explanation, or a
telephone call, would be necessary to withdraw from the other engagement. Likewise,
when in a foreign country, an invitation from the Head of state is in the same category.

19. If one will be out of town for a considerable length of time, or would be
unable to accept invitations during a certain period, the practical thing to do is to give
appropriate instructions to somebody in the office and at home to open all invitations. to
parties that will take place after the expected return to station may be withheld, and hosts
notified accordingly. If time allows, invitations may be forwarded.
 PROTOCOL AND SOCIAL USAGE 186

SECTION V

CORRESPONDENCE

The quality of the letter that person write revealhis appearance, taste, and
personality. It is therefore, important that letters should be so written as to create an
effective and favorable impression, To that end, the principles of effective letter writing
should be in making correspondence.

PERSONAL, SOCIAL AND BUSINESS CORRESPONDENCE

A letter has five parts, namely, the heading, which includes the address,
and date: the salutation which is the opening greeting; the body of the letter, which is the
subject or main content of the letter; the complimentary close, which is the "fare well”
and the signature. The proper forms for these parts are discussed below

1. Heading

This includes the address and date and is written at the upper right hand
side of the page An upper margin of one inch and a right hand margin of three-quarters
of an inch should be allowed.

Example: 08 Jose Abad Santos Street

Kiblawan, Davao Sur
July 04, 1994

It should be noted that the name of the street, the city or province, and the month are
written in full. There is no period at the end of the line. Punctuation's are used only for
clearness in separating the month from the year, the district from the city, from the
province. These are observed for politeness. In a letter to a friend, the address may be
omitted and only the day or date is given.

2. The Salutation

This is placed at the left and should be about one-half below the inside
add. ns, if there is one; otherwise, two spaces below the heading. A colon is used after a
salutation in a business letter.

a. Personal or Socia! Salutation:

EXAMPLE: My Dear Miss Barreto,

Dear Bernard,
Dear Mr. Arroyo,
 PROTOCOL AND SOCIAL USAGE 187
The expression "My Dear Miss Barreto" is more formal than the
expression "Dear Miss Barreto"

b. Business Salutations:

EXAMPLES: Dear Sir:

Gentlemen:
Dear Madam:

NOTE: Never substitute "Mesdames" for "Madam."

3. The Body

This contains the main substance of the letter. It is best to use simple
expressions and to see to it that the letter is clear and direct. A personal letter, whatever
the subject is, must express sincerity throughout. It is good form in a business letter to
come right to the point and be brief about it.

4. The Complimentary Close

This is nothing but a graceful way of ending the letter. It is placed two or three
spaces below the body of the letter and beginning slightly to the right of the center of the
page. The first word is capitalized and a comma is placed at the end of the phrase.

Examples of closing a personal or social letter:

(1) More formal: "Sincerely"

"Sincerely yours,"

(2) To family or friends:

"Affectionately, "
"Very sincerely,"
"Very sincerely yours,"
"Affectionately yours,"
"Cordially yours,"
"Cordially,"
"Devotedly,"
"Devotedly yours,"
"Lovingly,"

b. ” Yours truly”, ”Yours very truly," "Very truly yours," "Respectfully," is used
only by a subordinate to a superior; "Faithfully yours'" is proper when a man is writing
to a woman, a clergyman, or a high official.
 PROTOCOL AND SOCIAL USAGE 188
Florid phrases such as the following should be avoided": "I beg to remain ,“ “ I remain
your humble servant," "Your humble servant kisses your feet."

5. The Signature

It should be placed two or three lines below the complimentary close and
a little to the right It should always be hand written even when the letter is typed.

a. Women’s Signature

(1.) Single woman – If it is necessary to identify herself as an unmarried woman, she

writes her signature this way: (Miss) Marilou Pilarca. On a typed letter, Marilou Pilarca
signs this way: Marilou Pilarca (handwritten)
Marilou Pilarca (typewritten)

(2) Married woman - Marilou Pilarca is married to Froilan Elopre would sign her
name:

To intimates: "Marilou Elopre o. or "Malou"

To others: "Marilou Elopre" or "Marilou Pilarca Elopre" (Mrs.'Froilan Elorpe)

b. Man's Signature:

Unless his first name is used by both man and woman, such as:
"Patrocinio," "Loreto," he should never use a "Mr." in his signature. Titles like Colonel,
Attorney, Dr., are not used before the signature, though a doctor and a clergyman may
use M.D. and D.D. respectively, after their names. A police officer may put his rank and
service under his name.

Thus:
Ramon Melvin Buenafe
CInsp PNP

6. The Inside Address

The inside address, that is, the name and address of a person to whom you
are writing. is customary in business correspondence or a letter requiring a touch of
formality. It is not used in a letter to a friend
 PROTOCOL AND SOCIAL USAGE 189

USE OF “MISS," "MASTER," "MESSRS," ".JR" AND "ESQ"

1. "Miss"

This is the formal way to address fin unmarried woman as well as a female
child. The oldest daughter. The oldest daughter of a family - even if she is only four - is,
correctly, Miss Reyes. "Miss" is also used when one is not sure if a woman is married or
single.

2. "Master"

This is traditionally used in addressing a boy under twelve.

3. "Messrs "

This is an abbreviation of the French word "Messieurs." It should be used

only for letters addressed to two brothers, not to father and son, thus: The Messrs. Juan
and Pedro Reyes. If there are no other brothers in the family, the address could be
shortened to: The Messrs. Reyes.

4. “Jr.”

When used after a man's name, it means that he has the same name as his
father, thus: Julio Perez, Jr.

5. “Esq”

This is an English title meaning a gentleman. It is used without the "Mr."

thus: Pedro Ramos, Esq.

ADDRESSING THE ENVELOPE

The address on the envelope should contain the same information and should be
written in the same manner as the inside address, if any. If handwritten, it should be neat
and legible.

SEQUENCE OF PAGES

1. Personal or Social Letters

In single sheet stationery, page one is where the letter starts, page two is
the back of page one, etc On a double (folded) sheet stationary, the following ways are
preferable.
 PROTOCOL AND SOCIAL USAGE 190

a. If the letter is short, only the first page is used, writing from top to
bottom.

b I f the letter is to cover two pages, use the first page, and the page three
(the right hand page inside the fold).

c. If the letter is to cover all the pages, the generally accepted and most logical
way is to write pages 1,2,3 ,4, just as you come to them.

d. If it is desired to number the pages, it should be placed on the top.

2. Business Letters

The variation allowed in the paging and sequence of social letters is not
permitted in business letters. If a letter exceeds one page, all other pages should be
numbered.

TYPEWRITTEN AND HANDWRITTEN LETTERS

SOCIAL LETTERS

1. Letter of Condolence

This is one of the letters that must never be omitted. In case of death of a
friend, you should condole with the nearest kin whether you know the person or not. This
can be done in various ways. The easiest way, although rather impersonal, is using a
calling card with "Deepest sympathy" written on it. Another way is by telegram, such as
"My heartfelt sympathy in your great sorrow." If written, it must be handwritten.
Exception to this rule is a letter of condolence from a business office concerning a
business acquaintance. The following, are suggested for a letter of condolence.

a. Begin with an expression of sympathy

b. Express your interest in the deceased.
c. Give a short comforting remark.
d. Make a final expression of sympathy and affection.

A letter of condolence to a friend might read:

Dear Jaime.
 PROTOCOL AND SOCIAL USAGE 191
I was deeply grieved to hear of your mother passing today. She was such a kind,
thoughtful, and charming person who was loved by all who know her. I know what the
bitter loss means to you, but it would be of some comfort to know that all those who had
the good fortune of meeting her will share your grief Please let me know if there is
anything I can do for you to make your burden a little easier:

Sincerely,
Rogelio

A more formal letter to an acquaintance should read:

Dear Mr. Diaz,

Please accept my most sincere sympathy in your recent bereavement, Your wife
had such a beauty character and personality that left a lasting impression upon those
who met her.

Sincerely yours,
Melvin

NOTE: In whatever manner the letter is conveyed, it must be done the day you
hear of the death.

2. Answering Letters of Condolence

The answer to a letter of condolence need not be prompt. It can be

anytime up to six weeks after receipt of the letter. The letter must be answered by the
receiver or by a close relatives, in case of illness. It would be handwritten on plain white
paper or on black-bordered mourning paper. The answer must be short and personal. It
might read.

Dear Mrs. Savio

Thank you very much for your note of sympathy.

Very sincerely.

Panchito Severo

3.. Letter of Thanks:

This type of letter should be written when someone has shown you
hospitality, sent you a gift, or done you a favor. Though a must, it is an informal letter
and can written on any kind of stationery or even postcards when written to a close
 PROTOCOL AND SOCIAL USAGE 192
friend, if a couple has enjoyed the hospitality of another, it is the wife who usually writes
the letter of thanks. It should be handwritten, friendly and informal in tone. A typical
letter of thanks might read:

a. For a weekend visit

EXAMPLE:

Dear Delia,

Pete and I had such a lovely weekend with you and Joe in your new mountain
house. We enjoyed the scenery, air, food, and above all your delightful company.

Thanks again for everything.

Affectionately,
Ramona

b. For gifts

Any gift received should be acknowledged with a thank you note as soon
as possible. An exception to this is a gift which you received directly from the giver and
for which you gave your thanks on the spot. The letter may be written on It foldover card.

EXAMPLE:

Dear Nimfa,

Thank you so much for the lovely dress. It is just the material, color, and
print that I need for the coming Jaycee outing. It was so kind of you to remember me on
my birthday. Thanks again

Love,
Gigi

c. For wedding gifts

This letter should be written promptly within two or three weeks at the
most. The bride does the writing. The letter should be written as to include the groom.

EXAMPLE:
 PROTOCOL AND SOCIAL USAGE 193
Dear Mr. Romero,

Romy and I were overjoyed with the beautiful silver tray you sent us. It is
such a lovely one that we have given it a prominent place in our display of wedding gifts.
It matches perfectly with the coffee set we received. Tommy joins me in sending you our
warmest thanks.

Affectionately yours,

Amor

NOTE: A study should be made on how a bride signs a thank-you letter for a gift
sent by a guest invited by the parents.

4. Letter of Congratulations:

Traditionally and correctly this type of letter is handwritten. Letters of

congratulations may be sent to a friend on such occasions as: graduation, promotion, birth
of child, engagement, wedding, etc. In an engagement or a wedding, you should
congratulate the man and wish the girl happiness.

EXAMPLE

Dear Pons,

I have just read in the PNP Journal of your well-deserved promotion to

Senior inspector: Malou joins me in extending sincere congratulations and wishes for the
best in everything.

Sincerely

Froy

5. Letter of Social Introduction

The current trend which is gaining wide acceptance is toward the more informal
way of introducing scattered friends.

EXAMPLE

Dear Choleng and Dodong,

Sol and Jorge de los Santos , very good friends of ours from Lucena, Quezon will
be in Taipei during the first week of May. They will stay at the Grand Hotel. I have told
them about your assignment in Taipei and they would be happy to meet you during their
 PROTOCOL AND SOCIAL USAGE 194
stay there. If you could have spare time, look them up in the hotel. I know you will like
them as they are both your age and are fond of outdoor life.

Affectionately,

Jona

BUSINESS LETTERS

A business letter should be simple, brief, and to the point. It may be handwritten
or typewritten. In the former, efforts should be exerted to make the handwriting legible in
order to avoid misunderstandings.

1. Ordering from a store

EXAMPLE

54 Rizal Street

Luzon Art Lighting

25 Mabini Street
Manila

Dear Sir:

Please send me via PAL at the above address the following articles listed in your
recent brochure:

One (1) pi candle holders 2xVX………………..P 50.00

Two (2) Lamp Shade 6 BX Blue ………………. 80.00
P 130.00

Enclosed is my check for the amount of P130.00. I shall appreciate your giving
this order your prompt attention.

Very truly yours,

Simon Bolivar
 PROTOCOL AND SOCIAL USAGE 195
2. Letter of reference fir Domestics:

EXAMPLE:

1640 Milagros Street

Sta. Cruz, Manila
August 27 1995

Cecile Librero has been working for us a maid for two years. She has been
cheerful, reliable, honest and neat in appearance. She has been especially kind to my
children and has been of much help to them especially in their homework. It is with deep
regret that we are terminating her services due to our department for foreign assignment.

Daisy Madrid

NOTE: No salutation. “To whom It May Concern” is considered poor form.

EXAMPLE:

65 Bonifacio Street
Lipa, Batangas
February 9, 1995

The Manager
Hotel Nikko
Manila

Dear Sir,

Please reserve a double room, air-conditioned, with two beds, a private bath for
me and for my wife for the period 1-7 March 1995. We would prefer to be in the third
floor with a view of Manila bay. Please confirm the reservation to the above address.

Yours very truly,

Victor Wanchakan

STATIONERY

Just as a person’s clothes and general appearances create a first impression so

does the stationery that he uses in his correspondence. In order to be in good taste, the
paper should be neither too plain nor too ornate.

1. Women’s Stationery
 PROTOCOL AND SOCIAL USAGE 196
For every correspondence

(1) It may either be a single or double sheet.

(2) The edges should be machined out, not deckled.
(3) The color should be white, although gray, ivory light blue are
permissible
(4) The standard size is 5-1/2x6-3/4 inches

(5) It may be printed or engraved with a monogram, name, with or

without address.
(6) The envelope should be the standard design and should match the
paper.

2. Men's Stationery

a. It should be a single sheet, 7 or 8x 1 0 inches.

b. White, gray, blue are the most suitable colors for men.
c. It may be printed or engraved with his monogram or his name;
with or without his address
d. The: edges should be machined cut and the envelope should match
the paper

DPLOMATIC CORRESPONDENCE

Officers assigned abroad as Police attaches or as members of panels in

international conferences may have occasion to handle diplomatic correspondence which
is a class all by itself Part is intended to acquaint officers with the common form of
diplomatic correspondence, Below are explanations of some terms:

Note Diplomatique

A formal communication between tow states and is signed by the representatives

of the states concerned.

Note collective

A formal note by two or more states addressed to one or more states on a subject
of mutual interest. It is signed by the representatives of the sending states.

Note Circular

These are identical notes in the third person from the foreign office to the chiefs
of mission, or by a chief of mission to his counterparts. It is initiated by the sender on the
lower right hand corner.

Note Verbal
 PROTOCOL AND SOCIAL USAGE 197
An unsigned communication which may be used instead of a signed note. It is
written in the third person, without address and signature, but is initiated on the lower
right hand corner. It is also sealed.

EXAMPLE:

The Ambassador of the Philippines presents his compliments to his Excellency,

the Minister of Foreign Affairs, and has the honor to inform his Excellency
that…………………………..

The Ambassador of the Philippines avails himself of the opportunity and

reiterates to his Excellency the assurance of his highest consideration

Taipei, March 3, 1995.

Memorandum

A written statement on any subject. It is similar to the note except that is does not
begin and end with the formal of courtesy.

EXAMPLE:

the Philippines believes that the legitimate claims of Filipino World War II veterans
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Washington D.C. April 20, 1994

Aide Memoire

An informal summary of a conversation or interview between a foreign minister

or his assistant and a diplomat envoy or his representatives. It is not signed nor sealed,
but is initiated at the lower right hand corner.

Pro Memoria

A formal record of a subject discussed. It differs from an aide memoire in

that the letter is an informal summary of a conversation or interview. It s initiated at the
lower right hand corner y the responsible officer.

Instruction and Dispatches

Correspondence between the Home Office, diplomatic and consular officers

abroad are classified into instructions and dispatches. Instruction are communications
from the Home Office to diplomatic consular office abroad; dispatches are
communications from diplomatic and consular officers abroad to the home office.
 PROTOCOL AND SOCIAL USAGE 198
EXAMPLES OF INSTRUCTIONS:

LETTERHEAD

UNRESTRICTED

I n reply, please address

The Secretary of Foreign Affairs
and refer to

File No.

Sir:
.. ........................................................................................................

. .........................................................................................................

................................................................................................................

Very truly yours,

Secretary of Foreign Affairs

The honorable

The Ambassador of/he Philippines

Bangkok

.......................................................................................................................

. ...........................................................................................................................

.. .......................................................................................................................

EXAMPLE OF DISPATCH

EMBASSY OF THE PHILIPPINES

UNRESTRICTED No. 25

July l81995
Taipei

Subject.. ................................................................................................................
 PROTOCOL AND SOCIAL USAGE 199

The Honorable
The Secretary of Foreign Affairs
Manila, Philippines

Sir:

..............................................................................................................................

...............................................................................................................................

…………………………………………………………………………….............

Very truly yours,

Signature of the Ambassador

SOME COMMON DIPLOMATIC TERMS

The Pouch

Written reports and dispatches from a Chief of Mission for transmittal to

his government are placed in a mailbag exclusively used by the mission. In our foreign
service, the mailbag is called the diplomatic pouch. The British call it "The bag"; the
French, "In valise." The pouch is inviolable, some countries employ special couriers to
carry the pouch; in our foreign service, it is generally sent through the commercial
airlines.

Extra Territory and Capitulation 's

Special privileges and immunities enjoyed by nationals of our country

residing in another by operation of certain treaties. These treaties were called
"capitulation's" and were imposed by the great powers on certain non-Christian
countries. Among the privileges and immunities were: Exemption from local taxation and
exemption from jurisdiction of local courts.

Assylum

A generally accepted practice by which a political refugee in another is not

deported back to his own country. another form of asylum which is called "bast" is
practiced in some countries notably in Iran. By "bast", a big group of politicians, their
families and followers may take refuge in an Embassy or Legation to avoid whatever
harm or injury that master may want to inflict on them.

Diplomatic Privileges
 PROTOCOL AND SOCIAL USAGE 200
Privileges and immunities accorded chiefs of missions, their staffs, and
members of their families among the privileges and immunities are: inviolability of
person and domicile; exemption from local taxation; exemption from local court
jurisdiction. These are usually granted on reciprocal basis.

Attaches

Attaches Members of the staff' of a diplomatic mission or consular office who are
attached thereat for specialized service. In our foreign service there are two types of
attache viz: civil and military. Examples of the former case: Commercial Attache,
Cultural attache, Press attache.

Corps Diplomatique

Includes all the diplomatic staffs and attaches of the various diplomatic
missions in any capital. Consuls are generally not considered part of the corps. the senior
chief of mission is called the "doyen" or "den of the corps."

Safe Conduct

Permission granted to individuals to pass without hindrance through the

territory of a country which is at war with his own country.
SECTION VI

SOCIALS

Socials take a very wide variety of forms, ranging from afternoon tea or
cocktails to a formal dinner or reception. The main differences is the atmosphere of the
occasion. The host can suit the type to the kind of guests he intends to invite or to the
occasion he wishes to celebrate or commemorate. The normal social affairs are discussed
below.

Cocktails

1. Object or Purpose

Cocktails are tendered to introduce an official like a Military/Police

Attache, a passing official like a PNP Officer, a friend, or any person. Sometimes
cocktails are for a get-together or in reciprocation of previous cocktail ,invitation.

2. Time Given

Cocktails are normally given from 1800 to 2000 Hours. However, the time
varies in different countries.

3. Requirements

a. Invitations
 PROTOCOL AND SOCIAL USAGE 201
Normal informal invitations are issued with or without RSVP's or pour
memoirs. The practice in the United states and Europe is to carry the RSVP's in the
invitations while in other countries like Thailand and Taiwan, cocktail invitations
normally do not carry the RSVP's.

b. Drinks

1) In the United States and other countries, Scotch and bourbon

whisky with water or soda are served, Mixed drinks like martinis, tom collins, gimlet,
manhattan, gin and rum cocktails are also served.

2) In European countries, Aperitifs or champagne are served. Mixed

or concocted drinks arc not usually served.

3) Fruit juices must also be available for persons who cannot take
alcohol

c. Canapes

Canapes appetizers are usually served during cocktail parties. They may
be nuts, potato chips, pickles, small frankfurters, caviar or shrimps. In the Philippines,
they may be "dilis", chuns of "tapa", barbecued pork or meat, fried lumpia “,or
clams.They can be elaborate as turkey or roost beef sandwiches. In American cocktails
the guests usually make their own sandwiches out of ingredients already available on the
table. In Europe, sweet, pastries, petit fours and ice cream are served.

4. Attire

Gentleman usually wear business suits or barong tagalog. For women,

cocktail-dress or any less formal attire may be worn although nothing will preclude them
from wearing “ternos.” The uniform is not usually worn unless the occasion demands it,
In is so indicated in the invitation.

5. Duties of the Host and hostess

a. The host and the hostess mayor may not form a reception line. They
should be ready to meet their guests as they come in at all time.

b. They should see to it that no guest is left alone to himself.

c. They must insure everybody has a drink and that the canapes are served
around. If a table for canapes is provided, they must insure that all guests have access to
it.

6. Duties of the Guest

a. The guest must greet the hosts, and the honoree if there is one,
upon arrival.

b. He must circulate and greet as many quests as is practicable, In a

small- sized party, he must meet or greet everybody.
 PROTOCOL AND SOCIAL USAGE 202

c. He should keep or have a ready subject of conversation.

d. Upon departure, the guest must not forget to thank and bid to the
hosts, and the honoree if there is one.

Formal Dinner

1. Object or Purpose

A formal dinner has the same purpose as a cocktail party except that it is
done in a more serious or formal atmosphere.

2. Time Given

In most European countries and in the United States, a formal dinner is

tendered between 2000 and 2030 Hours. In Asian countries, it is customarily given
between 1900 and 2000 Hours.

3. Requirements

a. Invitations

Invitations are issued with RSVP's.

b. What to Serve

A well-balanced menu with a desse11 to match is served. Appropriate .

wines are normally served.

4. Attire

The attire is usually stated in the invitation. If the nature is not mentioned,
the accepted formal wear in the locality is worn. In foreign countries, it is always safe to
find. In foreign countries, it is always safe to find out the most acceptable attire for
occasions of this nature. In the locality, at least a coat and tie with white shirt, or barong
tagalog is worn. The barong tagalog when worn as a formal attire should be pena or jusi
in natural colors, and goes with black tuxedo pants, suspenders, linen undershirts with
half sleeves, black dresses studs, and black cuff links,

5. Duties the hosts

a .The hosts greet the guests as they come. It is good to say something
pleasant to each guest.

b. If a guest is now known, the hosts should present him or her to other guest so
that she may not be left alone.
c. The hosts must inform the guests of the seating arrangement.
d. The host s must show each of the guests equal and impartial attention.
e. The hosts must keep the conversation going.
f. The hosts should accompany the guests to the door upon departure.
 PROTOCOL AND SOCIAL USAGE 203

6. Duties of the Guest

a. The guest must come on time.

b. The guest must greet the hosts and person being honored, if any. In
greeting, lady companion precedes the gentlemen.

c. The guests and their dinner companions must know the seating
arrangements.

d The guest s should not forget to thank and bid good-bye to the
hosts, and to the honoree, if there is any.

e. The honoree, if there is one, sends t10wers before, during or after

the occasion. It is good form for the other guests to express their thanks.

Informal Dinner

1. Object or Purpose

An informal dinner has the same object or purpose as a formal but is held
in a more relaxed atmosphere.

2. Time given

In Europe (France), an informal dinner is tendered between 2000 and 2030

Hours. In the United States and the Asian countries it is customarily given between 1900
and 2000 Hours.

3. Requirements

a. Invitations

Invitations for an informal dinner may be made by telephone, telegraph,

note, informal fold-over car, or through a visiting card. Telephone invitations should
always be confirmed.

b. What to Serve

A well-balanced menu with a dessert to match is served. Appropriate

wines are normally served.
 PROTOCOL AND SOCIAL USAGE 204
4. Attire

Business suits or their equivalents are used, unless prescribed in the

invitation.

5. Duties of the Hosts

A reception line is usually formed during a reception. It is the duty of the hosts to be at
the receiving line on time.

6. Duties of the Guests.

It is the duty of the guest to pass the reception line.

Wines

The Philippines no\ being a wine country, the appreciation for the French real
vintage wines is not keen. The need for wine here is not as strong as those in cold
countries, However, in spite of the fact that in the Philippines, the etiquette on its proper
service is a must for the well cultivated person. There are a few simple rules easy to
remember to prevent embarrassment.

In America, the scotch or bourbon with soda water is a popular drink. In formal
gathering. the martini, manhattan, or old fashioned are often ordered. Except in very
formal gatherings. Americans are fond of serving wines during the meals the ways
European do. In France, the service of the wine is just a part of the correct service of the
meal on all occasions.

Prior to Meals

Aperitifs are served. Europeans usually serve vemouths, dubbonet, port or similar
wines. Americans usually serve scotch or bourbon with soda or water, martini, old
fashioned and similar mixtures. Europeans are not fond of concocting mixtures.

During Meals

1. White wines (chilled or cooled) are served with fish or similar seafood's,
or during seafood cocktails.

2. Red wines (room temperature) are served with meals, fowls, or similar
dishes. A special kind of purple wine is served with the cheese at the end of the meal with
cheese wine.

3. Champagne is usually served with dessert. (Demisic).It can, however, be

served throughout the meal usually dry (brut) in place of both wine or red wine.
 PROTOCOL AND SOCIAL USAGE 205

After Meals

Liqueurs are served after meals usually with coffee. It is never served at any other
time. In general, one is not obliged to serve all the above. A fine good simple wine,
usually red, can suffice. As it has previously been stated, the elaboration of the service
depends on the country where an officer may find himself
 PROTOCOL AND SOCIAL USAGE 206

SECTION VII

RANK AND PRECEDENCE

In the early times official and social functions were often marred by squabbles, in
some cases ending in fatalities among officials and dignitaries each trying to claim
precedence over the other. Conflicts over rank and precedence were especially rampant
among diplomatic representatives in various courts in Europe during the period of from
emergence of nation-states. In order, therefore, to avoid untoward incidents resulting
from improper treatment of rank and honors, rules of precedence have been adopted to
cover the situations in which officials and dignitaries may be grouped together in official
and social functions.

Precedence of Officials in the Philippines-although no law or executive order has

established the order of precedence in the Philippines, in practice the following order
prevails:

The President
The Vice President
Former Presidents of the Philippines
The President of the Senate
Speaker of the House of Representatives
Chief Justice of the Supreme Court
"Foreign Ambassadors Extraordinary and Plenipotentiary
Members of the Cabinet who are Department Heads
Foreign Affairs Secretary
Secretary of Finance
The Secretary of the Interior and Local Government
The Secretary of National Defense
The Secretary of Public Works & Highways
The Secretary of Agriculture & Natural Resources
The Secretary of Education, Culture & Sports
The Secretary of Labor & Employment
The Secretary of Health
The Secretary of Trade and Industry
The Executive Secretary
The Secretary of Technology
The. Secretary of Social Welfare and Services
The Secretary of Budget and Management

Foreign Envoys Extraordinary & Ministers Plenipotentiary Officials with Cabinet rank

The Commission on Immigration

The Chairman, National Economic Council
The .Press Secretary
The Commissioner on Audit
Members of the Senate (by length of Service)
Members of the House of Representatives (by length of Service) Associate
Justices of the Supreme Court
 PROTOCOL AND SOCIAL USAGE 207
The Commissioners on Elections .
Members of the Council of State (not cabinet members)
Acting Heads of Departments & former Vice Presidents of the Philippines The
Undersecretary of Foreign Affairs
Ambassadors of the Philippines
Undersecretaries of Departments including the Assistant Executive
Secretaries
The Governor of the Central Bank
Principal Officers of the Department of Foreign Affairs

Envoys Extraordinary and Ministers Plenipotentiary of the Philippines:

Foreign Charges' d' Aftaires en pied

Foreign Charges' d'Affaires ad in
The Mayor of Manila, the Presiding Justice of the Court of Appeals,
The President of the University of the Philippines,
The Chief of Staff, AFP, The Chief, PNP, Commissioners and officials with the
rank of Undersecretary
Heads of permanent United Nations Agencies in the Philippines with the
rank of Director
The Provincial Governors
The Vice Chief of Staff, AFP and Deputy Chiefs, PNP
Foreign Ministers - Counselors, Counselors of embassies and legations,
Consuls-Generals, Foreign Military Attaches with the rank of Brigadier General or the
equivalent rank in the AFP, and PNP and other
officers of equivalent rank
Mayor of Chartered Cities
Directors of Bureaus and Chiefs of Offices
Presidents, Chairman & Managers of Government Corporations
Second Secretaries & Consuls of Foreign Embassies and legations, foreign

Assistant Police Attahces with the rank of Major or Captain, and otherss of
equivalent rank in the PNP, Subordinate officials

The above order of the precedence which includes civil and military and
diplomatic representatives would vary under certain situations. For instance, in the
absence of the President, Vice President, the Senate President, the Speaker of the House
of Representatives, and the Chiefs of the Supreme Court, the Secretary of Foreign
Affairs who is the senior member of the Cabinet, takes over in which case he outranks
foreign ambassador. Again, in a function wherein the host is a foreigner, Filipino officials
present therein precede their foreign counterparts. Thus, if Mr Tong, a Chinese residing
in Manila invites the Chief PNP to a party in his house, the Chief PNP precedes the
Chinese Chiefs of Police precedes the Filipino people.

The guest of 01 honor precedes all other guests. Usually no person of a higher
Rank than the guest of honor is invited to the same function. Should it become necessary
to invite such a person of a higher rank, h should be properly informed Acceptance on his
part after being so informed means that he has no objection to being outranked by a guest
of honor.
 PROTOCOL AND SOCIAL USAGE 208
Filipino custom requires that a Filipino host give way to the President of the
Philippines. The latter occupies the seat normally occupied by the host. The host and his
wife sit to left and right respectively of the President, or the next positions of honor
depending on the seating arrangement.

Diplomatic representatives precede each other in accordance with regulations

adopted at the Congress of Vienna in 1815 and the Congress of Aix-Ia-Chapelle 111
1818. In the order of rank, diplomatic representatives are divided into the followil1p'
classes.

1. Ambassadors. Legates-Papal ambassadors extraordinary (always a

cardinal) charged with a special mission. Nuncios (ordinary papal ambassadors who are
never cardinals

2 Envoys and ministers plenipotentiary.

3 Ministers resident, accredited to the foreign ministers.

4 Charges' d' Affairs, accredited to the foreign ministers.

The above-mentioned diplomatic representatives together with their staffs

constitute the Diplomatic Corps of which the head is called the Doyen or Dean. In many
countries, the papal representative is the dean of the diplomatic corps regardless of his
date of accreditation, and sometimes regardless of his rank. In some countries, the dean is
the diplomat with the rank. In some countries, the dean is the accreditation. The title of
Dean or Doyen is only for ceremonial purposes. A5 in the Philippines, no other
prerogatives go with that title.

Consular officers, who under international laws are not diplomatic

representatives, do not have a right to precedence except among themselves and in their
home governments. They are classified in the order of rank as; consuls-general,
c6nsuls or vice-consuls. They precede each other according to rank and deities of
exequatur which is a written official recognition and authority of a consular officer issued
by the government to which he is accredited. There is also a dean of the Consular Corps,
a position which is, as in the case of the Dean of the Diplomatic Corps, for ceremonial
purposes only.

Philippine diplomatic missions abroad observe the following order of precedence:

1.. The Chief of Mission or in his absence the Charges ' d' Affaires.

2. The Counselor or Senior Secretary where there is no counselor.

3. The Police Attache who ranks with but after the foreign affairs officer of
the same rank as that of the assimilated rank of the assistant attached.

4. Commercial and other attaches with assimilated ranks as foreign affairs

officers take precedence with but after Police Attaches or Assistant Police Attaches of the
same rank as theirs.
 PROTOCOL AND SOCIAL USAGE 209
5. Attaches without assimilated ranks as foreign affairs officers follow
foreign affairs officers of any class, unless otherwise specified by the Department of
Foreign Affairs.

Precedence among wives of officials follows that of their husbands. There

are certain exceptions to this rule. For instance, Mrs. Reyes, wife of Senator Reyes, is'
requested by the President of the Philippines to be the hostess in an affair in Malacanang
in the absence of the First Lady. Mrs. Reyes, then will precede all the ladies present in the
affair. In case the official is a lady, the husband does not follow the order of precedence
of his wife. Thus, the' husband of a Filipino lady ambassador ranks after the last
accredited minister. A safe rule to follow in the case of lady official precedes according
to the normal order of precedence; If spouses are included, the lady official ranks after
the wife of the official immediately preceding her. As for her husband, it is sometimes
easier for him to feign diplomatic illness in order to avoid awkward situation.

The ranks or grades of officers of the Philippine National Police follow

more or less the common pattern of officers' ranks which has evolved in the armed
forces of the world’s major military/police powers.

The different ranks or grades of officers can be divided into the following categories:

1. General or Flag Officers. This category includes all Directors or Chief ,

Superintendents.

2. Field Officers. The US Navy and the British services call this category “
senior officers”. which includes C, Supt., Sr. Supt., Supt., C Insp and their equivalents..

3. Company Officers. This group includes all junior officers in the ranks of
Sr Insp, and Insp.

4. Cadets. This grade is below the normal officer grades. Individuals holding,
this rank enjoy officer status but do not have full officer responsibility.

Based on regulations and traditions of tile service, the following rules or

precedence in the PNP are being followed:

1. The Chief PNP, precedes all officers of the PNP.

2. The DCA follows the DCO.

3 Retired Chief: PNP follows the incumbent DCA.. Where there are
more one retired Chiefs, PNP, they precede each other according to the date of retirement
irrespective of rank.

4. TCDS follows the DCO.

5. Directorial Staff Follows the TCDS.

6. Directorial Staff by rank promotion seniority and other assignment

of the latter.
 PROTOCOL AND SOCIAL USAGE 210
7. Other officers not mentioned above shall observe rank seniority
protocol, irrespective of assignments.
 PROTOCOL AND SOCIAL USAGE 211

SECTION VIII

TABLE ETIQUETTE

FORMAL

Duty of the Host

The host shall provide a plan of good seating arrangement (see Chapter on
Seating Arrangement) and shall see that minimum requirements for dinner service are
observed. The following guides are useful:

1. 1, service plate per person per course, (In some dinners, only 1 service
plate may suffice for the entire course which are served all at once.)

1 Salad Plate 1 Soup Plate

NOTE: In a strictly form,1 dinner, bread if served, is not served on a bread plate but
laid on the table.

2. Silver
Soup Spoon
Service Fork
Fish fork (if fish is served)
Oyster Fork
Cocktail Fork (if hors d'oeuvre is served or seafood cocktails)
Dessert Spoon
Service Knife
Butter Knife
Salad Knife
Coffee or Tea Spoon
“Porte couteau" (Knife support European Style)

3. Napkin (linen preferred, folded into various artistic forms).

4. Nice Table Cloth (preferably linen white to match napkins).
5. Center piece to rhyme with candles. Most hosts prefer to light candles. (,
6. Dessert Plate
7. Finger Bowl on fruit plate.
8. Glasses (see Appendix D-3),
9. Coffee cup and saucer (in Europe demi-tasse).
10. Liquor Glass and Wine Glasses.

NOTE: Coffee may be served at the table or in the office room with the liquors.
Some find it an ordeal to go through a formal dinner. A well prepared attractive menu
should be planned to make the dinner worthwhile. Formal attire is worn in Europe and
the US. Dark suits are permissible depending on the atmosphere. Bread is on the left.
Salad is on the right.

Instruct servers to serve wife or honoree first and then other ladies in the
order of seating protocol. Serve on the left and reverse the plate on the right.
 PROTOCOL AND SOCIAL USAGE 212

The hostess normally has a little bell to call the servers.

When wine is served, a little is poured on the host's glass for tasting and
approval. This is an old European custom. Wine glasses are not lifted from the table but
poured in place.

An informal is similar to a formal dinner but less rigid. It may be buffet

style where visitors serve themselves and settle in table (Not practiced in Europe).

Duty of Guests

Observed correct table manners.

MANNERS AT THE TABLE

Controversial topics should be avoided at the dinner table. Talking about

accidents, illness, scandals and unaesthetic things should be avoided. Conversation and
laughter should always be toned down, but the hostess must encourage these all around.
Well-bred men and women talk pleasantly with those who seem to be disengaged at any
particular moment.

The left hand may be used to convey food with the fork if one has just Gut
a piece of meat or fish with the knife. The continental fashion is accepted everywhere. It
is, of course, entirely correct to use the right hand all the time for conveying food. A
combination of the two system is currently acceptable.

In a small sit down dinner, II is a good form to wait for the host to be
served, or wait the host to begin

It is ill-mannered for a guest to go to the table with a lighted cigarette in

his hand. Smoking is permitted only on the living room or library, and after the
conclusion of the meal.

Wiping the silver and plates with the napkin indicates poor manners. Like
wise, leaving the spoon in the cup, or looking for toothpicks, show lack of breeding.

One must make sure his mouth is empty and his lips wiped clean before
taking any beverage. This will keep the rim of glasses and cups free from ugly marks.

Napkins are placed on the lap by individual guests after the hostess has
taken hers. Dinner napkins are folded once (in half), while others are spread out. At the
end of the meal, the napkin must be laid to the left of the plate. No attempt need be made
to let it look neat, it should never be refolded.

The soups spoon is filled from one side in an outwardly direction, that is,
away from the one eating. Convey to the mouth, the same side of the spoon, never from
the end tip of the spoon. Again, one can easily tell breeding in a person by just observing
the manner he or she takes soup.
 PROTOCOL AND SOCIAL USAGE 213

One should never stir up food or mix different items into the heap on the
plate. Gravy, for example, is used only for specific dishes and should not be spread all
over.

Chewing must be done quietly with the mouth closed.

Foreign particles taken with the food (stone or gravel) are removed with
the thumb and forefinger. Same thing is done with the fish bones and other small bones.

Wet spoons should never be used to take sugar. The butter knife is for
butter only, the salad fork, for the salad only. The hostess sees to it that silverware is
adequate for every purpose. .,

No guest should deliberately ask for second helpings, but make sure there
is company. The experienced hostess immediately places an individual guest at ease by
providing the company herself.

It is but proper for a guest to take a little of every item offered at the table.
the guest's favorable reaction to the food served is some compensation to the hostess.

Elbows must never be placed on the table while one is eating. The feet
must be flat on the floor.

When one has finished a certain course, or the meal itself, he places the
fork and the knife on the right side of the plate. The sharp side of the knife must face
inward and the fork, with the tines up, is placed to the left of the knife.

When using a linger bowl, the fingers of one hand are dipped lightly,
followed by the other hand. they are dried on the napkin, on the lap and not on the surface
of the table. In the use of the finger bowl, it is normally served with the fruit plate.

One must be familiar with the manner of eating different kinds of cooked
foods, vegetables and fruits. It adds a great deal to one's poise to know if a certain item is
to be taken with a particular type of fork, with the fingers, with a teaspoon or with the aid
of a sharp knife.

When in doubt, follow the host.

 PROTOCOL AND SOCIAL USAGE 214

SECTION IX

SEATING ARRANGEMENTS

In any official assembly or social gathering where the seating of guests is

in accordance with protocol, arrangements must be worked out well in advance to avoid
confusion and embarrassment. The gathering may be one of the following: conference,
international celebration or local, seated meal; reception of important personages in a
house or in a club; a national celebration where civil and police officials will be present;
police parade and review; graduation exercises. There are simple situations which also
require the proper seating of passengers inside a car. (See Appendix D-4).

In preparing for this type of activity, one must always bear in mind that an
individual guest will surely feel either uneasy or offended if he is not seated in the right
place. The problem of seating by precedence must then be studied in minute detail, and
relative rank of guests carefully established. It must also be remembered that the rules
must be so applied in order to blend into what may be termed as the “ happiest
arrangement”. It would be difficult to have a complete set of rules in any given situation,
but available rules may be used effectively as guides. There will always be some
departures. For example, in a sit-down dinner, it may be better to considered the language
spoken by certain guests instead of rank in order to avoid the situation which some
guests may not be able to converse with anybody. Explanations are order in case of
departures from normal arrangements.

It is always safe and wise to consult officials and individuals familiar with
seating arrangements when preparing for a formal gathering. Protocol officers in the
Department of Foreign Affairs and in foreign service establishments are used to these
routine experience is the best guide here as the particular composition of a group of guest
always a new thing.

The problems are most difficult when officials and prominent persons
from different countries are expected to attend. In general. the hosts follow their own
rules. These rules may differ from those of other countries. Likewise, when entertaining
one's home, the host must follow the normal arrangements accepted in his country When
being entertained. however, one" must be prepared for variations in arrangements in
accordance with practices in the home country of the hosts. Guests should accept the
procedures even if they are not in accordance with those they have been used to (See
Appendix D-4).

Rules for Table Seating:

1. The senior ranking guest in a party is always given the first place of
honor. No departures from this rule is allowed even if a party is being held in another
person's honor who is of lower rank. If the hosts prefer to give the guest of honor the
"number one" place at the table for a guest, avoid if possible, inviting a person of higher
rank.
 PROTOCOL AND SOCIAL USAGE 215
2. The place of honor for a male guest is to the right of the hostess. The wife
of the male guest given the place of honor sits on the right of the host. As a general rule,
the most ranking woman guest sits on the right of the host.

3. The male guest, who is next in rank to the one given the place of honor,
sits on the left of the hostess. The woman guest corresponding to this position sits on the
left of the host.

4. Men and women sit alternately, but a man and his wife should not be
seated next to each other. If this happens because of the peculiar composition of a group
of guests, the wife must be seated elsewhere even if this move would violatt: the rule on
seating in accordance with rank.

5. For the orientation of guests in a seated meal, a seating diagram showing

individual assignment of seats should be posted in a convenient place. Care must be taken
that no names are omitted.

6. In a large gathering where guests will be distributed in two or more tables

(as in a hotel or garden party), it is sometimes more practical to list the guests in
alphabetical order indicating the table number opposite each guest's name. Another
variation of this method is to list the guest in groups according to table numbered.

7. To facilitate pairing off at formal dinners, "take-in" cards are normally

used. "Take-in" cards inside appropriate envelopes are arranged on a silver tray near the
front door in the room where cocktails are served. The name of the gentleman is on the
envelope, and the name of his lady partner on the card inside. A small sketch of the
relative location of the seat for the lady may be indicated on the card. Instead of the
"envelope and card" method of single folded card may be used with the name of the
gentleman outside and that of his partner inside.

8. It is the male guest's concern to meet his partner well before dinner time.
In a small gatherings, The host sees to it that every man knows his dinner partner. In big
dinners, necessary introductions may be made by persons close to the host, or by official
aides.

9. The host gives the signal for the guests to proceed to the table. He offers
his right arm to the wife of the most ranking gentleman present. They are followed by
the hostess and the ranking guests. There is an important exception to this rule, however.
When the President is present as a guest, he goes in first with the hostess. All the other
pairs proceed in the same manner.

10. Cards placed on the table show exactly the seating assignments. The name
of every guest is hand-printed in black ink on a heavy plain white card about two inches
long and one and a half inches high. The name may be printed on both sides of the card,
will be made to stand on the table by itself or with the use of suitable stands. In case only
one side is printed, that side should face the guest. The flag of a General or Admiral, seal
of embassy, or personnel crest, may be embossed at the top center of this card .Needless
 PROTOCOL AND SOCIAL USAGE 216
to say, placed cards also serve to identify one's table neighbors those sealed across.
Conversations at the table could then proceed more smoothly.

11. When dining in a restaurant, the woman should have the best view when
seated. This view may be the main part of the restaurant or a nice one seen through a
picture window. A good seat, therefore, is given to the woman. In a party of foure, the
women must be similarly seated as the place of honor is always the one with the best
view.

12. Men should always help their dinner partners take assigned seats. This is
done by slight movements of the chairs to be occupied by the dinner partners. Then men
usually take their own seats afterwards at the cue from the hostess. At the end of the meal
the man stands 6rst and helps their ladies out of their chairs.

Other Seating Arrangements:

1. In an international conference, precedence is established in accordance

with the rules agreed upon by the working committees acting for the different delegations
absence of understanding to this effect, it is the responsibility of the host government
establish precedence good for the duration of the conference. The normal procedure is to
follow the alphabetical order of the official names of the participating countries. Thus, in
a conference where countries of Southeast Asia and South Asia will participate, India
would precede Indonesia, and Indonesia would precede Pakistan and the Philippines. The
members of each delegation will have seats beside and behind the Chief Delegate.
Questions of seating arrangement within a particular delegation is decided by the Chief
Delegate while the conference is in progress.

2. In big celebration where many persons of rank are expected, and when
those attending may be grouped according to their positions, it is sufficient to 'reserve
seats by groups, at the middle part or the right or left of the central platform. The
arrangement will depend on the size of the gathering and the facilities available. The rule
is to treat a group of guests of equal ranks as one person, and its precedence established
in relation to other groups. Estimates of the number of persons attending per group may
be made by protocol officers with experience in past celebration. Arrangements of this
nature must be flexible and adjustments made as fast as possible to accommodate the
greatest number without violating basic rules of protocol.

3. Inside an automobile, the place of honor is at the right. If there are three
passengers, the least ranking sits at the middle of the seat. The ranking person enters the
car last in countries where the traffic rule is to drive on the right side of the road
He gets out of the car ahead of the others. In other countries where people drive to the
left, the senior enters the car first and leaves last.

4. At the opera or theater the best seats should always be offered to the
higher ranking persons. In theater boxes and opera boxes, the place of honor is the middle
part, front row. In the main floor or balcony of a theater the best seats are those found in
the middle part.
 PROTOCOL AND SOCIAL USAGE 217
5. The guest speaker in a graduation ceremony is given the place of honor,
that is, the center position of the front row or to the right of the ranking official present.
Officials participating in the exercise should be given seats in the front row. Others are
seated in accordance with rank.

6. In staff conferences, the officer presiding sits at the head of the table. The
conferees will be seated in. accordance with their respective ranks. Departures from these
arrangements may be made for convenience in the presentation of certain materials by a
conference.

7. When entertaining in one's residence, the place of honor in the living room
is the right side of the sofa. This is usually reserved for the most honored guest.

8. Inside a VIP aircraft, cel1ain seats are reserved for high officials.
Passengers of lower ranks should follow the instructions of the aircraft commander
regarding seating arrangements.
 APPENDICES 218

APPENDICES

English-Tagalog Translation "A"

Diagram of Formation "B"

Our Flag "C"

Protocol and Social Usage

Illustrations "D"

D-l Official Calling Cards

D-2 Samples of Invitations, Acceptance,

and Regret Cards

D-3 Glasses Used in Socials

D-4 Seating Arrangements

 APPENDICES 219

APPENDIX “A”

ENGLISH - TAGALOG
TRANSLATION
 APPENDICES 220

APPENDIX “A”

MGA UTOS HUKBO NA NAPAGTIBAY NG KAPULUNGAN

SA PAGKAKAISA

I. Pagsasanay ng Kawal na walang Sandata

School of Soldiers without Arms

A. Katayuan sa Pagtinding - Position of Attention

1. Attention Humanda
2. FalI in Line Humanay
3. At close Interval, Masingsing Pagitan
FalI in Line Humanay
4. Assemble Magtipon
5. As You were Manumbalik

B. Katayuan sa Pahinga Nakahinto - Rest at the Halt

1. Parade Rest Tikas Pahinga
2. Stand at Ease Tindig, paluwag
3. At Ease Paluwag
4. Rest Pahinga
5. Fall Out Tiwalag
6. Dismissed Lumansag

C. Pagharap Kung Nakahinto - Facing at the Unit

1. Right Face Harap sa Kanan, Rap

2. Left Face Harap sa Kaliwa, Rap
3. About Face Harap sa Likod, Rap
4. Left Half Face Harap sa Hating-Kaliwa
5. Right Half Face Harap sa Hating Kanan
6. Center Face Harap sa Gitna,Rap

D. Pagpugay Salute

1. Hand Salute Pugay Kamay, Na

2. Eyes Right Tingin sa Kanan, Na

E. Hakbang at Lakad- Steps and Marching

1. Count Cadence Count Bilang Hakbang, Na

2. Two Three Four Isa Dalawa Tatlo Apat
 APPENDICES 221
3. Forward March Pasulong, Kad
4. Squad/Platoon Halt Tilap/Pulutong Hinto
5. Mark Time March Patakda, Kad
6. Half Step March Hating-Hakbang, Kad
7. Double time March Takbong-Hakbang, Kad
8. Time March Siglang-Hakbang, Kad
9. In Place Double Time March Sa Lunan, Takbong Hakbang, Kad
10. Right Step March Hakbang Pakanan, Kad
11. Left Step March Hakbang Pakaliwa, Kad
12. Backward March Paurong, Kad
13. Two, Three, etc ..... Isa, Dalawa, Tatlo, atbp .....
Step to the Right, March Hakbang Pakanan, Kad
14. Rear March Pabalik, Kad
15. Change Step March Palit-Hakbang, Kad
16. Route Step March Layang Hakbang, Kad
17. At Ease March Paluwag, Kad
18. Column Right March Liko sa Kanan, Kad
19. Column Left March Liko sa Kaliwa, Kad
20. Column Half Right March Liko Hating-Kanan, Kad
21. Column Half Left March Liko Hating-Kaliwa, Kad
22. Incline to the Right Pagawing Kanan, Kad
23. Incline to the Left Pagawing Kaliwa, Kad
24. Right Flank March Kanang Panig, Kad
25. Left Flank March Kaliwang Panig, Kad
26. Right Turn March or Pihit sa Kanan 0
Right Half Turn March Pihit sa Hating Kanan, Kad
27. Right Turn March or Pihit sa Kaliwa
Right Half Turn March Pihit sa Hating Kaliwa, Kad
28. Right Oblique March Hilis Pakaliwa, Kad
29. Left Oblique March Hilis Pakaliwa, Kad
30. In Place Halt Sa Lunan Hinto
31. Resume March Patuloy,Kad
32. Assembly March Magtipon,Kad
33. Squads Right (Left) March Pangkat Pakanan/ Pakaliwa Kad
34. Squads Right (Left) about Pangkat Pakanan/Pakaliwa, pabalik
March Kad
35. Right (Left) by Squads March Kanan/Kaliwa, Kad

II Pagsasanay ng Pulis na May Sandata

School of Police with Arms

A. Pagsasanay sa Paghawak ng Sandata at Kalis

Manual of Arms for the Rifle and Sword

1. Right shoulder Arms Sa Kanang Balikat,Ta

2. Left Shoulder Arms Sa Kaliwang Balikat,Ta
3. Order Arms Ibaba,Ta
4. Present Arms Itanghal ,Ta
5. Port Arms Agap,Ta
6 Inspection Arms Siyasat,Ta
 APPENDICES 222
7. Riffle Salute Pugay,Ta
8. Trail Arms Bitbit,Ta
9. Sling Arms Isakbat,Ta
10. Unsling Arms Libis,Ta
11. Fix Bayonet Ikabit and Talibong, Na
12. Unfix Bayonet Alisin ang Talibong,na
13. Adjust Sling Ayusin ang Sakbat,Na
14. Stack Arms Itungkod,Ta
15. Take Arms Dampot,Ta
16. Ready Draw, Sword Antabay Bunot, Kalis
17. Ready Sheath, Sword Antabay Salom,Kalis

III. MALAPITANG PAGSASANAY

1. Dress Right Dress Tunton-Kanan,Na

2. Dress Left Dress Tunton-Kaliwa,Na
3. At Close Interval, Masinsing Pagitan
Dress Right Dress Tunton-Kanan,Na
4. Ready Front Handa, Rap
5. Cover-up Tumakip, Na
6. Guide Right Patnubay sa Kanan
7. Guide Left Patnubay sa Kaliwa
8. Guide Center Patnubay sa Gitna
9. Don’t Anticipate the command Huwag Pangunahan ang Utos
10. As You were Manumbalik
11. Stand Fast Manatili/Walang Kilos
12. Continue the March Tuloy ang Lakad
13. Prepare the Halt Humandang Huminto
14. GuidesRight/Left Patnubay sa Kanan/Kaliwa
15. Guides on the Line Patnubay Sumahanay
16. Post Sumalunan
17. Take Interval to the Right Ibayong Dalang Pakanan/
Pakaliwa, Na
18. Assemble to the Right/ Magtipon sa Kanan/
Left March Kaliwa, Kad
19. In Column of Platoons Sunuran ng mga Pulutong
20. In Column of Squads Sunuran ng mga Tilap
21. In Line of Platoons Mga Pulutong Nakahanay
22. Leading Platoon Unang Pulutong
23. Platoon on the Line Pulutong Sumahanay
24. Right/Left Front into Line March Hanay Pakanan/Pakaliwa, Kad
25. On Right/ Left Into line March Pangkat-pangkat Hanay Pakanan/
26. In Two Ranks form Platoon March Dalawang Hanay,Pulutong
27. Platoon/Company Right/ Pulutong/Balangay Pakanan/
Left March Pakaliwa, Kad
28. Column of Twos, to the Right/Left Dalawang Tudling Pakaliwa/
or Right/Left by Twos March Pakanan 0 Dalawahan Mula sa
Kanan Kaliwa,Kad
29. File From the Right/Left or Sunuran Mula sa Kanan!Kaliwa
Right/Left File March Isahan mula sa Kanan/Kaliwa,Kad
30. Extend on Rear -Platoon Padalang sa Ikalawang Pulutong
 APPENDICES 223
31. Coy F/Sgt Tandis Balangay
32. Extend on the Right/ Padalang Kanan/
Left Platoon Kaliwang Pulutong
33. Close on Leading Platoon Lapit sa Unang Pulutong
Right/Left Kaliwa/Kanan
34. Close on Leading Platoon Lapit sa unang Pulutong
35. Close on Right/Left Platoon Lapit sa Kanang/Kaliwang
Pulutong
36. Extend on Rear Platoon Padalang sa Ikalawang Pulutong
37. Extend on Right/Left Platoon Padalang sa Kanang/Kaliwang
Pulutong ,Kad
38. Close Column of Platoons Masinsing Sunuran ng mga
Pulutong
39. Close Line of Platoons Masinsing Hanay ng mga
Pulutong

IV. PAGPALIT NG PAGlTAN - CHANGE INTERVAL

1. Close March Lakad Masinsin,Kad

2. Extend March Padalang,Kad
3. Take Interval March Ibayong Dalang,Kad
4. Open Ranks March Pabukang Taludtod,Kad
5. Close Ranks March Masinsing Taludtod,Kad

V. PAGBILANG NG PULIS
ACCOUNTING OF MAN

1. Count Off Isahang Bilang,Na

2. Call Off Tuluyang Bilang,Na
3. Count by Twos/Threes/Count Dalawahang/Tatluhang Bilang, Na
4. By the Number Sabay na Bilang

VI. MGA UTOS SA PATIKAS AT PAGMASID AT MGA SEREMONYA

1. First Call Unang Panawagan

2. Assembly Call Panawagan sa Pagtitipon
3. Guides on the Line Mga Patnubay Sumahanay
4. Guides Post Patnubay sa Lunan
5. Sir, The Parade is Formed Ginoo,Handa napo ang Patikas
6. Sir, The Battalion is Formed Ginoo, Handa napo ang Talupad
7. Take Your Post Sumalunan
8. Sound Off Ihudyat
9. Sir, The Troop is Ready for Ginoo,handa napo ang Tipon sa
Inspection Pagsisiyasat
10. Troop the Line Libutin ang Hanay
11. Staff Behind Me Kalipunan,Sumalikod Ko
12. Receive the Report Tanggapin ang Ulat
13. Report Mag-ulat
14. _____ All Present or ________Narito pong Lahat o
 APPENDICES 224
Accounted For Napag-alaman
15. Publish the Order Ipahayag ang Kautusan
16. Attention to Order Makinig sa Kautusan
17. Details for Today Mga Nakatalaga ngayon
18. Field Officer of the Day Pinunong Panlarangan
19. Officer of the Day or Pinunong Tagapamahala or
Officer in charge Pinunong Pangalaga
20. By Order Sa Utos ni
21. Officers, Center March Mga Pinuno, Pumagitna,Kad
22. Officers, Halt Mga Pinuno, Hinto
23. Officers, Post March Mga Pinuno,Balik Kad
24. Persons to be Decorated and All Mga Taong Pararangalan at Mga
Colors ,Centers March Watawat, Pumagitna Na
25. Colors, Reverse March Watawat,Palit-Lunan Kad
26. Sound the Retreat Ihudyat ang Pagsilong
27 Pass- in- Review Pasa-Masd
28. Dismiss your Company Lansagin ang iyong Balangay
29. Take Charge of your Companies Pamunuan ang iyong Balangay
30. Prepare for Inspection Humanda sa Pagsisiyasat
31. Sir, this Concludes the Ceremony Ginoo, Tapos na po ang Seremonya
32. Staff, Behind Me ,March Kalupunan, Sumalikod Ko,Kad
 APPENDICES 225

APPENDIX “B”

DIAGRAM OF FORMATION
 APPENDICES 226

APPENDIX “C”

OUR FLAG
APPENDICES 227
 APPENDICES 228
OUR FLAG

I pledge allegiance to the Filipino Flag and to the Republic for which it
stands, one Nation under God, indivisible, and dedicated to the ideals of justice, liberty
and democracy.

The National flag represents the living country and is considered to be a

living thing emblematic of the respect and pride we have for our nation. Our flag is a
precious possession. Display it proudly.

There are certain fundamental rules of Heraldry which, if understood

generally, indicate the proper method of displaying the flag. The right center arm, which
is the sword arm and the point of danger, is the place of honor. Hence, the union of the
flag is the place of honor or the honor point.

The National Emblem is a symbol of our great country, our heritage and
our place in the world. We owe reverence and respect to our flag. It represents the highest
ideals ofindividuallibeI1Y, justice and equal opportunity for all.

How to Display the Flag

When flown at half-staff, the flag is first hoisted to the peak of the staff
and then lowered to half staff. Before lowering the flag for the day it is again raised to the
peak and then lowered. On Memorial Day, the flag is displayed at half-staff from sunrise
until noon and at full-staff from noon until sunset.

When a number of flags are grouped and displayed from staffs, the flag of
the Philippines should be in the center or at the highest point of the group.

When it is displayed with any other flag against a wall or in the open, from
crossed staffs, the flag of the Philippines should be on the right, the flag's own right, and
its' staff should be in front of the staff of the other flag.

When carried in a procession with another flag or flags, the flag of the
Philippines should be either on the marching right, i.e., the flag's own right, or when there
is a line of other flags, the flag of the Philippines may be in front of the center of that line.

When the Flag of the Philippines is displayed in a manner other than by

being flown from a staff it should be displayed flat, whether indoors or outdoors. When
displayed horizontally against a wall the blue field should be uppermost or when
displayed vertically the blue field should be the flag's own right, i.e., the observer's left .
When displayed in a window it should be the same way. The flag should never be draped
or used as decoration to replace bunting.

Improper use of Flags. Never use them for decorations. Red- White-blue
striped bunting is designated for this use When displayed over the middle of the street, as
between building, the flag of the Philippines should be suspended vertically with the blue
field to the north on an east and west street and to the east on a north and south street.
 APPENDICES 229
When used on speakers platform the flag should be displayed above and
behind the speaker. It should never be used to cover the speaker's table not to drape over
the front of the platform. If flown from a staff it should be on the speaker's right.

When it is displayed on the pulpit or chancel in a church, the flag of the

Philippines should be flown from a staff placed on the clergyman's right as he faces the
congregation, all other flags on the pulpit or chancel should be on his left.

However, when it is displayed on the floor of the church, level with the
congregation, the position of the flag is reversed from that above. It is placed on the right
of the congregation, as it faces the pulpit or chancel.

When used to cover a casket, the flag should be placed so that the union is
at the head and the blue field over the heart of the deceased. The flag should not be
lowered into the grave. It should not be allowed to touch the ground. The casket should
be carried foot-first from the hearse to the grave. .

Flag Etiquette

It is universal custom to display the flag only from sunrise to sunset on

buildings and on stationary flag staffs in the open. However, the flag may be displayed at
night upon special occasions when it is desired to produce a patriotic effect.

The Flag should be hoisted briskly and lowered ceremoniously. The f1ag
should be displayed daily, weather permitting, on or near the main administration
building of every public institution. The flag should be displayed in or near every polling
place on election day and should be displayed during school days in or near every
schoolhouse.

No other flag or pennant should be placed above or if on the same level, to

the right of the flag of the Philippines except during church services conducted by the
chaplains at sea, when the church pennant may be flown above the flag during church
services.

The flag should form a distinctive feature of the ceremony of unveiling a

statue or monument, but it should never be used as the covering for the statue or
monument.

The f1ag, when flown at half-staff, should be first hoisted to the peak for
an instant and then.1owered to the half-staff position. The flag should be again raised to
the peak before it is lowered for the day. By "half-staff" is meant lowering the flag to one
half the distance between the top and bottom of the staff.

That no disrespect should be shown to the flag of the Philippines, the flag
should not be dipped to any person or thing. Regimental colors, Provincial flags, and
organization or institutional t1ags are to be dipped as a mark of honor.

The flag should never be displayed with the blue field down save as a
signal of dire distress.
 APPENDICES 230
The f1ag should never be carried flat or horizontally, but always aloft and
free.

The f1ag should never be used as a drapery of any sort whatsoever, never
festooned, drawn back, nor up, in folds but always allowed to fall free.. Bunting of blue,
white and red, always arranged with the Blue above the white in the middle, and the red
below, should be used for covering a speaker's desk, draping the front of a platform, and
for decorations in general.

During the ceremony of hoisting or lowering the flag or when the flag is
passing in a parade or in a review, all persons present should face the flag stand at
attention, and salute. Those present in uniform should render the police salute. When not
in uniform men should remove the headdress with the right hand holding it at left
shoulder, the hand being over the heart. Men without hats should salute in the same
manner. Aliens should stand at attention. Women should salute by placing the right hand
over the heart. The salute to the flag in the moving column should be rendered at the
moment the flag passes.

When the National Anthem is played and the flag is not displayed, all
present should rise and face toward the music. Those in uniform should salute at the first
note of the anthem, retaining this position until the last note. All others should stand at
attention, men removing their headdress. When the flag is displayed, all present should
face the flag and salute.

When to Display the Flag

Private buildings and homes are to display the flag from sunrise to sunset
on national and special holidays proclaimed by the President - such as the Araw ng
Kagitingan (April 9), National Flag Day (May 28), Independence Day (June 12),
National Heroes Day (last Sunday of August), Bonifacio Day (November 30) and Rizal
Day (December 30).

Government offices shall display the flag everyday, from sunrise to sunset.

How to Display the Flag

When flown from a flagpole: The blue field should be on top in time of
peace, the red field on top in time of war.

When in vertical hanging position: The blue field should be to the right
when viewed (kit side of the observer) in time of peace, and the red field should be to the
right in time of war.

When flown with other flags: When used with the flag of the Armed forces
or civic organizations, or that of another nation, the Philippine flag should always be
above or on the right of the other flag. When in a parade with flags of other countries,
the Philippine flag should be in the center and in front of the other flags.

Nothing should ever cover or decorate the surface of the flag. The flag
should always occupy the highest place of honor, and shall not be placed under any
picture, or below a person.
 APPENDICES 231

Never use the flag as a staff whip, covering for tables or curtain for door
ways.

Never display a tattered or worn flag. Dispose of it by burning so as to

avoid an old flag being thrown into the garbage.

Flag Care
..
To preserve the bright, rich colors used in the manufacture of the
Philippine flags, it is necessary that extreme care be used when flags are cleaned.

Flags may be safely cleaned by dry cleaning.

The flag should not be displayed on days when the weather is inclement. If
the flag should get wet, spread out the flag until completely dry. DQ not fold or roll up
the flag when damp.

When handled with the care described above, the flag should give
excellent service commensurate with the quality of the particular brand used.

The flag, when in such condition that it is no longer a fitting emblem for
display should be destroyed in a dignified way, preferably by burning.
 APPENDICES 232

APPENDIX “D”

PROTOCOL AND SOCIAL USAGE

ILLUSTRATIONS
 APPENDICES 233

D-1

OFFICIAL CALLING CARDS

 APPENDICES 234

CARDS OF HIGH RANKING OFFICIALS

THE SECRETARY OF THE

INTERIOR AND LOCAL GOVERNMENT

THE UNDERSECRETARY OF THE

INTERIOR AND LOCAL GOVERNMENT

THE GOVERNOR OF

DAVAO SUR

THE MAYOR OF QUEZON CITY

 APPENDICES 235

CARDS OF HIGH RANKING OFFICIALS

POLICE DIRECTOR GENERAL

RECAREDO A SARMIENTO II

POLICE DEPUTY DIRECTOR GENERAL PERCIVAL L ADIONG

Deputy Chf PNP for Administration

POLICE CHIEF SUPT ORVILLE G GABUNA

Regional Director
Recom 9

PERSONAL CARDS

POLICE DIRECTOR HONESTO P BUMANGLAG

Director, DHRDD

POLICE DIRECTOR HONESTO P BUMANGLAG

Director, DHRDD
 APPENDICES 236

CARDS OF HIGH RANKING OFFICIALS

P/CHIEF SUPT MANUEL P PORRAS

Regional Director, Recom 5

P/CHIEF SUPT ROBELITO R COMILANG

Philippine National Police
Superintendent
Philippine National Police

COMMODORE JUAN DE LA CRUZ

Philippine Navy

POLICE FORCES ATTACHE CARDS

P/SR SUPT ENRIQUE S GALANG

Police Attache
Embassy of the Philippines

Paris, France

P/SR SUPT JAIME L DELA CRUZ

Police Attache
Embassy of the Philippines

Taipei
 APPENDICES 237

P/SR SUPT QUIN V OSORIO

Police Attache
Embassy of the Philippines

Washington, D.C.

P/CHIEF INSP DECOROSO M MATA

Police Attache
Embassy of the Philippines

Bangkok, Thailand

PERSONAL CARD

EDITO A. ODCHIGUE

P/Sr Supt PNP

P/SUPT and MRS JOSELITO B POMPERADA

WIFE'S CARD

MRS. RUELA F. FABIANA

 PROTOCOL AND SOCIAL USAGE - ILLUSTRATIONS 238

D-2

SAMPLE OF INVITATION,
ACCEPTANCE AND
REGRETS CARDS
 PROTOCOL AND SOCIAL USAGE - ILLUSTRATIONS 239

Invitation to A Guest of Honor By Note

Dear Mrs. Bayani-

Will you and Congressman Bayani dine with us either

Monday, March tenth or Thursday the twentieth at eight o'clock? We want
to ask some friends to meet you and hope very much that we may be
fortunate enough to find you free on one of these evenings.

Very sincerely,

Nena Cruz

February fifteenth

Dear Mrs. Bayani,

Will you and Congressman Bayani dine with. us on

Tuesday, sixth of June at eight o'clock.

Hoping so much for the pleasure of having you with us that

evening.

Sincerely yours,

Nena Cruz

May twenty-second
 PROTOCOL AND SOCIAL USAGE - ILLUSTRATIONS 240

Invitation Using Informal Card (Handwritten)

Garden Party

Wednesday, July 24th

at 5:30 p.m.

6818 Connecticut Avenue

Chevy Chase, Md.

(one mile past Chevy Chase Circle) (Opposite Shepard St.)

R.S.V.P.
Hu 3-6600 ext 173 Informal

Despedida for Mr. and Mrs. Gill McChee

Cocktails

Thursday, July twenty-fourth

6:30-8:30 p.m.

6818 Connecticut Avenue

R.S.V.P
HO 2-1770
OL 6-8433 Informal
 PROTOCOL AND SOCIAL USAGE - ILLUSTRATIONS 241

“AT HOME” Invitations

The Chief PNP

and Mrs. Sarmiento II

At Home

Monday, the twelfth of June

Six to eight o’clock

R.S.V.P. Quarters No 1
6-66-11 Camp
Local 236

The Superintendent of the Philippines National Police Academy

and Mrs. Flores

At Home

Wednesday, the fourth of June

Six to eight o’clock

R.S.V.P. Uniform White

Cavite 976 Superintendent’s Quarters

In honor of Major General & Mrs. Pedro del Mundo

Major General and Mrs. Reynaldo Campos

At Home

Wednesday, June ninth

Six-thirty to eight-thirty o’clock

Quarters No. 12, Wt Wm McKinley

 PROTOCOL AND SOCIAL USAGE - ILLUSTRATIONS 242

P/ Chf Supt Ramon Melvin Buenafe

To bid farewell
and to Welcome
P/Sr Supt Amado Clifton Empiso
and Mrs. W.S. Mckinnon
Request the pleasure of the company of
P/Supt & Mrs. Antonio M.Torres

At Cocktails

On Tuesday,18th of December
at six-thirty o’clock

R.S.V.P.
Ex3-1940
Ext 60 Uniform

To bid farewell

Lieutenant Colonel and Mrs. Y.Y. van Hoover

Request the pleasure of the company of
P/Supt and Mrs. Zosimo S. Magno

At Cocktails

On Monday; October twentieth

at six o’clock
18 Crafton Street
Chevy Chase, Maryland

R.S.V.P.
FE 36930
Ext 239 Informal
 PROTOCOL AND SOCIAL USAGE - ILLUSTRATIONS 243

To bid farewell to Colonel and Madame Abdul Latief

The Ambassador of the Republic of Indonesia
And Madame Rotowidigdo
Request the honor of the company of
P/SSupt and Mrs. Ruben Cabagnot

At Cocktails

On Tuesday, October ninth

At six to o’clock

R.S.V.P.
Hudson 3-6600 ext 2020 Massachusetts, Avenue, N

To honor The Honorable Renato De Villa

Secretary of National Defense of the Philippines
The Philippine Ambassador and Mrs. Romulo
Request the pleasure of the company of
P/Supt and Mrs. Panfilo M. Ovejas

At a reception

On Thursday, May twenty-third

At six to eight o’clock

R.S.V.P.
Ex3-1940
Ext 0 Uniform
 PROTOCOL AND SOCIAL USAGE - ILLUSTRATIONS 244

To say good bye

The Ambassador, Republic of Argentina
to the Organization of American States
and Mrs. Eduardo A. Garcia
request the pleasure of the company of
P/Supt and Mrs. Froilan P. Elopra

At Cocktails

on Wednesday, July 30
At six to eight o’clock
Pan America Union

R.S.V.P.
HU3 -5741

The Vice Chief on Naval Operations

and Mrs. Russel
request the pleasure the company of
P/Supt Fernando S. Pace

at a reception

on Saturday, the fourteenth of February

At five- thirty to seven- thirty o’clock

R.S.V.P.
Liberty 5-6700 Quarters A
Extensions 53959 2300 E Street, N.W.
 PROTOCOL AND SOCIAL USAGE - ILLUSTRATIONS 245

Invitation to afternoon Reception

In honor of
The President of the Republic of the Philippines
And Mrs. Fidel V. Ramos
The Philippine Ambassador and Mrs. Carlos P. Romulo
Request the pleasure of the company of
P/Chf Supt Rex L. Urbano
At a reception

On Thursday, the twenty- eight of January

From five to seven o’clock
The Mayflower Hotel

R.S.V.P.
Social Secretary
Philippine Embassy Day Clothes

To honor The Speaker Philippines

House of Representatives and Mrs. De Venecia
The Philippine Ambassador and Mrs. Romulo
Request the pleasure of the company of
p/Supt and Mrs. Rodante V Rueda

at a reception

on Monday, December tenth

at six to eight o’clock
3422 Garfield St., N.W.

R.S.V.P.
Hobart 2 -1400 ext 19
 PROTOCOL AND SOCIAL USAGE - ILLUSTRATIONS 246

The Director of CIS and Mrs. Alinsangan

request the pleasure of the company of
P/Supt and Mrs. Antonio m. Gonzales

at cocktails

on Wednesday, the twenty-second of May

at six-thirty to eight –thirty o’clock
Officers’ Club, Camp Crame, Q.C.

Liberty 5-6700
Extension 56497 Service Dress White

To say farewell to Colonel Holman D. Hoover

Foreign Liaison Officer
Major General and Mrs. John M. Willems
request the pleasure of your company

at a reception and buffet supper

on Wednesday, the twenty –seventh of May

at seven thirty o’clock
The officers’ Club, Fort Lesley J. Mcmair

R.S.V.P. Uniform
Liberty 5-6700 or
Extension 54772 Black Tie

To honor Mr. and Mrs. Thomas J. Wason, Jr.

The Philippine Ambassador and Mrs. Romulo
Request the pleasure of the company of

P/Supt Dario L. Gunabe

At Dinner

On Thursday, June twenty –eight

At eight o’clock
Sent Room
Waldorf Astoria

To remind
 PROTOCOL AND SOCIAL USAGE - ILLUSTRATIONS 247

PARTIALLY ENGRAVED INVITATIONS

BOLD LETTRS UNDERSCORED

In honor of
Lieutenant General Alfonso Arellano
Chief of Staff Armed Forces of the Philippines
Lieutenant General and Mrs. Carter B. Magruder
Request the pleasure of your company

At a reception

On Tuesday, the twenty-sixth of November

From six to eight o’clock
The Officers’ Club, Fort Lesley J. McMair.

R.S.V.P. Uniform
Liberty 5-6700 or
Extension 54772 Informal

To bid farewell and to present

Major General and Mrs. J.H. Walsh
The assistant Chief of Staff, Intelligence, USAF
and Mrs. Willard Louise
request the pleasure of the company of

P/CInsp Ephrem Arcilla

at six- thirty o’clock

on Friday,the second of May

Bolling Air Force Base Officers’ Club

R.S.V.P. Uniform
Liberty 5-6700 or
Extension 71097 Informal
 PROTOCOL AND SOCIAL USAGE - ILLUSTRATIONS 248

TYPES OF SEMI-ENGRAVED INVITATIONS

To Honor, to Meet, to Celebrate, etc.

The Philippine National Police Attache

and Mrs, Carlito B Tabaculder
request the pleasure of the company of

( Persons invited) at ( Nature of Affair)

on ( Day and Date)

at { Time) o’clock
( Place of Gathering)

R.S.V.P.
( Telephone or Address} (Attire)

NOTE: In this invitation, the place for the social affair and telephone number for the
RSVP are already indicated. This is convenient when the official normally holds social
affairs in a definite place, and the RSVP is handled by a secretary at a specific telephone
number. This is the simplest and the least expensive semi-engraved invitation which can
be used by anybody.

In celebration of Korean Army Day

The Ambassador of Korea and Madame Yang
Request the honor of your company

at cocktails

on Tuesday, the second of October

from six until eight o’clock
The Korean Embassy
2320 Massachusetts Avenue

R.S.V.P.
Adams 44112 Informal
 PROTOCOL AND SOCIAL USAGE - ILLUSTRATIONS 249

The Superintendent
Of the United States Naval Academy
and Mrs. Smedberg
request the pleasure of your company

at Luncheon

on Friday, the seventh of June

nineteen hundred and fifty-seven
at twelve-thirty o’clock

R.S.V.P.
Flag Lieutenant

On the occasion of the National Day

The Ambassador of Thailand and Madame Khoman
Request the pleasure of your company

at a Reception

on June the twenty-fourth

from six-thirty to eight-thirty o’clock

R.S.V.P.
North 7-1849 Terrace Banquet Room
2390 Tracy Place, N.W. Shoreham Hotel

On the occasion of the National Day

The Ambassador of Thailand and Madame Khoman
Request the pleasure of your company

at a Reception

on June the twenty-fourth

from six-thirty to eight-thirty o’clock

R.S.V.P.
North 7-1849 Terrace Banquet Room
2390 Tracy Place, N.W. Shoreham Hotel
 PROTOCOL AND SOCIAL USAGE - ILLUSTRATIONS 250

The Secretary of Defense

Request the pleasure of your company
at a special concert of
The United States Armed Services Joint Symphony
Orchestra under the direction of
Lieutenant Colonel Albert Schoepper,
United States Marine Corps
Commander Charles Brendler, United States Navy
Colonel George S. Howard, United States Air Force
On Thursday, the thirty-first of July
At eight in the evening

R.S.V.P. In the Event of Rain

Liberty 5-6700 the concert will be
extension 52783 performed on the first
or 52592 of August at the same hour

The Ambassador of the Philippines and Mrs. Romulo

request the pleasure of your company
at the Washington Premiere of

“Bayanihan Folk Arts Troup of the Philippines”

on Wednesday, the eleventh of June

at eight-thirty o’clock
Lisner Auditorium, twenty-first and H Street, N.W.

R.S.V.P.
Hobart 2-1400, Ext. 44 Black Tie
 PROTOCOL AND SOCIAL USAGE - ILLUSTRATIONS 251

In honor of
The Military, Assistant Military Attaches
Major General and Mrs Robert A. Schow
and
Major General and Mrs G. Van Houton
request the pleasure of your company
at a Retreat Parade
on Sunday, the thirtienth of june
at three forty-five o’clock
followed by a reception at the Officer’s Club
Fort Myer, Virginia

R.S.V.P. Uniform
Liberty 5-6700 or
Extension 71097 Informal

In honor of
The Military Attaches and their Wives
The Chief of Staff of the United States Army
and Mrs. Maxwell D. taylor
request the pleasure of your company

at a reception

on Thursday, the seventh of February

from half past six until half past eight o’clock
The Officers’ Club, Fort Myer, Virginia

R.S.V.P. Uniform
Liberty 5-6700 or
Extension 71097 Informal

R.S.V.P.
Hobart 2-1400, Ext. 44 Black Tie
 PROTOCOL AND SOCIAL USAGE - ILLUSTRATIONS 252

In honor of
The Military Attaches and Assistant Attaches
From Africa, Asia and the Pacific Ocean Area
Major General and Mrs. Robert A. Ichow
request the pleasure of your company

at a Supper Dance

on Friday the fifth of October

at eight o’clock
The Officers’ Club Fort Myers Van

R.S.V.P. Uniform
Liberty 5-6700 or
Extension 71097 Informal

In celebration of the
Tenth Anniversary of Korea Independence Day
The Ambassador of Korea and Madame Yang
Request the honor of your company

at the reception

on Friday, the fifteenth of August

from six-thirty until eight-thirty o’clock
The Korean Embassy
2320 Massachusetts Avenue

R.S.V.P.
Social Secretary Informal

R.S.V.P.
Hobart 2-1400, Ext. 44 Black Tie
 PROTOCOL AND SOCIAL USAGE - ILLUSTRATIONS 253
THE INVITATION

General Carlos P. Romulo

and the Board of Governors
of the Philippine Association
request the honor of your presence
at a dinner commemorating

The Fifteenth Anniversary

of the
Fall of Bataan and Corregidor
on Monday, May sixth
at eight o’clock
Grand Ball room

R.S.V.P. Black Tie

Invitation to a Formal Dinner with RSVP Card Enclosed

(Separate Card)

Kindly report to

General Carlos P. Romulo

Philippine Association
Suite 316,1025 Connecticut Avenue, N.Y.
Washington, 6, D.C.
 PROTOCOL AND SOCIAL USAGE - ILLUSTRATIONS 254
In celebration of the Brazilian Air Force Day
The Air Attache Brigadier General
Ignacio de Loyola Daher
The Assistant Air Attache and Mrs. Martino C Santos
The Chief of the Brazilian Aeronotical Commision
and Mrs. Jose Arellano dos Paseos
request the pleasure of your company

at a buffet dinner

on Tuesday, the twenty-third of October

at eight o’clock
Officers’s Club, Bolling Air Force Base

R.S.V.P. Informal
Columbia 5-6700

The President of the Republic of the Philippines

And Mrs Fidel V. ramos
Request the pleasure of the company of

Pol Dep Dir Gen Agerico N. Kagaoan

on Friday evening, the fourteenth of June

at half after ten o’clock
The Pan American Uninon

R.S.V.P.
Philippine Embassy
1617 Massachusetts Avenue White Tie

In honor of the Secretary of Foreign Affairs of the

Philippines
and
The Ambassador of the Philippine and Mrs Romulo
request the honor of the company of
Pol Dep Dir Gen and Mrs. Romeo O. Odi

at a Reception

on Friday, the fifth of June

at ten o’clock
Grand Ball room, Mayflower Hotel

R.S.V.P.
2201 R Street, N.W. White Tie
1617 Massachusetts Avenue White Tie
 PROTOCOL AND SOCIAL USAGE - ILLUSTRATIONS 255

D-3

GLASSES USED IN SOCIALS

 PROTOCOL AND SOCIAL USAGE - ILLUSTRATIONS 256

D-4

SEATING ARRANGEMENTS